You are on page 1of 258

TM 9-285

WAR DEPARTMENT

TECHNICAL MANUAL

SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES


SEPTEMBER 21, 1942
TM 9-285

TECHNICAL MANUAL WAR DEPARTMENT


TM 9-285 Washington, September 21, 1942

SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES


Prepared under the direction of the
Chief of Ordnance

CONTENTS
Paragraphs Pages
SECTION I. Introduction ..................... 1- 3 2- 9
II. Winchester Shotgun, 12-Gage, M97. 4- 11 10- 37
III. Winchester Shotgun, 12-Gage, M12. 12- 19 38- 58
IV. Stevens. Shotgun, 12-Gage, M620A,
M520, and M620.............. 20- 27 59- 87
V. Ithaca Shotgun, 12-Gage, M37..... 28- 35 88-111
VI. Remington Shotgun, 12-Gage, M10. 36- 43 112-136
VII. Remington Shotgun, 12-Gage, M31. 44- 51 137-160
VIII. Remington Shotgun, 12-Gage, Mll11
and Sportsman ............... 52- 60 161-192
IX. Savage Shotgun, 12-Gage, M720... 61- 69 193-223
X. Stoppages and immediate action.... 70- 74 224-231
XI. Special maintenance ............. 75- 78 232-235
XII. Materiel affected by gas.......... 79- 82 236-238
XIII. Ammunition ................... 83- 98 239-248
XIV. References ..................... 99-100 249-250
INDEX ..................................... 251-257
TM 9-285
1-2
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Section I

INTRODUCTION
Paragraph
Scope............................................... 1
Arrangement of manual ................................ 2
General ............................................. 3

1. SCOPE.
a. This technical manual is intended to serve temporarily (pending
the publication of a more complete revision) to give information and
guidance to personnel of the using arms charged with the operation,
maintenance and minor repair of this materiel.
b. This manual contains in brief the available information necessary
for the identification, operation, care, and cleaning of the shotguns listed
below. In addition is included the disassembly and assembly of the guns
for the purpose of cleaning and lubrication, and available information
on ammunition.
Shotguns covered in this bulletin are as follows:
Winchester Repeater, 12-Gage, Remington Repeater, 12-Gage,
M97 M10
Winchester Repeater, 12-Gage, Remington Repeater, 12-Gage,
M12 M31
Stevens Repeater, 12-Gage, Remington Auto-loading, 12-
M620A Gage, M11
Stevens Repeater, 12-Gage, Remington Auto-loading, 12-
M520 Gage, Sportsman
Stevens Repeater, 12-Gage, Savage, Auto-loading, 12-Gage,
M620 M720
Ithaca Repeater, 12-Gage, M37
c. Disassembly, assembly, and such repairs as may be handled by
using arm personnel will be undertaken only under the supervision of an
officer or the chief mechanic.
d. In all cases where the nature of the repair, modification, or ad-
justment is beyond the scope or facilities of the unit, the responsible
ordnance service should be informed in order that trained personnel with
suitable tools and equipment may be provided, or proper instructions
issued.

2. ARRANGEMENT OF MANUAL.
a. The shotguns covered in this manual are of various makes, models,
and types. In some cases different models of the same make differ widely
2
TM 9-285
2-3
INTRODUCTION
in design, in others the differences are principally in detail of design. Each
make of gun herein is treated separately and where there is extreme
variation in model, the model is treated as a separate gun. Where slight
variations occur in different models of the same make, they are grouped
and the differences explained as they occur.
h. Instructions for disassembly and assembly, and special care and
maintenance are covered in the section pertaining to the gun and in
section XI; while cleaning, lubrication, and general maintenance, which
are more or less common to all the guns, are covered in section II, cov-
ering the Winchester M97 gun, and can be applied in general to the
other guns as indicated.
c. A general description of the gun for identification, together with
such identification marks as may be found upon the gun, are given at
the beginning of the section pertaining to the gun in question.

3. GENERAL.
a. The repeating shotguns covered in this manual are of two general
types, the slide action, sometimes termed pump action, and the auto-
loading or semiautomatic. The autoloading gun is often called an auto-
matic, which is incorrect as the trigger must be pulled for each shot.
h. As already explained, different models of the same make of gun
may vary in design in whole or in part. Also guns of the same make and
model but of different grades may vary slightly in design. In addition
some guns of the same make, model, and grade but of various dates of
manufacture may have slight variations in design. Such variations are
dealt with as far as possible herein. Other variations which may appear
must be dealt with as such.
c. Due to absence of standard ordnance nomenclature for the guns
covered in this technical manual, with the exception of the Ithaca M37,
the parts and assemblies are given the nomenclature supplied by the
manufacturer and appearing in their parts lists. Therefore parts and
assemblies of, for example, a Winchester gun, may be referred to by a
different name than similar parts of a Remington gun. For example, the
slide handle, operating handle, and fore end refer to similar parts on
different makes of guns. The Ithaca Gun M37 has been given standard
nomenclature by the Ordnance Department and this nomenclature is
used herein, and will differ in some respects from that appearing in the
manufacturer's parts list.
d. The word "shell" is standard nomenclature for the shotgun car-
tridge. The word "shell" has therefore been used throughout this technical
manual and substituted for the word "cartridge" appearing in the manu-
facturer's parts lists. Therefore when identifying parts referred to herein,
this fact should be borne in mind.
3
TM 9-285
3
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
e. The word "choke" refers to the boring of the barrel, which varies in
degree from full cylinder to full choke. In this technical manual three
degrees of boring only are referred to, full cylinder (usually referred to
as cylinder), improved cylinder, and full choke. The bore of the shotgun
barrel has two diameters, the chamber diameter, and the true bore diam-
eter. The chamber diameter is greater than the true bore diameter, and
these two diameters are joined by a tapered section usually termed the
forcing cone. In a full cylinder gun the true bore diameter extends from
the forward end of the forcing cone to the end of the muzzle. Choking is
usually accomplished by boring the barrel so that the diameter of the
bore near the muzzle end is slightly less than that of the true bore.
Diameter of true bore of a 12-gage shotgun is 0.729 inch. The degree of
choke in a barrel is measured by the dispersion of the pellets contained
in the shot charge at a given distance from the muzzle. This dispersion
is measured in the percentage of the number of shot pellets contained in
the charge, which will be contained within a 30-inch circle at 40 yards
distance from the muzzle. For a cylinder barrel, this will be 40 percent,
for an improved cylinder barrel, 50 percent, and for a full choke barrel,
75 percent.
f. The term "hammerless" as applied to the guns in this manual refers
to the type of firing mechanism. The Winchester Gun M97 is termed a
hammer gun due to the fact that the hammer is visible and operative out-
side the receiver. The other guns covered in this manual are termed
hammerless as the hammers are wholly enclosed within the receiver and
are thus not manually operative.
g. The nomenclature of the slide handle, by which the slide action guns
in this technical manual are operated, differs for each gun. In the
Winchester gun it is called the action slide handle while in the Rem-
ington gun it is called the fore end, and in the Ithaca the slide handle, etc.
This assembly, however, is basically the same for all the guns, and is.
composed of three main parts: the slide handle tube which slides on the
magazine tube and on which the wooden slide handle is assembled, and
the slide handle bar which extends from the rear of the tube into the
receiver and connects the handle with the slide or operating mechanism.
The tube and bar are integral, welded, or riveted together, according
to the make of gun.
h. The term "clockwise" and "counterclockwise" is used in connection
with the turning of screwed-in parts to denote the direction of turn. The
diameter of the part is considered as the face of a clock and the turn
when clockwise is in the direction the hands of the clock would normally
travel. Counterclockwise is the opposite.
i. The term "take-down" applies to guns so constructed that the barrel,
or barrel magazine and action slide handle group can easily be removed
4
TM 9-285
3
INTRODUCTION
from the receiver without the use of tools. This construction facilitates
cleaning and transportation. The term "solid frame," as used in this
manual, refers to guns which either through basic design or the assembly
of the bayonet attachment to the barrel are not easily taken down without
tools. In the case of the Winchester M97 solid-frame design gun of early
manufacture, the barrel and magazine are screwed directly into the
receiver and are not to be removed except for repair. In the later design
of this gun (par. 4 c) the barrel and magazine are of the take-down type
but are locked into the receiver at manufacture and should not be
removed. In these Winchester guns, however, it is necessary to remove
the bayonet attachment and magazine in order to remove the slide
handle, which must be removed in order to remove the groups from the
receiver for cleaning when necessary. Therefore, the removal and re-
placement of these parts is explained. The Winchester M12 (solid-frame
gun) when issued, will be assembled similarly to the Winchester M97
(solid-frame gun of later manufacture) (par. 12 b). The other guns cov-
ered in this manual are basically of the take-down design, but when the
bayonet attachment is assembled to the riot type of these guns, the barrel
cannot be removed unless the bayonet attachment is first removed. There-
fore, these guns, with bayonet attachment assembled, are considered as
solid-frame guns. In the case of solid-frame guns as explained above, the
bore should be cleaned from the muzzle end without removing bayonet
attachment or barrel, unless it is necessary to remove the groups from the
receiver for periodic cleaning or when the gun is exposed to extreme
conditions as explained in this manual.

j. Disassembly and assembly, as treated in this technical manual,


comprise the removal and replacement of only such groups of parts as
are necessary to a thorough cleaning of the gun. Should further dis-
assembly be necessary for adjustment or repair, the gun should be turned
over to ordnance personnel. A group is a number of parts which either
function together or are intimately related to each other and should,
therefore, be considered together. A group may be composed of one
assembly of two or more parts or sub-assemblies, or a number of assem-
blies and parts. For example, the barrel, magazine, and action slide
group is composed of the barrel assembly, the magazine assembly and the
action slide assembly. In removing the groups or parts from the gun, it
is often necessary to remove other groups or parts first, in order to be able
to remove the group or part desired. In most instances the groups or
parts must be removed and replaced in the order and manner pre-
scribed herein.
k. Modern shotguns may be roughly divided into five general classes:
single-barrel, double-barrel, manually operated repeaters, autoloading
repeaters, and multi-barrel.
5
TM 9-285
3
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPE$
(1) Single barrel guns have a single barrel only and are thus capable
of firing but one shot without reloading. Such guns may be of the ham-
mer or hammerless (usually) design and are manually operated.
(2) Double-barrel guns have two barrels, mounted either side-by-side
or one under the other. In the latter case they are termed "over-and-
under," or "over-under" guns. The side-by-side design, usually termed
"double-barrel," may be hammer or hammerless (usually) guns, while
the "over-under" design is usually hammerless. Both designs are manu-
ally operated and are capable of firing two shots without reloading.
(3) Repeating guns have a single barrel with a tubular magazine
below it, and are capable of firing from 3 to 6 shots without reloading.
Such guns are manually operated by means of a sliding action which
loads, cocks, and clears the gun when operated. The slide action guns
covered in this manual are of this design.
(4) Autoloading repeaters have a single barrel with a tubular maga-
zine below it and are capable of firing from 3 to 5 shots without reloading.
Such guns must be loaded manually for the first shot. When the gun is
fired, the recoil operates the mechanism to clear, cock, and load the gun
from the magazine. The only operation necessary for the operator to
perform after the initial loading and cocking is to pull the trigger. The
autoloading guns covered in this manual are of this design.
(5) Multi-barrel guns have three or more barrels. Usually they have
two shotgun barrels mounted side by side with a rifle barrel below them.
Such guns are usually of the hammerless design and are manually
operated.
1. Shotguns produced by various manufacturers, are usually referred
to as of a specific model and grade. The model refers to the basic mechani-
cal design of the gun; the grade, to the superficial design such as en-
graving, special stock, ribbed barrel, or modifications of design. Grades
are referred to herein only when there is a variation in mechanical design.
The various grades of a specific model may come in different gages, length
of barrels, or degrees of choke in barrel boring. A sporting skeet gun,
however, is usually furnished with a 26-inch barrel and a sporting trap
gun with a 30- or 32-inch barrel. Guns used for game shooting may come
with any length barrel or degree of choke. Such guns usually have a plain
barrel without a rib. In this technical manual, however, due to the fact
that guns of various grades are being issued, guns are classed as three
types, riot, sporting skeet, and sporting trap, according to length of barrel
and degree of choke only. Such guns may be of any grade. Therefore any
gun with a 20-inch cylinder barrel is classed as a riot gun; any gun with a
26-inch, improved cylinder barrel as a sporting skeet gun, and any gun
with a 30-inch, full choke barrel as a sporting trap gun. Riot guns are
specified to be furnished with bayonets, hand guards and sling swivels,
6
TM 9-285
3
INTRODUCTION
but some have been procured without these accessories, in the interests
of expediency. These are termed "substitute riot guns." Sporting guns as
referred to herein are usea principally for trapshooting.
NOTE: The Migratory Game Act provides that not more than three
shells shall be contained in a repeating or autoloading shotgun, and that
the magazines shall therefore be limited to a capacity of two shells. To
comply with this act, a hardwood plug is furnished for insertion in the
end of the magazine to reduce its capacity to two shells.

m. The shotgun shell or cartridge is cylindrical in shape and may be


composed entirely of brass, or a paper casing seated in a brass or steel
base. The primer is seated in the base of the shell, which contains the
powder charge and shot pellets, separated and held in position by cylin-
drical wads of felt and cardboard. The primer, when struck by the firing
pin, detonates and produces a spark which ignites the powder. The
expansion of the gas generated by the burning powder furnishes the force
for propelling the shot charge from the gun. For description of the shell
refer to section XIII.

n. In addition to field inspection as prescribed for each gun, the


barrel should be inspected, and the trigger pull tested as follows:
(1) INSPECTION OF BARREL. The barrel should be inspected for loose-
ness in receiver, rust, pits, leading, cracks, and bulges.
(a) If barrel is loose (shakes) in receiver, the gun should be turned
over to ordnance personnel for correction.
(b) Rust and leading may be removed if not too bad (par. l d). If
barrel is badly rusted or pitted, the gun should be turned over to ord-
nance personnel.
(c) If cracks or bulges are evident, the gun should be turned over to
ordnance personnel. A bulge is usually indicated by a shadowy depres-
sion or dark ring in the bore, and may often be noticed through a bulge
or raised ring on the barrel surface.
(2) TRIGGER PULL.
(a) Trigger pull should in general range between 5 pounds (mini-
mum) and 8 pounds (maximum) for the guns covered in this bulletin.
Trigger pull can be tested with the regulation trigger pull test weight
hook and weights used for rifles and carried in the small arms repair
truck, or hook and weights improvised as in (b) below.
(b) The inspector, in testing trigger pull of shotguns, should have
two weights, one of 5 pounds and one of 8 pounds. Each of the weights
should be provided with a wire so that the pressure will be applied 1/4
inch from the lower end of the trigger and exerted parallel with the axis
of the bore. The wire should be stiff enough to retain an L-hook bend,
7
TM 9-285
3
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
not less than 2 /4 inches long, in the free end, and long enough to allow
the weight to swing clear of the butt end of the stock when testing.
(c) To test the trigger pull, note that the gun is fully unloaded, action
locked, hammer fully cocked, and the safety set to the fire position thus
allowing the trigger to be retracted. Have the weight resting on the floor
or ground, and insert hook of trigger weight wire (or test hook) through
the trigger guard bow to bear on the trigger, so that the pressure will be
applied 1/4 inch from the lower end of the trigger. Care should be taken
during the test to see that the wire contacts the trigger only and does not
rub against the trigger guard bow or stock, and that wire and axis of bore
are parallel and perpendicular. Then with the barrel of the gun held
vertically, raise the weight from the floor as gently as possible. If the
5-pound weight pulls the trigger, or the 8-pound weight fails to pull the
trigger, the gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel.
o. The illustrations in this technical manual pertaining to the opera-
tion of the gun are for explanatory purposes only. The current regulations
or manual of arms, on the manner in which the gun should be held while
operating, should be followed.
p. The word "breech" refers to the section of the gun just to the rear
of the barrel chamber, where the gun is loaded. The word "muzzle"
refers to the extreme forward end of the barrel.

q. Safety Precautions.
(1)) Every shotgun should be considered to be fully loaded and cocked
until it has been personally examined by the operator and proved to be
otherwise. Memory should never be trusted as to a gun's condition
in this respect.
(2) A shotgun should never be pointed at anyone at whom it is not
intended to shoot, nor in a direction where accidental discharge may
do harm.
(3) A shotgun should always be fully unloaded if it is to be left
where someone else may handle it.
(4) A shotgun should always be pointed up to a safe spot when
pulling the trigger after examination.
(5) If a shotgun is to be carried cocked, with a shell in the chamber,
the trigger should be blocked by sliding the safety to the safe position.
In the case of the Winchester Gun M97, the hammer should be placed
at half-cock.
(6) Under no circumstances should pressure be applied to the trigger
while the gun is being operated, until the breech bolt (or like part) is
positively locked, and the slide (or like part) blocked.
(7) Under no circumstances should the hammer of the Winchester
Gun M97 be let completely down with a shell in the chamber.
8
TM 9-285
3
INTRODUCTION
(8) A shotgun should never be fired with any grease, cleaning patch,
dust, dirt, mud, snow, or other obstruction in the bore. To do so may burst
the barrel or blow the bolt.
(9) Ammunition should never be greased or oiled. This will affect the
ammunition, and creates a hazardous pressure on the bolt.
(10) Chamber and bore should be wiped dry of oil or grease before
firing for the reason given in (8) and (9) above.
(11) Ammunition should be clean and dry; all live and dummy am-
munition should be carefully examined; all defective, swollen, or badly
bruised shells turned in.
(12) Ammunition should not be exposed to the direct rays of the sun
for any length of time. This increases chamber pressure and affects the
charge (par. 92).
(13) The bore should always be inspected before loading the gun.
(14) A gun presumed to be fully unloaded should never be handed to
anyone until again inspected.
(15) Shotgun shells smaller than 12-gage should never be carried.
A smaller shell, if accidentally loaded, will enter the bore and burst the
barrel when the gun is fired.
CAUTION: The proper functioning of the bolt and/or slide locking
mechanisms of the guns covered in this manual is of the utmost impor-
tance to the proper operation and functioning of the gun, and the safety
of the operator. If a bolt fails to lock properly, or a slide lock (or similar
part) fails to function to prevent premature unlocking of the bolt, the
breech is apt to blow open when the gun is fired with possible injury
to the operator. Extreme care should be observed to see that such parts
and those which operate and function them are in good repair and ad-
justment at all times. Care should be observed by operators to see that
the breech mechanism is securely locked and blocked as directed in the
field inspection for the gun in question when operating the guns.

9
TM 9-285
4

SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Section II

WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97


Paragraph
Description .......................................... 4
Data ............................................... 5
Operation ........................................... 6
Functioning .................. ........... : ...........
Removal of groups .................................... 8
Replacement of groups ................................. 9
Field inspection ................ ..................... 10
Cleaning and lubrication ................................ 11

4. DESCRIPTION.
a. Identification marks on this gun are generally to be found as
follows:
(1) Name of maker, gage, model, and barrel boring are stamped on
the top of the barrel near the breech end.
(2) Serial number of the gun is stamped on the lower face of the
barrel near the breech end, and on the lower face of the forward end
of the receiver.
(3) On solid-frame gun, maker's name and model are stamped on
the action slide bar, and the serial number of the gun as in (2) above.
b. This gun (figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4) is a manually operated repeating
shotgun of the slide action, hammer type, manufactured in both solid-
frame and take-down types. In the solid-frame gun (figs. 1 and 2) the
barrel is screwed into the receiver at manufacture and is not intended
to be removed except for repair; the magazine is also screwed into the
receiver but can easily be removed by removal of a stop screw and
unscrewing the magazine from the receiver. The take-down gun is so
constructed that the barrel and magazine together with the action slide
group can easily be removed as a unit by disengaging interrupted threads
on rear end of the magazine and barrel from like interrupted threads in
the receiver by which the barrel and magazine are locked to the receiver.
This construction facilitates cleaning and transportation of the gun.
c. Riot guns of early manufacture were of the solid-frame design,
while such guns of later manufacture were of a modified solid-frame de-
sign. In this later design the take-down type of receiver, barrel and maga-
zine (with action slide assembled) were used. The barrel and magazine
(with action slide assembled), however, must be removed separately from
the receiver, and not as a unit as in the take-down gun. This modified gun
has a receiver extension screwed to the barrel similar to the take-down
10
TM 9-285
4
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAG, M97

C o

. a, 4n a~~~~~.

I ~ I1
/B
11)
; i L
i~~~~
o~~~~~~
SQ1f t O

-
T I°
~~~

·i. e f
:,;J'. .R8 e ii 8

3&3 . ¢ i
|0a e 1; t) e
4½. 0 I
I.

a X. o U'
· :i ~~~~~~~~~~
i ~ @"~ E~
o 4-

~
.4'~ ~ ~ ~~.

I 1 ~~~~~1
TM 9-285
4
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Cl -l
e, 0

~
o 0

A h
tt

Sl i

go,:,t
o 0

.-
'12a.

12
TM 9-285
4
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97
gun, while the barrel of the solid-frame gun of early manufacture, has no
such extension, and screws directly into the receiver. The magazine band
is absent in both guns when the bayonet attachment is assembled to the
gun, and the magazine plug has an integral stud on its forward end.
Barrel and magazine of the two guns are not interchangeable (par. 3 i).

d. The take-down design of this gun is furnished in various grades


having barrels of different lengths and degrees of boring and other modi-
fications of design. Basically, however, the mechanism of the guns is
identical except for the differences in design mentioned in b and c above.
For convenience herein the guns will be classified as three types: riot,
sporting skeet, and sporting trap, although variations of these types
may occur.
(1) The riot-type gun (figs. 1 and 2) may come in either the solid-
frame or take-down design, with a 20-inch plain barrel, bored cylinder.
Most of these guns have a bayonet attachment and hand guard (fig. 5)
attached to the muzzle end of the barrel and the magazine, and a leather
sling attached to a sling swivel on the bayonet attachment and the stock.
These are always of the solid-frame or modified solid-frame type.
(2) The sporting skeet-type gun usually comes in the take-down
design only and is furnished with a 26-inch plain or ribbed barrel, bored
improved cylinder, and is without bayonet attachment or sling.
(3) In the sporting trap-type gun (figs. 3 and 4) is similar to the skeet
gun but is made with a 30-inch barrel, bored full choke, and is without
bayonet attachment or sling.
e. General Description (figs. 6, 7, 8, 14, and 15).
(1) The stock of the gun is bolted to the rear end of the receiver,
and the barrel and magazine are fastened to the forward end of the
receiver in either of the ways explained in b and c above. The action slide is
mounted and operates on the magazine. The rear end of the slide or bar
passes through the forward end of the receiver and engages with and cam-
operates the carrier, pivoted in the receiver, and at the same time recip-
rocates the breech bolt through the medium of a hook pivoted on the bolt.
(2) The receiver contains the operating mechanism and to its lower
rear end is attached the trigger plate in which the trigger is mounted.
The receiver is open at the bottom to permit loading, the rear to permit
rearward passage of the breech bolt, and the right side for ejection of
the fired shell cases.
(3) The breech bolt (fig. 8) contains the firing pin;,firing pin lock and
the extractors. The carrier (fig. 8) contains the hammer, sear, and action
slide lock, together with their springs and components. The trigger plate
contains the trigger, trigger spring, and stop screw. The ejector is mounted
to the left wall of the receiver and the action slide lock release plunger
pin in the right wall of the receiver.
13
TM 9-285
4
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Lu . z E
~ U E-

t; _

0 No a C

00

14
TM 9-285
4

WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97

z Z
.?
zS
z,

.~ ''"' ' - P- Z~N I I

a , VrZYYZ I

4w Z Z M ZZZZ
o =- L R O

4b-I-- ii _ II z.O i iFs~su' a1


> >> 13--.1S

!
N6 . . 0 X.Jw X Ora

-o~~~~ -

'-;" ~
co ~ 9 ~ t §~-E uwU
§ < < <'<Z-" i

:: j j u, >> ZZ Dis

1~~1
TM 9-285
4-5

SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES


(4) There is no trigger safety on this gun, this function being per-
formed by setting the hammer at the half cock which prevents retraction
of the trigger and release of the action slide bar.
(5) The magazine which is of the tubular type is positioned beneath
the barrel and has a capacity of five shells loaded end to end. The shells
are pressed together and fed into the receiver by the force of the maga-
zine spring acting upon the follower.
(6) The shell stops are pivoted in the lower, forward inside walls of'
the receiver, and act to hold the shells in the magazine against the pres-
sure of the magazine spring. The stops are operated by the carrier to
release and block the shells at the proper time, thus allowing but one
shell to enter the receiver at a time.
(7) The action slide lock (figs. 12 and 13) is positioned in the left
side of the carrier and acts upon the action slide bar to block its rearward
movement after the breech bolt is locked in position by the carrier,
thereby preventing premature unlocking of the bolt. The lock is dis-
engaged either by the descending hammer pressing on the action slide
lock release plunger, when the gun is fired, or by manually pressing on the
action slide lock release plunger pin. When the lock is disengaged from
the rear end of the action slide bar the action slide may be moved to the
rear to cam down the carrier, unlock the bolt and function the operating
mechanism.
(8) The bayonet attachment (fig. 5) and hand guard common to the
riot-type gun only are riveted together and mounted on the muzzle end
of the barrel and forward end of the magazine, and held in place by
means of a stud on the magazine plug, and screws passing through the
attachment and grooves in the barrel. A sling swivel is attached to the
attachment and stock respectively, and supplies the means for fastening
the sling to the gun.
(9) The gun sling is of leather of the M1907 model and the bayonet
and bayonet scabbard are the M1917 model (figs. 1 and 2).

5. DATA.
Gage of bore ............................................. 12
Boring of barrel-riot type .............................. Cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting skeet type ............. Improved cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting trap type .................... Full choke
Type of action...: .......... .............. ... Slide
Type of firing mechanism .............................. Hammer
Type of magazine ............................ .......... Tubular
Capacity of magazine .................................. 5 shells
Length of barrel-riot type ................................ 20 in.
Length of barrel-sporting skeet type ....................... 26 in.
16
TM 9-285
5-6
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97
Length of barrel-sporting trap type ........................ 30 in.
Length of stock and receiver (approx.) .................. 191/2 in.
Length of assembled gun-riot type (approx.) ................ 39 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.) ........ 45 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ......... 49 in.
Weight of assembled gun-riot type (approx.) ................. 8 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.) ...... .73/8 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ....... 75/ lb
Weight of Bayonet M1917 (approx.) .................. .... /s lb

6. OPERATION.
a. The gun is operated by moving the action slide handle smartly
and fully, backward and forward. This operation unlocks the breech
bolt, extracts and ejects the fired shell, cocks the hammer, transfers a
live shell from the magazine to the chamber of the barrel and relocks the
breech bolt behind the shell.
CAUTION: During operation the muzzle of the gun should always be
pointed at a safe spot.
b. Before the action slide can be retracted, the action slide lock
must be disengaged from the action slide bar (fig. 9). If the gun
has been fired, and the hammer consequently forward, the only
movement necessary is to move the action slide handle forward slightly
to allow the lock to disengage, and then reciprocate it as above, as the
descending hammer has already partly disengaged the lock. If the
hammer is at half cock, it must be pulled back to full cock, and the
action slide lock release plunger pin then pressed and the handle pushed
forward and reciprocated as explained. If the gun is at full cock, pro-
ceed as just stated.
CAUTION: During these operations, the finger should remain outside
the trigger guard. Reciprocation of the slide handle should be full and
smart to insure extraction of the shell, cocking of the hammer, complete
locking of the breech bolt, and blocking of the action slide. Slamming
of the mechanism, however, should be avoided. When the gun is being
fired as a repeater, all pressure should be removed from trigger while
operating.
c. When the gun is being fired as a repeater, the recoil of the gun
performs the preliminary forward movement of the action slide handle,
as the gun recoils away from the handle which is held by the operator.
d. With the gun loaded and locked, and the hammer at full cock,
the only operation necessary to fire the gun is to pull the trigger to
release the hammer.
e. To Load and Unload the Magazine (fig. 11).
(1) To load the magazine, press a shell nose first, into the rear of
818074 0 - 48- 2 17
TM 9-285
6

SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

L,z

_J

U
° ~zOI u, 0,
U j IoC ~
W
3
U U<uU U2 < ) V) I; U, U I III C

- i - -~
i E- , I C~U a C~~/ , -_a-i
~ ~: ~: ~: .~ ~' i.- I-- k- I- I..
~ zz
U> 0 00>,.,Zu- U O· n

, U us U I- :: 0 _. _

~~000o
w,~ ~ ~

>000w
/:!! Z ? ,Z WWILL~~~~~"

111 '
Of8~a 00

I8
TM 9-285
6
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN. 12-GAGE, M97

-4
I
_I-~~~ - Z X
o z u z .

5 a. -n Lu E L oz
Z z E<, < O

XV o~ < 0

:u

19 I

,¢ a

,
0 .z z

i
<U Z Uu
z~ ~
a· v,
ao~~~~~~~
d si < L
u S"

z % ,, C~~~~ O
TM 9-285
6-7

SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES


the magazine against the magazine follower until the shell stops at the
mouth of the magazine, snap out behind and retain the shell. Load
another in the same way by pressing it against the base of the first shell
loaded, until five in all are loaded. Loading should be done with breech
bolt locked and hammer at half cock.
(2) To unload the magazine, place hammer at half cock (fig. 10),
press in the two shell stop plungers projecting through the walls of the
receiver, and allow the shells to run out of the magazine. Inspect maga-
zine to see that it is empty. Then retract action slide handle to eject
shell in the chamber and inspect chamber and receiver to be sure gun
is empty.
CAUTION: Never let hammer fully down when there is a live shell
in the chamber. To release action slide lock, pull hammer back to full
cock and, with fingers outside trigger guard, press lock release plunger
pin and retract slide as directed in h above.
f. To Load and Unload the Gun.
(1) To load a shell from the magazine into the chamber, pull back
hammer to full cock, press action slide lock release plunger pin, and
reciprocate action slide as explained. Then let hammer down to half
cock (safe) position. Another shell may then be loaded into the
magazine.
(2) To load the chamber only with magazine empty, retract action
slide handle, place shell directly in chamber of barrel through ejection
opening in receiver, lock breech bolt, and place hammer at half cock.
(3) To unload the gun, place hammer at half cock, unload magazine;
then place hammer at full cock, press action slide lock release plunger
pin, and retract action slide handle to extract and eject shell in chamber.
Then inspect magazine and chamber to be sure gun is completely
unloaded.
CAUTION: To let hammer down from full to half cock, hold ham-
mer firmly with thumb, press trigger, and ease hammer down slightly
beyond half cock position; then with pressure on trigger removed, pull
hammer back until it definitely clicks into position at half cock before
releasing. Release trigger as soon as hammer is released from full cock.

7. FUNCTIONING.
a. As already briefly explained, the functioning of the operating
mechanism is accomplished by the reciprocation of the action slide
handle. A cam lug. on the rear end of the action slide bar engages in an
irregular camming aperture in the left side of the carrier and as the slide
is moved backward, the carrier is cammed down; as the slide is moved
forward, the carrier is cammed up.
b. The action slide hook, pivoted on the left side of the breech bolt
20
TM 9-285
7

WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97

gIt

i, Z ,0
o
z .
Eu

X t

U 0

Lu
('

VI-
UW oC

:0:f $z X 'C

21v o a,

21
TM 9-285
7
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

a.

, 1%

-I= i

, I, l i - A* a

-;i , J

o /

I ,..

22
TM 9-285
7-8
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97
(figs. 12 and 13), engages with the rear end of the action slide bar, and
as the bar is reciprocated, the bolt is likewise moved back and forth.
The timing of the movements of the carrier and bolt is such that the
carrier is cammed completely up as the bolt reaches the extreme forward
position. The locking shoulder on the forward end of the carrier is thus
moved up behind the locking shoulder on the forward end of the bolt,
locking the bolt in the closed position. As the bolt is locked in position,
the action slide lock, pivoted in the left side of the carrier, springs out
to block the rear end of the action slide bar (fig. 13). The action slide
is thus prevented from moving to the rear and unlocking the bolt until
the lock is disengaged either by the descending hammer, when the gun
is fired, or by manual depression of the action slide lock release plunger
pin extending through the right side of the receiver.
c. As the breech bolt moves to the rear, it cams back and cocks the
hammer, which is caught and held by the sear, positioned in the rear
end of the carrier. The hammer is released by pulling the trigger
mounted below it, which levers the sear from engagement with the sear
notch in the hammer. The firing pin is cammed back into the breech
bolt by the firing pin lock as the carrier unlocks the breech bolt. The pin
is held thus retracted until the bolt is again locked, at which time it is
released by a projection on the carrier pressing on, and disengaging the
lock to free the firing pin.
d. The carrier depresses the shell stops, positioned in the receiver
directly behind the magazine, on its downward movement, thus releas-
ing a shell from the magazine and at the same time takes over the func-
tion of the stops by blocking the next shell in the magazine. The released
shell is pushed into the receiver, upon the carrier, by the force of the
magazine spring and lifted to chamber level by the carrier in its upward
movement. The breech bolt pushes the shell into the chamber on its
forward movement and is locked behind it as already explained. As the
carrier rises to lock the bolt, it releases the shell stops which spring
outward to block the shell the carrier has been blocking. The shell guide,
pivoted on the carrier, is cam-operated by the head of the action slide
hook screw, projecting from the right side of the bolt, to clear the ejec-
tion opening in the receiver when the bolt is retracted.
e. The shell is extracted from the chamber by the extractors, posi-
tioned in the forward end of the breech bolt as the bolt moves to the
rear, and knocked out through the ejection opening in the right side of
the receiver by striking the ejector, positioned in the left inner wall of
the receiver.

8. REMOVAL OF GROUPS (figs. 6, 7, 14, and 15).


a. Groups and parts should be removed and replaced in the order
23
TM 9-285
8
SHOTGUNS, ALL"TYPES
BREECH BOLT

ACTION SLIDE HOOK , CARRIER

ACTION SLIDE BAR ACTION SLIDE LOCK


RA PD 40538
Figure 12-Breech Bolt, Carrier and Action Slide Bar Groups-Breech
Bolt Unlocked from Carrier-Action Slide Lock Disengaged--
Winchester Shotgun M97
BREECH BOLT

CARRIER
ACTION
SLIDE HOOK -

ACTION SLIDE BAR


ACTION SLIDE LOCK

RA PD 40539
Figure 13-Breech Bolt, Carrier and Action Slide Bar Groups-
Breech Bolt Locked by Carrier-Action Slide Lock Engaged-
Winchester Shotgun M97

given below. In the take-down design of this gun, it is necessary to


remove the barrel, magazine, and action slide group before removing
the groups from the receiver. In the solid-frame design gun, the bayonet
attachment, magazine, and action slide group must be removed. The
barrel is screwed into the receiver at manufacturer and should not be
removed. The other groups, contained in the receiver of these two guns,
are practically the same and can be removed in the same manner.
Groups and parts when removed should be placed on a clean, flat sur-
face and care observed to prevent loss of screws and small parts. Remove
as follows:
(1) BAYONET ATTACHMENT, MAGAZINE, AND ACTION SLIDE GROUP
(SOLID-FRAME GUN).
(a) Bayonet Attachment. Unscrew and remove the three transverse
24
TM 9-285
8
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97
screws from the bayonet attachment and drive forward off barrel. The
barrel of the solid-frame gun of early manufacture is screwed into the
receiver at manufacture, and should not be removed (par. 8 (1) (c)).
(b) Magazine. Lock action by pushing action slide handle fully for-
ward, and remove magazine stop screw from lower, forward end of right
side of receiver. Then using improvised tool with pin and hole in end, or
rod bent to an L, to engage stud and hole in end of magazine plug, turn
magazine counterclockwise out of receiver and withdraw with action
slide group attached.
(c) The barrel and magazine of the modified type of solid-frame gun
(par. 4 c) may be removed separately but should not be removed unless
necessary. The magazine is first removed (par. 8 a (1) (b)) by turning
1/4 turn clockwise to disengage the interrupted threads on magazine from

those in receiver and then withdrawing magazine and action slide


together from receiver. The barrel can then be removed by turning 1/4
turn clockwise and withdrawing from receiver. This gun can be identi-
fied by the receiver extension screwed to the rear end of the barrel,
similar to the take-down gun.
(2) BARREL, MAGAZINE, AND ACTION SLIDE GROUPS (TAKE-DOWN
GUN).
(a) Lock action by pushing action slide fully forward. Unlock the
magazine by pressing the locking pin through the plug until it will clear
the barrel when the magazine is turned (fig. 16).
(b) Turn the magazine 1/4 turn clockwise, using the pin as a lever, to
disengage the interrupted threads on the rear end of the magazine from
those in the receiver. Then, pull the magazine forward out of engagement
with the receiver.
(c) Push the action slide handle forward until the rear end of the
bar is free of the receiver. Then, grasp barrel and magazine in left hand
and receiver in right hand, and turn the barrel 1/4 turn clockwise to
disengage the interrupted threads on the rear of the barrel from those
in the receiver, and withdraw; the group forward from the receiver
(fig. 17).
(3) CARRIER GROUP. With barrel, magazine, and action slide groups
(take-down gun) or maga-ine and action slide group (solid-frame gun)
removed, the carrier may be removed as follows:
(a) Unscrew the carrier pin stop screw which is visible in the left top
wall of the carrier just to the rear of the hammer tang. With this screw
removed, drift out the carrier pin extending through both receiver walls
just below the carrier seat. Next, remove the shell guide stop screw
located at the lower rear extremity of the right-hand wall of the receiver.
(b) With the hammer cocked, depress the action slide lock release
plunger pin, extending through the right wall of the receiver, to prevent
25
TM 9-285
8
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

uj

Lq4
U iY; ~ a

. 0
Ln

0!%

I,-
vI Z

z 5

< o,

z0
< -. -C

i Ew

z< -m o
- .
<t a -<-J

In In

O w
TM 9-285
8
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 1 2-GAGE, M97

~n ZU
W
W
D
~
a a
a-

U Z° LuZ a.
u f z ,
z,, w
uoo ,

I -
4i J :
N
- i
;Z z
< > / U
Y A < . 4 J u \

o < o - r.--^
::

,- , z

z ma -< <

wj

-, -
TM 9-285
8-9
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
interference of lock with receiver wall. Then, insert a screwdriver through
the ejection opening and pry gently on the carrier to start it downward,
after which it can be rotated down and out of the receiver through the
lower opening.
NOTE: If release plunger will not function, the forward end of the
lock can be depressed by inserting a small screwdriver blade into the
cut in the lower left forward face of the carrier and prying the lock
inward.
(4) BREECH BOLT GROUPS. With the carrier removed, the breech
bolt may be removed as follows:
(a) With the breech bolt fully forward, remove the action slide hook
screw from the right forward face of the breech bolt.
(b) Reach into the receiver and remove the action slide hook from
the left side of the breech bolt. The hook is easily removed, after the
screw has been removed.
(c) Slide the breech bolt group to the rear out of the receiver.
(5) TRIGGER GUARD BOW GROUP. Ordinarily it should not be neces-
sary to remove the guard bow group for cleaning. To remove this group,
the butt stock must first be removed. This can be accomplished by
removing butt plate screws and butt plate. Then with long shanked
screwdriver disengage butt stock bolt now visible in hole in stock, from
tang of receiver by turning counterclockwise, and then pull butt stock
to rear from receiver. The guard bow group can then be removed as
follows:
(a) With pin drift, drive out trigger pin from lower rear end of
receiver and pull guard bow to the rear out of receiver.
(b) Trigger and trigger spring can then be removed from guard bow.
The stop screw should not be removed. This screw is used to limit rear-
ward movement of trigger, which should move far enough to disengage
sear from hammer when retracted.

9. REPLACEMENT OF GROUPS.
a. Groups and parts should be thoroughly cleaned, lightly oiled and
lubricated, if necessary, before replacing. Replace as follows:
(1) TRIGGER GUARD BOW GROUP.
(a) Seat trigger spring in its aperture in guard bow, and place trigger
on top of spring with curved end extending downward through floor of
guard bow.
(b) Slide guard bow into rear of receiver, with pin hole forward,
until pin hole in guard bow and receiver are in alinement.
(c) Press trigger down against spring until pin hole in trigger alines
28
TM 9-285
9

WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97

0
_4.
·
O
i
F ~~~~~~I0-

U} o >I o .I
I.$

0
1O
0

o a oi
rr

I /

iU0 N

0 N

2
TM 9-285
9

SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES


with pin hole in guard bow and receiver and insert trigger pin. Drive
pin through until flush.
(d) The butt stock can then be replaced by sliding on to tang of
receiver and mating with groove in receiver. Then replace butt stock
bolt and washer, and screw down tight by turning clockwise. The butt
plate can then be replaced and screwed down snugly. Composition butt
plates should be replaced carefully and not screwed down too tightly, to
prevent cracking of plate and stripping of screw threads in butt stock.

(2) BREECH BOLT GROUP. The breech bolt group must be replaced
in the receiver before the carrier group. Replace as follows:
(a) Insert the breech bolt group into the rear of the receiver with
the locking lug forward and down, and push group all the way home.
(b) Slip action slide hook into left side of breech bolt locking lug,
so that the boss on hook seats in counterbore in lug and hook lies in its
guideway in left inner wall of the receiver, with point of hook down and
to rear. Replace action slide hook screw from right side of breech bolt,
and tighten. (Head of hook screw should protrude from right face of
breech bolt at least 1/32 inch to insure that it will cam down the shell
guide, to clear the ejection opening in the receiver, when the breech
bolt is retracted).
(c) Check action of breech bolt and hook by sliding breech bolt back
and forth several times. Hook should move with breech bolt.

(3) CARRIER GROUP. The carrier group should not be replaced in the
receiver until after the breech bolt has been replaced. Replace as
follows:
(a) To replace the carrier group, first cock the hammer. Then, insert
the carrier, hammer up and to the rear, into the receiver through the
bottom opening, and keep moving to the rear into the receiver until the
carrier seats itself properly in its recess in the rear wall of the receiver.
Then, press firmly up on the carrier until it is completely home behind.
the locking lug of the breech bolt. In order to replace the carrier group
properly, the breech bolt must be all the way forward and the shell guide
stop screw must be removed from the right wall of the receiver.
(b) With the carrier in position, insert the carrier pin into its hole so
that the groove on the pin is on the left side of the receiver and groove
alined with the hole for the carrier pin stop screw, in the left top of the
carrier body, to the left rear of the hammer. Replace stop screw.
(c) Replace the shell guide stop screw in its hole in the right wall of
the receiver just ahead of the trigger pin. (This screw has a pin end, and
its head when assembled, should be flush with the face of the receiver.
30
TM 9-285
9
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97
(4) BARREL, MAGAZINE, AND ACTION SLIDE GROUP (SOLID-FRAME
GUN).
(a) With hammer forward in fired position, move breech bolt for-
ward and lock carrier behind breech bolt by pressing upward on carrier
until in position behind locking shoulder of bolt.
(b) With action slide assembled to magazine, hold magazine along
under side of barrel, and insert rear end of slide bar into bar opening in
left forward face of receiver, and push to rear so that it enters cam
aperture in carrier.
(c) Mate threads in magazine with those in receiver, using care not
to cross threads; screw magazine tightly into receiver by turning clock-
wise until stop screw hole in receiver and magazine aline; replace stop
screw. An improvised tool can be used (par. 8a (1) (b)) to tighten
magazine.
(d) Replace bayonet attachment (par. 9 a (6)), then pull the action
slide to the rear as far as it will go, and operate slide several times to test
the operating mechanism and the locking of the breech bolt and slide.
(e) The barrel and magazine of the modified type of solid-frame gun
(par. 4 c) are replaced as follows. The barrel is first replaced by inserting
threaded end into receiver, with receiver extension facing to left, so
that interrupted threads on barrel and in receiver are in a position to
mate, and then by turning barrel 1/4 turn counterclockwise, similarly to
the take-down gun. The magazine with action slide assembled is then
inserted through the receiver extension and into the receiver in a similar
manner and turned 1/4 turn counterclockwise. This gun can be identified
by the receiver extension screwed to the rear end of the barrel, same
as the take-down gun. Inspect bore of barrel for foreign matter before
replacing.
(5) BARREL, MAGAZINE AND ACTION SLIDE GROUP (TAKE-DOWN GUN).
(a) Lock action as explained in 9 a (4) (a) above.
(b) Inspect bore for foreign matter. Then, push magazine and action
slide forward on barrel as far as they will go, to clear rear face of receiver
extension on barrel.
(c) Grasp barrel and magazine in left hand and receiver in right hand,
and with magazine facing to the left, insert rear end of barrel into barrel
aperture in forward face of receiver so that interrupted threads on barrel
and receiver are in a position to mate. Push barrel into receiver as far
as it will go and turn counterclockwise 1/4 turn, thus mating interrupted
threads on barrel with those in receiver. Turn barrel until stop screw in
right forward face of receiver enters its aperture in right rear face of
receiver extension on barrel and stops the barrel. The magazine aperture
in receiver should now be in position to receive the magazine.
31
TM 9-285
9-10
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(d) With the barrel positioned, revolve the magazine until the inter-
rupted threads on its rear end are in a vertical plane in line with barrel;
then guide action slide bar into bar aperture in left forward face of re-
ceiver, and push magazine into receiver as far as it will go, so as to place
interrupted threads on magazine and in receiver in position to mate.
Then, revolve magazine counterclockwise 1/4 turn, using the locking pin as
a lever, until the depressed end of the locking pin is clear of the barrel
on the left side. Then press locking pin flush with the magazine to lock
it to the barrel, and hence prevent turning of the magazine. Locking pin
should project from magazine on left side of barrel when magazine
is locked.
(e) Pull the action slide handle to the rear as far as it will go, thus
engaging the end of the slide bar with the action slide hook on the breech
bolt, and the cam aperture in the carrier.
(f) Operate the slide handle several times to test functioning of the
operating mechanism and the locking of the breech bolt and slide bar.
(6) BAYONET ATTACHMENT (fig. 5).
(a) Slide the bayonet attachment group onto the muzzle end of the
barrel so that the sling swivel is to the rear and the sight up. Mate hole
in rear of attachment lug with stud on magazine plug, and adjust attach-
ment until the screw holes aline with the screw grooves in the underside
of the barrel.
(b) Replace screws and screw in tightly. Check assembly for level
seating and interference of hand guard with action slide handle when
operated.

]O. FIELD INSPECTION.


a. With gun completely assembled, test mechanism for proper func-
tioning. Fired shells may often be used for testing, where dummy shells
are not available, by turning in the uncrimped end so that the length of
the shell approximates that of a live shell. Use of live shells for testing
is prohibited.
CAUTION: Be sure gun is fully unloaded before inspection.
b. Operate the Gun as Follows:
(1) With the breech bolt locked and the hammer at full cock, press
in the action slide lock release plunger pin, located on the right side of
the receiver. Push action slide handle forward slightly and then pull
smartly and fully to the rear, and then push smartly and fully forward.
Reciprocate action slide thus several times to test smoothness of action.
(2) With breech bolt locked, let hammer down to half cock; press
release plunger pin and attempt to retract action slide handle as above.
The action slide handle should not retract.
32
TM 9-285
10
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97
(3) Place hammer at full cock; pull trigger to allow hammer to move
fully forward to the fired position and attempt to retract action slide
handle. The action slide handle should retract.
(4) Retract action slide handle as in (1) above; then release plunger
pin and push handle smartly and fully forward to lock the breech bolt.
Then attempt to retract action slide handle. It should not be possible
to do so with hammer at full cock until action slide lock is disengaged
as in (1) above.
(5) With breech bolt locked and hammer at full cock, pull trigger
to test firing mechanism. Then, place hammer at half cock and attempt to
pull the trigger. It should not be possible to pull the trigger. When ham-
mer is at half cock the firing mechanism is in the safe position.
(6) With hammer at full cock, close but do not lock the breech
bolt. Then attempt to fire the gun. The gun should not fire until the
breech bolt is locked.
(7) Place two or more dummy or fired shells in the magazine and
work through the action to test gun for feeding, loading, extraction and
ejection of shells. The second shell should not leave the magazine until
after the carrier has dropped as the first shell is being ejected.
NOTE: Fired shells will not work through the action as easily as
live or dummy shells, as they are somewhat deformed through being
fired. Therefore allowance should be made for friction and smoothness
of action in positioning the shell.
c. When gun does not operate and function smoothly and properly
when tested as above, damaged or improperly assembled parts are
indicated as follows:
(1) ACTION SLIDE STICKS. May be due to bent slide bar, burs on bar
cam lug, foreign matter in camming aperture in carrier, or burs on breech
bolt guideways or guides.
(2) BREECH BOLT DOES NOT LOCK. May be due to foreign matter
on face of bolt or in extractor cuts in barrel, behind locking shoulder of
bolt or on carrier, or worn or burred action slide bar cam lug.
(3) HAMMER DOES NOT COCK PROPERLY OR SLIPS. May be due to
burs or foreign matter in sear notches, burred sear nose, weak or broken
sear spring, or foreign matter between trigger and sear.
(4) FIRING PIN DOES NOT RETRACT IN BREECH BOLT. May be due to
broken or missing lock spring, foreign matter in breech bolt, or broken
parts.
(5) ACTION SLIDE LOCK DOES NOT FUNCTION. May be due to for-
eign matter under lock, broken lock or lock spring, burs on lock or action
slide bar. Refer to CAUTION at end of paragraph 3.
818074 0- 48- 3 33
TM 9-285
10-11
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(6) SHELL Is NOT EXTRACTED OR EJECTED. May be due to broken
or worn extractors or ejector, or broken springs.
(7) Two SHELLS FED INTO RECEIVER AT ONCE. May be due to
broken shell stop or springs, or foreign matter under stops.
(8) SHELLS STICK-IN MAGAZINE. May be due to corroded or bent
follower, dented tube, broken or kinked spring, or foreign matter or cor-
rosion in tube.
d. Inspect barrel and test trigger pull (par. 3 n).
e. In addition to inspection of the gun for operation and functioning,
the gun should be inspected generally for condition, and defects noted.
Attention should be directed to such defects as cracked wooden parts,
cracked or deformed metal parts, dented magazine tube, loose screws,
loose or binding parts or assemblies, loose barrel or magazine, loose stock
or butt plate, rust, dents, burs, or excessive wear of parts. If defects are
such that early malfunction of the gun is indicated, the gun should be
turned over to ordnance personnel for inspection and correction.
f. Where defects and malfunctions cannot be remedied by cleaning,
lubrication, and simple adjustments of assembly, which lie within the
scope of using troops, the gun should be turned over to ordnance per-
sonnel for a thorough inspection, correction, and/or repair.
g. Removal of burs on working parts, trigger adjustments, and like
corrections should not be attempted by using troops as stoning of parts
must be exacting, the angle of the faces concerned must not be changed,
and volume of metal must not be materially reduced.
h. A loose barrel, which shakes when assembled, may be due to
improper assembly caused by not inserting barrel (take-down type) far
enough into receiver before mating interrupted threads of barrel and
receiver, or it may be due to worn parts necessitating adjustment or
replacement. If due to worn parts, gun should be turned over to ord-
nance personnel for correction or repair.
i. If shell appears unnecessarily loose in chamber with breech bolt
locked, the gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel to be
checked for headspace.
j. Adjustment and maintenance of the gun in the case of using troops
is limited to the removal and replacement of the parts and groups of
parts as outlined in paragraphs 8 and 9, together with cleaning and
lubrication, and such adjustments as are necessary in assembling the
gun as outlined.

11. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION.


a. Cleaning the Bore.
(1) Barrel and magazine group of take-down type gun should be
34
TM 9-285
11
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97
removed from the receiver when cleaning the bore. Bore of solid-frame
gun may be cleaned from the breech end of the receiver when the breech
bolt and carrier have been removed, or from the muzzle end. Ordinarily
the bore should be cleaned from the muzzle end, and a rag stuffed into
the receiver to protect the action. If bore of solid-frame gun is badly
rusted or corroded, the gun should be disassembled and the barrel thor-
oughly cleaned from the breech end.
(2) The bore should be thoroughly cleaned with CLEANER, rifle
bore, or soap and water solution applied to a cloth patch assembled to
the cleaning rod; then thoroughly dried and lightly oiled with OIL,
lubricating, preservative, light.
CAUTION: All oil should be removed from bore and chamber before
firing the gun.
!. Cleaning Parts Other Than the Bore.
(1) Groups should be removed and parts and assemblies thoroughly
cleaned, oiled, and lubricated at regular intervals or when gun has been
exposed to extreme conditions such as moisture, dust storms, or the
like. Pointed sticks may be used to clean crevices and like inacces-
sible points.
(2) Cleaning is best accomplished by wiping parts with a rag slightly
moistened with CLEANER, rifle bore, or light oil to loosen burnt powder
and like foreign matter. Then wipe clean with clean dry rag, and oil
lightly, using rag lightly moistened with OIL, lubricating, preservative,
light.
(3) Special attention should be paid to cam and guide grooves,
spring seats, firing pin aperture, and like apertures where foreign matter
may become lodged and caked and prevent proper functioning of the
mechanism.
(4) Wood parts of stock and action slide handle may be cleaned
by wiping with slightly oily rag and then polishing with clean dry rag.
When wooden parts have a rubbed down oil finish without varnish, a
light application of OIL, linseed, raw, applied with a rag and well
rubbed into the wood with the heel of the hand, will help to preserve
the wood. Care should be observed to prevent linseed oil from getting
on metal parts or into mechanism of gun as it will become gummy
when dry.
(5) Inside of magazine tube should occasionally be wiped out. This
can be accomplished without disassembling the magazine by assembling
a cleaning patch to the cleaning rod, moistening lightly with light lubri-
cating oil and inserting in rear end of magazine against the follower.
Push patch back and forth in tube a few times, using care that patch
does not tear off or become caught in magazine. Excess oil should be
35
TM 9-285
11
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
avoided as it will penetrate shells and/or get into chamber of barrel,
thus causing excessive pressure at this point.
c. Cleaning Gun in Garrison or in Camp.
(1) If gun has been fired considerably it should be thoroughly cleaned
as prescribed above.
(2) If, however, only a few shots have been fired and the gun has
not been subject to extreme conditions such as dust or rain, it will
usually suffice to clean bore and then wipe receiver, barrel and acces-
sible metal parts, outside and in with a rag lightly saturated with OIL,
lubricating, preservative, light, without removing the groups from the
receiver.
(3) If the gun has not been fired and is otherwise clean and dry,
and it is expected to be used the following day it should be wiped thor-
oughly as above with a rag very lightly moistened with oil. Oil may then
be removed from bore and chamber and the outside surfaces of the gun
with a dry rag before use. If gun is to be used for guard duty where
immediate firing is not anticipated, a light film of oil may be allowed to
remain in the bore. If, however, the gun is not to be used for a few
days, it should be well oiled, and inspected daily and oil film renewed
when necessary. For cleaning and oiling preparatory to long or short
term storage, and for cleaning as received from storage, refer to para-
graphs 77 and 78.
d. Rust and Corrosion.
(1) Gun should be kept free of rust or corrosion at all times. Light
rust may usually be removed with an oily rag or one moistened with
CLEANER, rifle bore. If this method does not suffice, CLOTH, crocus,
or WOOL, steel, fine, may be used. Care should be exercised to prevent
undue scratching of surfaces.
(2) Heavy rusting or leading of the bore of the barrel may at times
occur. Rust usually appears in dark irregular patches, while leading
shows in dull gray streaks. Leading is due to a small quantity of lead
from the shot pellets adhering to rough spots on the inner surface of
the barrel, and seldom occurs when chilled shot is used. Rust and leading
in the bore may be removed with a wad of WOOL, steel, fine, on the
end of a cleaning rod. The wool should be pushed the full length of the
bore each time and on the bore line, and not turned, or the bore scrubbed.
This method prevents scratching the barrel which hastens fouling.
e. Lubrication.
(1) In addition to light oiling for preservation, gun should be lightly
lubricated, using OIL, lubricating, preservative, light. Lubrication should
be kept to a minimum as too much oil attracts foreign matter and burnt
powder which will become caked and cause malfunction or undue wear
36
TM 9-285
11
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M97
of the mechanism. Lubricating is best accomplished by using an oiler
with a small nose, or a dropper, by which the direction and amount of
oil used can be controlled.
(2) POINTS TO LUBRICATE ARE:
(a) Action slide bar opening in forward end of receiver.
(b) Action slide bar cam lug.
(c) Action slide lock.
(d) Carrier pin.
(e) Breech bolt guides.
(f) Outer surface of magazine tube where action slide bears.
(g) Action slide hook screw.
(h) Hammer pin.
(i) Action slide lock release, in carrier.
(3) In very cold climates, oiling and lubrication should be reduced
to a minimum. Only surfaces showing signs of wear should be lightly
oiled. Refer to "Special Maintenance," section XI.

37
TM 9-285
12
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Section III

WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M12


Paragraph
Description ........................................... 12
Data ................................................ 13
Operation ............................................ 14
Functioning .......................................... 15
Removal of groups ..................................... 16
Replacement of groups ................................. 17
Field inspection ....................................... 18
Cleaning and lubrication ................................ 19

12. DESCRIPTION.
a. Identification marks on this gun are generally to be found as fol-
lows:
(1) Name of maker, gage, model, and barrel boring are stamped on
the top of the barrel near the breech end.
(2) The serial number of the gun is stamped on the lower face of the
barrel near the breech end, and on the lower face of the forward end of
the receiver.
b. This gun (figs. 18 and 19) is a manually operated repeating shot-
gun of the slide action, hammerless, solid-frame and take-down type.
The take-down gun is so constructed that the barrel and magazine to-
gether with the action slide group can easily be removed as a unit by
disengaging interrupted threads on rear end of magazine and barrel
from like interrupted threads in the receiver, by which the barrel and
magazine are locked to the receiver. This construction facilitates clean-
ing and transportation of the gun. The construction of barrel magazine
and action slide group is similar to, but not interchangeable with the
Winchester M97 take-down type of gun described in section II. The
receiver and operating mechanism, however, differ widely in design. The
solid frame type of gun, when issued, will be constructed with barrel and
magazine similar to the modified solid-frame Winchester M97 gun
(par. 4 c).
c. This gun is furnished in various grades having barrels of different
lengths and degrees of boring and other modifications of design. Basic-
ally, however, the mechanism of all guns of this make and model are
the same. For convenience herein the guns will be classified as three
types: riot, sporting skeet, and sporting trap; although variations of these
types may occur.
38
TM 9-285
12
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M12
(1) The riot-type gun is usually furnished with a 20-inch plain barrel,
bored cylinder, and may be equipped with a bayonet attachment and
hand guard attached to-the muzzle end of the barrel, and a leather
sling attached to a sling swivel on the bayonet attachment and the stock.
If equipped with bayonet attachment it is solid-frame. Refer to para-
graph 3 i.
(2) The sporting skeet-type gun is usually furnished with a 26-inch
plain or ribbed barrel, bored improved cylinder, and is without bayonet
attachment or sling.
(3) The sporting trap-type gun (figs. 18 and 19) is similar to the
skeet-type gun but is furnished with a 30-inch barrel, bored full choke,
and is without bayonet attachment or sling.
d. General Description (figs. 20, 21, 26 and 27).
(1) The stock of the gun is bolted to the rear end of the receiver and
the barrel and magazine locked to the forward end of the receiver as
already explained in paragraph b above. The action slide is mounted
and operates on the magazine. The rear end of the slide or bar passes
through the forward end of the receiver, and engages with, reciprocates,
and cam-operates the breech bolt, which in turn operates the carrier and
cams back and cocks the hammer.
(2) The receiver contains the operating mechanism; and to its lower
rear end is attached the trigger guard to which is mounted the firing
mechanism, carrier and action slide lock. The receiver is open at the bot-
tom to permit loading, and the right side for ejection of the fired shell
cases. The ejector is seated in the inner left wall of the receiver.
(3) The breech bolt contains the extractors, the firing pin, and firing
pin retractor by which the firing pin is cammed back from the face of
the bolt and blocked from being driven forward by the hammer until
the bolt is locked in position.
(4) The trigger guard contains the hammer, trigger, trigger (safety)
lock, carrier, and action slide lock mechanism together with their springs
and components.
(5) The magazine which is of the tubular type is positioned beneath
the barrel and has a capacity of five shells loaded end to end. The shells
are pressed together and fed into the receiver by the force of the maga-
zine spring acting upon the follower.
(6) The shell cut-off is pivoted in the left inner wall of the receiver,
just to the rear of the magazine opening and acts to hold the shells in
the magazine against the pressure of the magazine spring. The cut-off
is operated by the action slide bar to release and block the shells at the
proper time, thus allowing but one shell to enter the receiver at a time.
The carrier assumes the function of the cut-off while the latter is cammed
back from the blocking position by the action slide bar.
39
TM 9-285
12
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

n.

line.

*, 0

S u

IL IL

40
TM 9-285
12-14
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M12
(7) The action slide lock (figs. 24 and 25) is pivoted in the left side
of the trigger guard, and engages with the action slide bar to block its
redrward movement after the breech bolt is locked in position by the
action slide bar, thereby preventing premature unlocking of the breech
bolt. The lock is disengaged either by the descending hammer when the
gun is fired, or by manual upward pressure on the rear end of the action
slide lock projecting through the guard to the left rear of the trigger.
A hook on the lock engaging with a lug on the side of the hammer locks
the hammer in the extreme rearward position and holds it from engage-
ment with the sear until the breech bolt is locked in place. This prevents
premature firing of the gun.
NOTE: The sear is an integral part of the trigger in this gun.
(8) The trigger (safety) lock is positioned in the forward end of the
trigger guard bow and acts to block or clear the trigger, thus prevent-
ing or allowing retraction, to fire the gun.

13. DATA.
Gage of bore ............................................. 12
Boring of barrel-riot type ............................ Cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting skeet type ............ Improved cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting trap type ................... Full choke
Type of action .......................................... Slide
Type of firing mechanism ......................... Hammerless
Type of magazine .................................... Tubular
Capacity of magazine ................................... 5 shells
Length of barrel-riot type ................................ 20 in.
Length of barrel-sporting skeet type ...................... 26 in.
Length of barrel-sporting trap type ................... ... 30 in.
Length of stock and receiver (approx.) ..................... 20 in.
Length of assembled gun-riot type (approx.) .............. 40 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.) ...... 46 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.)......50 in.
Weight of assembled gun-riot type without bayonet or
attachment (approx.) ........................... 6.....61/2
lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.) .......... 7 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ....... 73/s lb
Weight of bayonet M1917 (approx.) ....................... 11/8 lb

14. OPERATION.
a. The gun is operated by moving the action slide handle smartly
and fully, backward and forward. This action unlocks the breach bolt,
extracts and ejects the fired shell, cocks the hammer, transfers a live
shell from the magazine to the chamber of the barrel and relocks the
breech bolt behind the shell.
41
TM 9-285
14
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

l'ta 'a 5~~


a: Q)~~
· ~~~~~~~~~

U I
z

o U ,
z
< .u.
Z "WZ 0

_UU 0~-n

ZU'ZZZZ~¾,,
D ~~~NZ~NNNZZZ
,., <<W z z W .0
L6 0 - 0 ~~00
q 0 - -

<u E < < <u

z~ ~ ~ze 0 C
V V~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I.

~~oo ,.-
" i 42L
J l nn
>wzw
C~~~~~~~v, oCU
8"~u

Unz LU
scU Z u*

)AS~~~~~~< Lu LU - i I < ~ C

LUW z -
0 m 0"
OUUZ zz

XX Ln L O

i u o: -
~JZNNNZ
i
wOQ~~~~~~~~~L NN

of~ ~ ~~oc

42
TM 9-285
14
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M 12

<a -
u , E

U K 4,

a ': R-·;: - e

·( u0
I- I
0

-J S
c ''o/ B

o U
1;, o

0
Hf< , .o
o .

uS (9
LLW U g

43 D

43

i·;
i ~~~~LI

439
TM 9-285
14
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
CAUTION: During operation, the muzzle of the gun should always
be pointed at a safe spot.
b. Before the action slide can be retracted, however, the action slide
lock must be disengaged from the action slide bar (fig. 28). To accom-
plish this, the action slide handle must be moved slightly forward to al-
·low the lock to disengage. If the gun has been fired, and consequently
the hammer is forward, the only movement necessary is to move the ac-
tion slide handle forward slightly, and then reciprocate it as above, as
the descending hammer has already partly disengaged the lock. If, how-
ever, the hammer is in the cocked position, it is necessary to press up the
rear end of the action slide lock which is visible in the rear lower face
of the receiver just to the left of the trigger before moving the action
slide handle.
c. When the gun is being fired as a repeater, the recoil of the gun
performs the preliminary forward movement of the action slide handle,
as the gun recoils away from the handle which is held by the operator.
CAUTION: During these operations, the finger should remain out-
side the trigger guard. Reciprocation of the action slide handle should be
smart and full to insure extraction of the shell, cocking of the hammer
and complete locking of the breech bolt and engagement of the action
slide lock. Slamming of the mechanism, however, should be avoided.
When the gun is being fired as a repeater, all pressure should be removed
from the trigger while operating.
d. With the gun loaded, locked, and cocked, the only operation nec-
essary to fire the gun is the retraction of the trigger.
e. The trigger (safety) lock (fig. 22), positioned in the forward part of
the trigger guard bow, operates laterally. When pushed to the left, so that
the red band is visible, the trigger is free to be pulled and the gun fired.
When pushed to the right, the trigger is blocked and cannot be pulled nor
the gun fired. With a shell in the chamber, it is best to lock the trigger
by pushing the lock to the right, unless the gun is to be fired immedi-
ately.
f. To Load and Unload the Magazine.
(1) To load the magazine (fig. 23), press a shell, nose first, into the
rear of the magazine against the magazine follower, until it slips in front
of and is retained by the carrier. Load another shell in the same way
until five in all are loaded. Loading should be done with breech bolt
locked.
(2) To unload magazine, press up the carrier, with breech bolt locked,
and allow the shells to slip out one by one.

g. To Load and Unload the Gun.


(1) To load a shell from the magazine into the chamber, push trigger
44
TM 9-285
14
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M12

a, m

45

W I

I. I a
a

I-~ -

45
TM 9-285
14-15
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
lock to the right, push up the rear end of the action slide lock, move
action slide handle slightly forward, and then reciprocate. Another shell
may then be loaded into the magazine. Allow trigger (safety) lock to
remain in safe position to lock trigger unless gun is to be fired immedi-
ately.
(2) To unload the gun, slide trigger (safety) lock to the right as
above and unload the magazine (par. 14f (2) ). Then disengage the
action slide lock and retract action slide handle to extract and eject the
shell in the chamber. Inspect magazine and chamber to make sure gun
is fully unloaded.
h. To Load Chamber Only. With magazine empty and trigger
(safety) lock pushed to right, pull back action slide handle to retract
breech bolt all the way. Then place shell in chamber of barrel through
ejection opening of receiver and lock the breech bolt by pushing action
slide handle all the way forward.

15. FUNCTIONING.
a. As already explained the functioning of the operating mechanism
is accomplished by the reciprocation of the action slide handle. A cam
lug on the rear end of the action slide bar engages in an irregular cam-
ming aperture in the left side of the breech bolt, and as the slide is
moved rearward the rear end of the breech bolt is cammed down from in
front of the locking shoulder' in the top of the receiver and the bolt
moved to the rear. As the action slide is moved forward, the breech bolt
is moved forward and its rear end cammed up in front of the locking
shoulder at the end of the forward movement.
b. As the breech bolt moves to the rear, it cams back the hammer
which is caught and held by a hook on the action slide lock engaging
with a lug on the side of the hammer. The hammer is thus held from
engagement with the sear (fig. 24). As the breech bolt reaches the for-
ward position, the action slide lock, which has been held depressed by
the action slide bar, is released and springs up behind the action slide
bar to block its rearward movement (fig. 25). At the same time, the lock
releases the hammer which moves forward and is caught and held by
the sear.
c. As the breech bolt starts forward, it cams the carrier up and down
rapidly. This movement lifts the shell, resting on the carrier, in line with
the bore and the shell is pushed forward by the breech bolt into the
chamber of the barrel. The carrier has immediately returned to the lower
position and is in readiness to receive another shell. As the breech bolt
closes, a camming shoulder in the action slide bar, acting upon the shell
cut-off, cams it downward, thus releasing a shell from the magazine which
46
TM 9-285
15-16
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M12
is pushed into the receiver by the force of the magazine spring and held
by the carrier.
d. The fired shell is extracted from the chamber of the barrel by
the extractors in the forward end of the breech bolt, as the bolt moves
to the rear, and knocked out of the receiver through the ejection open-
ing in the right side, as the base of the shell strikes the ejector positioned
in the inner left wall of the receiver.

16. REMOVAL OF GROUPS (figs. 20, 21, 26 and 27).


a. Groups and parts should be removed and replaced in the order
given below. Groups and parts when removed should be placed on a
clean, flat surface and care observed to prevent loss of screws and small
parts. Remove as follows:

(1) BAYONET ATTACHMENT, BARREL, MAGAZINE AND ACTION SLIDE


GROUPS (SOLID-FRAME GUN). When necessary to remove these groups
from the solid-frame gun, it may be accomplished in a manner similar to
that prescribed for the Winchester M97 gun of the same type (par.
8a l(a)(c)).
(2,) BARREL, MAGAZINE AND ACTION SLIDE GROUP (TAKE-DowN
GUN).
(a) Lock the breech bolt by pushing the action slide handle all the
way forward.
(b) Unlock the magazine by pressing the locking pin through the
plug until it will clear the barrel when the magazine is turned (fig. 29).
(c) Turn the magazine 1/4 turn clockwise, using the pin as a lever, to
disengage the interrupted threads on the rear end of the magazine from
those in the receiver. Then, pull the magazine forward out of engage-
ment with the receiver.
(d) Push the action slide forward until the rear end of the bar is
free of the receiver. Then, grasp barrel in left hand and receiver in right
hand and turn the barrel 1/4 turn clockwise, to disengage the interrupted
threads on the rear of the barrel from those in the receiver, and with-
draw the group forward from the receiver (figs. 30 and 31).

(3) TRIGGER GUARD GROUP.


(a) The guard group may be removed from the receiver without re-
moving the butt stock.
(b) To remove the guard group, unscrew guard screw from rear end
of guard with receiver bottom side up and pull guard, with carrier at-
tached, upward and to the rear out of the receiver.
47
TM 9-285
16
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

S.o @
.o .I
II

0
// L.I.J

u,- ~Jr-
_: re9~1~L
I

,0 .U"~
i V @
F-
\_ J , _

L \ _ I _

4,8a

48
TM 9-285
16
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M12

z f ,'1

° a

X-o -"

-:
0

Lii ~~ k& \L IJ
a ~~~
I~~~~~~as~~~~~
- r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ (s~~I

mt
a: a~~~
I.
I-
4.

o a~~~~~

88'40~4- .-
TM 9-285
16

SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

uj~~~~~~~r

z
Z

.,,.I ~~ ~ ~ I
0
z Y II.
O~~

I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.-

lia

cS~~~~

,,-4,
i

'r' ~~z

Lu
- Lu
z
F
b~~~~~~~ o o
M z
ZOZ )I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Lu 5OgLL.LU
LU~~~~~~(

z
0
<~~~~~
o j~~~~~5
TM 9-285
16
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M12

IL

ZZ Xt, 1

._1

K -

N m

4i Li
! C
51I F~~~~~~~0
4 Zzi a. I-- cP'

Sim

5!
TM 9-285
16
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
Lu

O
-I z~~~ P
· <~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C
z 0
0 C0
a~~~~~~~~

< Z f3 0
o C
0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0

o"~ ~~~~~~~~:
o ~
E .2.

z
u, I-~~~~~~~I
<~~

v .

· Lu B
LU0o
0C
0
a
'I.

S
I~

l a
Z ·

IW

~~52~
TM 9-285
16
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M12

_ gL 10 i I "

u} 0 tm I a

-~o

> I -
VD S

Ca

53
TM 9-285
16-17
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(4) BREECH BOLT GROUP.
(a) With the guard group removed from the receiver, and the breech
bolt in the forward position, pry out the ejector from the left inner wall
of the receiver.
(b) Pry out the shell cut-off from the lower left inner wall of the re-
ceiver, if it has not already fallen out.
(c) Reach into the receiver with a screwdriver or similar tool, and
depress the rear end of the breech bolt retaining lever, positioned in the
left face of the breech bolt. Then, slide the breech bolt to the rear and
lift from the receiver.

17. REPLACEMENT OF GROUPS.


a. Groups and parts should be thoroughly cleaned, lightly oiled, and
lubricated, if necessary, before replacing. Replace as follows:

(1) BREECH BOLT GROUP.


(a) The breech bolt must be replaced before the guard group, the
ejector, and shell cut-off.
(b) With the receiver bottom side up, drop the breech bolt, rounded
face down and extractors forward, into the rear of the receiver. Push
forward to the locked position and then, with a screwdriver or similar
tool, depress the forward end of the breech bolt retaining lever posi-
tioned in the left face of the breech bolt. The lever is held in position by
friction and should work stiffly. Test before replacing bolt. (The rear
end of the bolt must be fully seated before the rear end of the lever will
enter its groove in receiver. Do not force).
(c) With the breech bolt in the locked position, insert the ejector into
its aperture in the left inner wall of the receiver to the rear of the breech
bolt so that disk-shaped head of ejector is to the rear and the spring
towards the receiver. Press down into aperture until head is flush with
inner face of receiver.
(d) Insert shell cut-off into its aperture in lower left, inner wall of the
receiver just to the rear of the magazine opening so that the enlarged
curved end is forward and fitted into mating groove in the receiver to
the left of magazine opening, and the cylindrical stud fits into its pivot
hole in the receiver. The cut-off should lie flush in its groove when as-
sembled. The cut-off is liable to fall out, until the trigger guard is in place.
(2) TRIGGER GUARD GROUP.
(a) The guard group should not be replaced in the receiver until the
breech bolt has been replaced and shifted to the forward locked position.
(b) With the hammer cocked, grasp the guard by the bow and insert
the forward end of the guard downward and forward at a slight angle
into the receiver. Mate the forward end of the guard with the receiver
54
TM 9-285
17-18
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M12
and then press down the rear end until it slides into the receiver, and
the screw holes in guard and receiver aline. When properly mated,
guard should position easily. Do not force.
(c) Replace guard screw and turn down snugly.
(3) BAYONET ATTACHMENT, BARREL, MAGAZINE AND ACTION SLIDE
o GROUPS (SoLID-FRAME GUN). If these groups have been removed from
the gun, they may be replaced in a manner similar to that prescribed for
the Winchester M97 gun of the same type (par. 9 a (4) (e) and (6)).
(4) BARREL, MAGAZINE AND ACTION SLIDE GROUPS (TAKE-DowN
GUN).
(a) Move breech bolt to the forward locked position, by pushing for-
ward and up.
(b) Inspect bore for foreign matter. Then push magazine and action
slide forward on barrel as far as they will go, to clear rear face of re-
ceiver extension on barrel.
(c) Grasp barrel in left hand and receiver in right hand, and with
magazine facing to the left, insert threaded end of barrel into barrel
aperture in forward face of receiver so that interrupted threads on barrel
and receiver are in a position to mate. Push barrel into receiver as far
as it will go and turn counterclockwise 1/4 turn, thus mating interrupted
threads on barrel with those in receiver. Turn barrel until barrel adjust-
ing bushing lock screw, in right rear face of receiver extension on barrel,
enters its aperture in right forward face of receiver and stops the barrel.
The magazine aperture in receiver should now be in position to receive
the magazine.
(d) With the barrel positioned, revolve the magazine until the inter-
rupted threads on its rear end are in a vertical plane in line with barrel;
then guide action slide bar into bar aperture in left forward face of re-
ceiver, and push magazine into receiver as far as it will go so as to place
interrupted threads on magazine and in receiver in position to mate.
Then, revolve magazine counterclockwise, using the locking pin as a
lever, until the depressed end of the locking pin is clear of the barrel.
Then, press locking pin flush with the magazine to lock it to the barrel,
and hence prevent turning of the magazine. Locking pin should project
from the magazine on left side of barrel when magazine is locked.
(e) Pull the action slide handle to the rear as far as it will go, thus
engaging it with the camway in the breech bolt.
(f) Operate the slide several times to test functioning of the operat-
ing mechanism and the locking of the breech bolt and slide.

18. FIELD INSPECIION.


a. With the gun completely assembled, test the mechanism for proper
functioning. Fired shells may often be used for testing, where dummy
55
TM 9-285
18
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
shells are not available, by turning in the uncrimped end so that the
length of the shell approximates that of the live shell. Use of live shells
for testing is prohibited.
CAUTION: Be sure gun is fully unloaded before inspection.
h. Operate the Gun as Follows:
(1) With the breech bolt locked and the hammer cocked, press up-
ward on the rear end of the action slide lock, showing at the left rear
of the trigger guard bow. Push action slide handle forward slightly, then
pull smartly and fully to the rear, and then push smartly and fully for-
ward. Reciprocate action slide handle thus several times to test smooth-
ness of action.
(2) Retract action slide handle as in (1) above; then release pres-
sure on rear of action slide lock and push slide smartly forward to lock
the breech bolt. Then attempt to retract the action slide handle. The
action slide handle should not retract.
(3) Pull the trigger, thus allowing the hammer to move forward to
the fired position and attempt to retract the action slide handle. The
action slide handle should retract.
(4) Retract the action slide handle fully and then push forward until
the breech bolt is fully forward but not raised to the locked position.
Then pull the trigger to release the hammer. The trigger should not re-
lease the hammer until the breech bolt is folly locked.
(5) Place two or more dummy or fired shells in the magazine and
work through the action to test gun for feeding, loading, extraction and
ejection of shells. The second shell should not leave the magazine until
the breech bolt is locking behind the first shell in the chamber.
NOTE: Fired shells will not work through the action as easily as live
or dummy shells as they are somewhat deformed through being fired.
Therefore, allowance should be made for friction and smoothness of ac-
tion in positioning the shell.
(6) With breech bolt locked and hammer in cocked position, push
the trigger (safety) lock all the way to the right and attempt to pull the
trigger to release the hammer. The trigger should not pull nor the ham-
mer release.
(7) Push trigger (safety) lock all the way to left so that red band
shows and attempt to pull the trigger. The trigger should pull and ham-
mer be released to fire the gun.
c. When gun does not operate and function smoothly and properly
when tested as above, damaged or improperly assembled parts are in-
dicated as follows:
(1) ACTION SLIDE STICKS. May be due to bent action slide bar, burs
56
TM 9-285
18
WINCHESTER SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M12
on bar cam lug, or' foreign matter in breech bolt camming aperture, burs
on breech bolt guideways or guide.
(2) BREECH BOLT DOES NOT LOCK. May be due to foreign matter
on face of bolt or on locking shoulder in top of receiver, or worn or
burred action slide cam lug.
(3) HAMMER DOES NOT COCK PROPERLY, OR SLIPS. May be due to
burs or foreign matter in sear notch in hammer, or burred sear nose, or
weak or broken trigger spring.
(4) FIRING PIN DOES NOT RETRACT IN BREECH BOLT. May be due
to burred or broken retractor or broken retractor spring.
(5) ACTION SLIDE LOCK DOES NOT FUNCTION. May be due to
broken, or bent action slide lock springs, or improper assembly of ham-
mer and lock in trigger guard, or burs on action slide bar. Refer to
CAUTION following paragraph 3 q.
NOTE: Small lug on lower left side of hammer should lie between
the two straight springs on the action slide lock when assembled.
(6) SHELL IS NOT EXTRACTED OR EJECTED. May be due to worn,
burred or broken extractors, broken extractor springs, or broken ejector
or ejector spring.
(7) Two SHELLS FED INTO RECEIVER AT ONCE. May be due to
broken, burred, or improperly assembled shell cut-off or foreign matter
in cut-off seat in receiver.
(8) SHELL STICKS IN MAGAZINE. May be due to corroded or bent
follower, dented tube, broken or kinked spring, or foreign matter in tube.
(9) TRIGGER (SAFETY) LOCK STICKS. May be due to burred lock
spring plunger, broken plunger spring, or foreign matter in slots in lock.
d. Inspect barrel and test trigger pull (par. 3 n).
e. In addition to inspection for operation and functioning, the gun
should be inspected generally for condition and defects noted. Attention
should be directed to such defects as cracked wooden parts, cracked or
deformed metal parts, dented magazine tube, loose screws or pins, loose
or binding parts or assemblies, loose barrel or magazine, loose stock or
butt plate, rust, dents, burs, or excessive wear of parts. If defects are such
that early malfunction of the gun is indicated, the gun should be turned
over to ordnance personnel for inspection and correction.
f. Where defects and malfunctions cannot be remedied by cleaning,
lubrication, and simple adjustments of assembly, which lie within the
scope of using troops, the gun should be turned over to ordnance per-
sonnel for a thorough inspection, correction and/or repair.
g. Removal of burs on working parts, trigger adjustments and like
corrections should not be attempted by using troops as stoning of parts
57
TM 9-285
18-19
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
must be exacting, the angle of the faces concerned must not be changed,
and volume of metal must not be materially reduced.
h. A loose barrel, which shakes when assembled, may be due to im-
proper assembly caused by not inserting barrel far enough into receiver
before mating interrupted threads of barrel and receiver, or it may be
due to worn parts necessitating adjustment or replacement. If it is due
to worn parts, the gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel for
correction or repair.
i. If shell appears unnecessarily loose in chamber with breech bolt
locked, the gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel to be
checked for headspace.
j. Adjustment and maintenance of the gun, in the case of using
troops, is limited to the removal and replacement of the parts and
groups of parts as outlined in paragraphs 16 and 17, together with clean-
ing and lubrication and such adjustments as are necessary in assembling
the gun as outlined.

19. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION.


a. Cleaning, oiling, and lubrication of this gun may be accomplished
in a manner similar to that prescribed for the Winchester Gun M97 (par.
11). Attention should be given to corresponding parts and surfaces when
lubricating. Barrel and magazine group should be removed from re-
ceiver of take-down gun when cleaning bore. Bore of solid-frame gun
should be cleaned from the muzzle end, and a rag stuffed into the re-
ceiver to protect the action while cleaning (par. 3 i).
b. Points to Lubricate Are:
(1) Action slide bar opening in forward end of receiver.
(2) Action slide bar cam lug.
(3) Action slide lock pin.
(4) Carrier pivot.
(5) Breech bolt guide.
(6) Outer surface of magazine tube where action slide bears.
(7) Hammer pin.
(8) Shell cut-off pivot stud.
c. In very cold climates, oiling, and lubrication should be reduced to
a minimum. Only surfaces showing signs of wear should be lightly oiled.
Refer to "Special Maintenance," section XI.

58
TM 9-285
20

Section IV

STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620


Paragraph
Description .................... 20
Data ............................................... 21
Operation .............. ........................ 22
Functioning. .......................................... 23
Removal of groups ..................................... 24
Replacement of groups .... :............................ 25
Field inspection ...................................... 26
Cleaning and lubrication .................. .............. 27

20. DESCRIPTION.
a. Identification marks on these guns are generally to be found as
follows:
(1) Name of maker and chamber length are stamped on the left side
of the barrel near the breech end, and serial number of the gun in the
operating handle bar slot in the left side of the barrel head.
(2) Name of maker and model number are stamped on the left side
of the receiver and the serial number of the gun on the trigger plate tang
(M520 and M620).
(3) On the M620A Gun, the serial number is stamped on the forward
face of the trigger plate.
(4) On the M520 Gun (riot type), the letters U. S. are stamped on
the left side of the receiver, and the serial number of the gun on the
trigger plate tang.

b. The above guns (figs. 32, 33, 34, and 35) are of the same make
but of different models, and are basically the same with regard to gen-
eral description, operation, and functioning. Variations occur in details
of design, principally in the trigger plate group. As the M620A Gun is
of more recent design than the other two models it will be covered
herein, with variations occurring in the other two models described as
they occur.

c. This gun is a manually operated, repeating shotgun of the slide


action, hammerless, solid-frame and take-down type. The gun is so con-
structed that the barrel, magazine, and operating handle group can
easily be removed as a unit from the receiver by disengaging the maga-
zine nut by screw action of the magazine tube to which it is threaded,
and sliding the group downward out of the receiver. This construction
facilitates cleaning and transportation (par. 3 i).
59
TM 9-285
20
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

IL

C C~~~C
o0 X~~~~~

a. a. a

u~~~~~~~~~~~~C
oI

>~0 Im
60

E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~E

~L
>~~~~~~.~
·C >~~~~~~
Sc~~
~ ~ ~ ~~~~.
Sn~~~~~~'
O a
o
W6

S .F~~~~~~~~~S

ScI

El~~~~

;I ~~~~~~~~~~~~~I-

60
TM 9-285
20
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620

oI

· O F O
u

I I

. e-~C C

00 0

X4.- . S."

6a ac
tnt~~~~~~~~
TM 9-285
20
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
d. This gun is furnished with barrels of different lengths and degrees
of boring and may have other modifications of design. For convenience
the guns (all models) will be classified as three types: riot, sporting
skeet, and sporting trap, although variations of these types may occur.
(1) The riot-type gun (fig. 33) is usually furnished with a 20-inch
plain barrel, bored full cylinder, and may be equipped with a bayonet
attachment and hand guard attached to the muzzle end of the barrel
and a leather sling attached to a sling swivel on the bayonet attachment
and the stock. If equipped with bayonet attachment, it is solid-frame.
(par. 3 i).
(2) The sporting skeet-type gun (figs. 34 and 35) is usually furnished
with a 26-inch plain barrel, bored improved cylinder, and is without bay-
onet attachment or sling.
(3) The sporting trap-type gun (fig. 32) is similar to the skeet-type
gun but is furnished with a 30-inch barrel, bored full choke and is with-
out bayonet attachment or sling.

e. General Description (figs. 36, 37, 45, and 46).


(1) The stock of the gun is bolted to the tang which, in the M620A
Gun, floats and locks to the receiver and trigger plate by the forward end
of the tang seating in grooves in rear end of receiver and trigger plate,
when assembled. In the M520 and M620 Guns, the stock is fastened to
the receiver and trigger plate by a screw which passes vertically through
an integral tang on the receiver, the stock grip, and screws into an integral
tang on the trigger plate.
(2) The barrel, magazine, and operating handle bar group is at-
tached to the forward end of the receiver by means of grooves and guides
in the rear end of the barrel sliding into and mating with similar grooves
and guides in the forward end of the receiver. When the group is in posi-
tion, the magazine nut is moved rearward by screw action of the maga-
zine tube, so that lugs on the nut engage in slots in the receiver and
barrel head to hold the groups locked together. The magazine is of the
tubular type with a capacity of five shells loaded end to end. The shells
are pressed together and fed into the receiver by the force of the maga-
zine spring acting upon the follower.
(3) The magazine tube is locked to the barrel at the rear by the
magazine nut, and forward by a screw passing through a lug in the maga-
zine plug and into a lug on the barrel. The operating handle is mounted
and operated on the magazine tube, and the operating handle bar at-
tached to the rear end of the operating handle tube passes through the
forward end of the receiver and engages with and operates the slide.
This slide in turn connects with and operates the sliding breech and lifter
and cocks the hammer.
62
TM 9-285
20
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620

I z ,

Z H e
i o ':.

< 4.

L E

z3
< ZU

< 0

WI 0
TM 9-285
20
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

uU.
Xc
r
~~~~~~~0
u
In~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C u *

on

· Lr W ,UZI5 rr
L

LU J -
Uw 4

mt-t

(I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~W
oIr~w LUU
CL U UL Q)

f~~~~~~~~F IIt'
LU LU CL

UL 0~ 0

00z0
z o D.
'3

0a.
L) W

'<~
:"'l --
u 0
0~~~
Z ~~~~~~~~~~I.
-J
-4
III I I I Ip
coU Lu .
*

co

z oD~~~ =

LULU LU UW I'
0 <

z
j J ULU

64
TM 9-285
20
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620
(4) The receiver contains the operating mechanism and to its lower
rear end is attached the trigger plate to which is mounted the firing
mechanism and the slide lock. The receiver is open at the bottom to per-
mit loading, at the right side for ejection of the fired shell cases, and at
the top for engagement-with the locking block operating in the sliding
breech. The lifter is pivoted to the inside of the receiver and operated
by means of a spring functioned pawl on the rear end of the lifter en-
gaging with a notch in the slide, together with the lifter spring pinned to
the receiver at the rear of the lifter. The function of the lifter is to raise
the shell to chamber level when released from themagazine.
NOTE: The receiver of the M520 and M620 Guns has an integral
tang extending to the rear, while in the M620A Gun, the tang is floating
as already described.

(5) The shell stop is screwed to the inside of the right wall of the
receiver and is operated by the slide and spring action of the stop. The
ejector is positioned in the left wall of the receiver and acts to kick the
shell out of the ejection opening in the receiver when pulled to the rear
out of the barrel chamber by the extractors positioned in the forward
end of the sliding breech.
NOTE: The ejector in M620A and M520 Guns is fastened to the
receiver by a screw, while that of the M620 Gun seats in an aperture in
the receiver wall and is held in position by the sliding breech when
assembled.

(6) The sliding breech (fig. 38) contains the extractors, right and
left, the firing pin, and the locking block and their components. The lock-
ing block operates in radial grooves cut in the sliding breech and is
operated by means of cam lugs on the lower end of the block, function-
ing with similarly shaped camming apertures in the slide, upon which
the sliding breech rests. The slide moves the sliding breech back and
forth and-cams the locking block up and down in an aperture in the top
of the receiver to lock and unlock the sliding breech. The extractors are
of the usual claw type functioned by springs. The firing pin passes through
the sliding breech and the locking block and is cammed back into the
sliding breech on the rearward movement of the slide, by the locking
block.
* (7) The slide (fig. 38) moves in guideways in the receiver walls and
supports, operates, locks, and unlocks the sliding breech. operates the
lifter and shell stop, and cams back and cocks the hammer. The slide is
in turn operated by the operating handle bar which engages with it by
means of a lug on the bar engaging in a mating notch in the slide when
assembled. The slide is blocked in the forward (locked) position by the
slide lock mounted in the trigger plate. The slide and lock are held in
818074 O- 48- 5 65
TM 9-285
20
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

BRIDGE

PLUNGERi : _ SLIDE LOCK


:,- CONTACTING LUG

SLIDE

FIRING PIN STOP PIN


EXTRACTOR (R) , ,

\, He
EXTRACTOR (L)-' /
FIRING PIN
LOCKING BLOCK
SLIDING BREECH
RA PD 42354

Figure 38-Slide and Sliding Breech--Front, Top and Right Side


View-Showing Location of Parts-Stevens Shotgun M620A

close contact, in the locked position, by a spring plunger in the forward


end of the slide, bearing upon the barrel head when assembled.
(8) The trigger plate group (fig. 39) contains the hammer, trigger,
sear, slide lock, and safety, together with their springs and component
parts.
NOTE: The trigger plates of the M520 and M620 Guns have an
integral tang extending to the rear, while in the M620A Gun, the tang
is floating as already described, and mates with both receiver and trigger
plate when assembled. The principal differences in the trigger plate
groups of the M620A (fig. 39), M520 and M620 Guns are as follows:
(a) Hammer. The hammrers of the M620A and M620 Guns are the
same except that the hammer of the M620 Gun has a small roller
pinned to its lower end. The sear hook points upward in both models.
The hammer of the M520 Gun is similar to the M620A Gun, without
roller, except that the sear hook points down.
(b) Mainspring. The mainspring of the M620A and M520 Guns are
of the "mousetrap" type, pivoted on a cross pin. The mainspring of the
M620 Gun is a long, leaf type of spring fastened to the trigger plate tang
by a screw. This spring is slotted to allow the hammer and sear to op-
erate through the slot, and bears on the roller in the hammer.
66
TM 9-285
20
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620

'4
a QI

z Z:
a: Z C

- a

_z !

z i , iI

S A"'

' ' I ,_, *


D: ~ ~
0U j0 0

67F
L
TM 9-285
20
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(c) Sear. The sears of the M620A and M620 Guns are the same and
pivot on the slide lock pin, and are functioned by a torsion spring. The
sear of the M520 Gun is somewhat longer and seats in a slot in the top
of the trigger and is functioned by a small coil spring seated between
sear and trigger. Sear and trigger are pivoted on the trigger pin.
(d) Trigger. The triggers of the M620A and M620 Guns are the
same, are pivoted on the trigger pin, and operate the sear by levering
down the rear end. The trigger of the M520 Gun has a slotted top in
which the sear and sear spring seat. When pulled, the trigger raises the
rear end of the sear with it to release the hammer. In the M620A and
M620 Guns the sear spring functions the trigger, while in the M520 Gun,
the torsion trigger spring mounted on the trigger pin functions the trigger.
(e) Slide lock. The slide lock (figs. 43 and 44) of the M620A, M520,
and M620 Guns are practically the same. In the M620A and M620
Guns, the slide lock spring is of the torsion type and mounted on the
trigger pin and bears down -upon the rear end of the slide lock. In the
M520 Gun, this spring is of the safetypin type and seats in a hole in
the top of the left wall of the trigger plate, and bears upward on the
rear pin of the slide lock link positioned in the forward end of the slide
lock.
(f) Safety. The safeties of the M620A and M620 Guns are of the
cylindrical type, mounted in the rear of the trigger plate guard bow. The
safety in the M520 Gun is of the lever type, the lever pivoted in the rear
end of the trigger plate, and the thumbpiece in the tang of the receiver.
The thumbpiece operates the lever when the trigger plate group is as-
sembled to the receiver.
(9) The slide lock, pivoted in the trigger plate, engages with the
slide to block its rearward movement after it has locked the sliding
breech in position, thereby preventing premature unlocking of the sliding
breech. The lock is disengaged from the slide either by the action of the
slide lock release spring, functioned by the descending hammer with
which it is engaged, or by manual pressure upward on the rear end of
the slide lock through the medium of the slide lock release, which ex-
tends downward through the floor of the trigger plate to the left of the
trigger.

(10) The safety (fig. 39) of the M620A and M620 Guns operates
laterally in the rear end of the trigger plate guard bow to block and free
the trigger, thus preventing or allowing its pulling to fire the gun. In the
M520 Gun, the safety thumbpiece which acts upon the safety lever,
positioned as described above, operates longitudinally to accomplish
the same results.
68
TM 9-285
21-22.
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620
21. DATA.
Gage of bore ................... ....................... 12
Boring of barrel-riot type ............................ Cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting skeet type ............ Improved cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting trap type ................... Full choke
Type of action ......................................... Slide
Type of firing mechanism .......................... Hammerless
Type of magazine ..................................... Tubular
Capacity of magazine ................................... 5 shells
Length of barrel-riot type .............................. 20 in.
Length of barrel-sporting skeet type ...................... 26 in.
Length of barrel-sporting trap type ....................... 30 in.
Length of stock and receiver (approx.) ..................... 20 in.
Length of assembled gun-riot type (approx.).............. 40 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.) ...... 46 in.
Length of assembledgun-sporting trap type (approx.) ....... 50 in.
Weight of assembled gun-riot type (M520) (approx.) .......... 7 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting skeet type
(M620) (approx.) .................................. 75/8 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting trap type
(M620A) (approx.) .................................. 75/8 lb

22. OPERATION.
a. The gun is operated by moving the operating handle fully and
smartly backward and forward. This action unlocks the sliding breech,
extracts and ejects the fired shell casing,. cocks the hammer, transfers a
live shell from the magazine to the chamber of the barrel, and relocks
the sliding breech behind the shell.
CAUTION: During operation, the muzzle of the gun should always be
pointed at a safe spot.
b. Before the operating handle can be retracted, the slide lock must
be disengaged from the slide (fig. 40). To facilitate this, the operating
'handle should be moved slightly forward to allow the lock to disengage.
The slide is held snugly in engagement with the slide lock through the
force exerted by the slide spring plunger against the barrel head. If the
gun has been fired and the hammer consequently forward, the only move-
ment necessary is to reciprocate the operating handle as above as the
descending hammer through the medium of the slide lock release spring,
with which it is engaged, has already disengaged the slide lock from the
slide. If, however, the hammer is in the cocked position, it is necessary to
push up on the slide lock release which is visible on the left side of the
trigger plate, just to the left of the trigger, before retracting the operating
handle. When the gun is being fired as a repeater, the preliminary for-
69
TM 9-285
22
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Z
< l "~
A .
<E~~~. 4C

z l~~~a

I-

'~ S ~~~~~~~ / O.

VJ~I

70
TM 9-285
22
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620
ward movement of the operating handle is accomplished by the recoil of
the gun away from the operating handle, which is held by the operator.
CAUTION: During these operations, the finger should remain outside
the trigger plate guard bow. Reciprocation should be full and smart to
insure extraction of the shell, cocking of the hammer, and complete lock-
ing of the sliding breech and engagement of the slide lock. Slamming of
the mechanism, however, should be avoided.
c. With the gun loaded, locked, and cocked, the only movement
necessary to fire the gun is the pulling of the trigger. Pressure on the
trigger should be removed while the gun is being operated.
d. The trigger safety (M620A and M620 Guns) (fig. 41), positioned
in the rear of the trigger plate guard bow, operates laterally. When
pushed to the left, the trigger is free to be pulled and the gun fired. When
pushed to the right, the trigger is blocked and cannot be pulled nor the
gun fired. In the M520 Gun, the safety thumbpiece is positioned in the
tang of the receiver and operates longitudinally. When pushed forward,
the trigger is free to be pulled and the gun fired. When pulled to the rear,
the trigger is blocked and cannot be pulled nor the gun fired. With a
shell in the chamber, it is best to block the trigger by pushing the safety
to the right (M620A and M620 Guns) or to the rear (M520 Gun)
unless the gun is to be fired immediately.

e. To Load and Unload the Magazine.


(1) To load the magazine (fig. 42) press a shell, nose first, against
the lifter and into the rear end of the magazine against the magazine
follower until it slips in front of and is retained by the lifter. Load
another shell in the same way by pressing it against the lifter and base
of the first shell loaded, until five in all are loaded. Loading should be
done with the sliding breech closed and locked.
(2) To unload the magazine, press the carrier up into the receiver
until free of the base of the shell in the magazine and allow the shells to
slip out one by one. Sliding breech must be in locked position.
f. To Load and Unload the Gun.
(1) To load a shell from the magazine into the chamber, slide the
safety to safe position (par. 22 d). Then disengage slide lock and recipro-
cate the operating handle (par. 22 b). Another shell may then be loaded
into the magazine. Test locking of sliding breech by attempting to retract
operating handle. Operating handle should not retract. Allow safety to
remain in safe position unless gun is to be fired immediately.
(2) To unload the gun, slide safety to safe position and, unload the
magazine as explained above. Then disengage slide lock and retract
operating handle to extract and eject shell in chamber. Inspect magazine
and chamber to make sure gun is fully unloaded.
71
TM 9-285
22
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

In

UU o
"'
CliCl

72
f ,'', 01'A

WI

· oX ... . 1,

72w

72
TM 9-285
22-23
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620
g. To Load the Chamber Only. With the magazine empty, slide
safety to safe position as explained above, retract the sliding breech by
pulling the operating handle fully to the rear as explained, and push a
shell directly into the chamber. Then push the operating handle fully
and smartly forward to lock the sliding breech behind the shell. Test
locking of slide (par. 22 f).

23. FUNCTIONING.
a. As already explained, the functioning of the operating mechanism
is accomplished by the reciprocation of the operating handle. The rear
end of the operating handle bar is engaged with the slide by means of a
lug on the bar mating with a notch in the slide. As the operating handle
bar is moved to the rear, it pushes the slide to the rear. The locking
block, which is a radially curved piece, passes through the sliding breech,
which rests upon the slide, and the top of the receiver, when in the locked
position, to lock the sliding breech to the receiver. When in this position,
the lower end of the locking block rests upon the slide which thus holds
it up in position. As the slide moves to the rear, it cams down the locking
block from the top of the receiver by means of the lugs on the lower end
of the locking block slipping into and engaging with corresponding
camming apertures in the slide. The locking block in turn cams back the
firing pin which passes through it, from the face of the sliding breech.
As the slide moves to the rear, it pulls the sliding breech with it by means
of the locking block. The sliding breech extracts the fired shell from the
chamber by means of the extractors, and the shell is knocked out of the
receiver, in passing, by the ejector, 'positioned in the left side of the
receiver wall. As the slide moves forward again, it pulls the sliding breech
with it, and at the end of the forward movement, cams up the locking
block through the sliding breech and into the opening in the top of the
receiver to lock the sliding breech to the receiver.
b. During the rearward movement, the slide cams back and rides
over the hammer, mounted in the trigger plate. When the hammer
reaches the extreme rearward position, it is caught and held by a hook
on the slide lock engaging with a lug on the side of the hammer. The
hammer is thus locked back, disengaged from the sear, until released
from the slide lock by the slide, acting upon the slide lock during its
forward movement. The hammer when released is caught and held by
the sear, and the slide lock springs up behind the slide to lock it in posi-
tion as explained below.
c. When the slide lock (figs. 43 and 44) is disengaged from the slide
either by manual pressure or by the descending hammer (par. 20 e (9)),
and the operating handle retracted, the slide moves to the rear, riding
over the forward end of the lock. As the slide returns on the forward
73
TM 9-285
23
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

SLIDE STOP RELEASE SPRING


,.D
__~. '~' _ .... ,~lmlmlmx/ SLIDE LOCK LUG
HAMMER

SLIDE

TRIGGER PLATE

RA PD 40516

Figure 43-Slide and Trigger Plate Groups-Slide Riding Over Lock


-Hammer Locked-- Stevens. Shotgun M620A

SLIDE STOP RELEASE SPRING


___________.___________ SLIDE LOCK LUG
~-: t; ~2 s /_. HAMMER

TRIGGER PLATE

RA PD 40515

Figure 44-Slide and Trigger Plate Groups-Slide Blocked-


Hammer Unlocked-Stevens Shotgun M620A

movement, and nears the forward position, a lug on the rear of the slide
cams the forward end of the lock down to release the hammer, which
moves forward and is caught by the sear as above. Immediately after
camming down the forward end of the lock, the slide moves from en-
gagement with the lock and locks the sliding breech. The lock thus
freed, springs up behind the slide to block its rearward movement and
thus prevents premature unlocking of the sliding breech.
d. As the slide is pulled forward, it operates the lifter rapidly up and
down by means of a spring functioned pawl on the lifter engaging in a
notch in the slide. The lifter is returned to the lowered position by the
lifter spring positioned in the receiver. The lifter lifts the shell resting
upon it up into line with the chamber and the sliding breech, and then
returns in time to catch the next shell released from the magazine by the
action of the slide on the shell stop. The shell, thus raised to line of
74
TM 9-285
23-24
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620
chamber, is pushed forward into the chamber by the sliding breech
as it moves forward with the slide. The slide depresses and disengages
the shell stop as it reaches the end of the forward movement, thereby
releasing a shell from the magazine which is driven into the receiver
upon the lifter by the force of the magazine spring.
e. The hammer is released to fire the gun by pulling the trigger which
levers the sear from engagement with the hammer.

24. REMOVAL OF GROUPS (figs. 36, 37, 45 and 46).


a. As all three models of this gun are practically the same except for
the trigger plate group and minor changes in design the M620A Gun
(latest model) will be covered herein and the variations in procedure
in the case of the other models noted as they occur. Groups and parts
should be removed and replaced in the order given below. Groups and
parts, when removed, should be placed on a clean, flat surface and care
observed to prevent loss of screws and small parts. Remove as follows:
(1) BAYONET ATTACHMENT, BARREL, MAGAZINE, AND OPERATING
HANDLE GROUP.
(a) The bayonet attachment may be removed from the barrel in a
manner similar to that prescribed for the Winchester Gun M97 (par.
8 a (1) (a)).
(b) With bayonet attachment removed, hold gun bottom side up and
press slide lock release which extends through the trigger plate to the
left of the trigger. Then push operating handle forward slightly to allow
lock to disengage, and then pull handle to the rear as far as it will go to
retract the sliding breech. If sliding breech is in forward position, the
extractors will interfere with removal of barrel.
(c) Turn magazine tube clockwise by means of milled surface until
lugs on lock nut are out of mating notches in receiver (fig. 47).
(d) Grasp receiver in one hand and barrel in the other, with hands
close together, and slide the barrel head upward out of the receiver
about 1/8 inch, or as far as it will go. This disconnects the slide handle
bar from the slide (fig. 48). Then draw operating bar handle forward
as far as it will go until rear end of bar clears receiver (fig. 49).
(e) Slide barrel, magazine, and operating handle group upward out
of receiver (fig. 50).
(2) SLIDE AND SLIDING BREECH GROUP.
(a) Remove sliding breech stop screw, located forward in left wall
of receiver by unscrewing counterclockwise.
(b) If sliding breech is in the locked position, press up on slide lock
release to disengage lock from slide, and move slide to rear until sliding
breech is unlocked from receiver. Then move sliding breech together
wi' slide out of forward end of receiver. (If slide is moved forward, it
75
TM 9-285
24
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

s, 8 , '1 e
Zw

,o, _ _/

"- ,
0

Z . .t N _ ! X t

zj p
UJ 0

Z00CC
.76
0
76Lu~~ ~~~~,
-285
24
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620

0co
Ut wU"4
2~I
z~~~~~~~~~~
Z
cLJ 0
o 1~~~
0 wu '-
a
)
f
V
z J~~~~~~~
~ ~. =

j j -J rr e~~~~~~~~~-

LL~~~~ W~C
WU j *.
< 1

U / on U,
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I
LU~~~~~~~~~~~~~
z~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-- 1

w · z B~~~~~~~~

'
<~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N

77
I

z ~ ~ ~ ~~~~- *0
I.

U Z-

z z

iL 0
w a0

L) 0 ~ ~
I
~ ~
0
;~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~'
~ 4
u)

Lu~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 77~~il~
0

77<
TM 9-285
24
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

<

0,.&, -'
f t Z_ > ~4
_4~

II
z I IC

N 0
78

i ?w - S r

87
TM 9-285
24
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620

m !

C C4

IV

z ~ If I~

t0 .L: -0J~~ ~ i

I i o -

Lu k,
TM 9-285
24
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
will lock the sliding breech, and thus prevent removal.) If sliding breech
is in the rearward position, it may be moved forward by lightly tapping
end of receiver on a wooden block. The slide may now be lifted from the
sliding breech.
NOTE: The ejector of the Model 620A and 520 Guns is fastened to
the inner left wall of the receiver by a screw and should not be removed.
The ejector on the Model 620 Gun seats in a countersink in the same
position. If loose, it should be removed to prevent loss by inserting small
drift in hole in left wall of receiver, from the outside, and pushing
ejector from its seat, into the receiver. Observe care against loss of
ejector spring.
(3) STOCK. In order to remove the trigger plate and lifter groups from
the receiver the stock must first be removed as follows:
(a) Remove the two butt plate screws by unscrewing counterclock-
wise and remove butt plate.
(b) With long shanked screwdriver, unscrew stock tang screw in bot-
tom of hole, bored in butt end of stock, by turning counterclockwise until
disengaged from tang.
(c) Pull stock to rear from engagement with receiver and tang. Tang
screw and washer may then be removed from rear end of stock.
NOTE: To remove stock from the Model 520 and 620 Guns, unscrew
tang screw from top of receiver tang, by turning counterclockwise. Re-
move screw and pull stock to the rear from receiver. If removal is diffi-
cult, loosen trigger plate screw.
(4) TRIGGER PLATE GROUP. The hammer should be in the cocked
position when removing trigger plate group, in order to minimize chance
of damage to slide lock release spring.
(a) With stock removed, remove trigger plate screw from rear left
side of receiver by turning counterclockwise. Then with straight pin
drift, punch out trigger plate pin located about three inches forward of
trigger plate screw.
(b) Pull trigger plate downward out of receiver. The floating tang
(model 620A only) can then be pulled down out of receiver. Be careful
not to lose the slide lock release when removing trigger plate.
CAUTION: Observe care when removing groups not to catch end of
slide lock release spring, projecting from forward end of slide lock, on
rear of the lifter. If this spring becomes deformed, the slide lock will not
function. When the hammer is in rearward (cocked) position, the end
of spring is less liable to catch. The function of the slide lock spring
(M620A and M620 Guns) is to depress the rear end of the slide lock,
thus raising the forward end, either to engage the hook on the lock with
the lug on the hammer on the rearward movement or to engage the lock
behind the slide to block it on the forward movement. The pressure
80
TM 9-285
24-25
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620
exerted on the forward end of the slide lock by the slide lock release
spring determines whether or not the slide lock spring has enough force
to function properly. If the slide lock release spring becomes deformed
and bears too heavily on the forward end of the lock, the slide lock
spring will not be strong enough to counteract this excess pressure and
raise the forward end of the lock when necessary. Thus the hammer will
not be locked back and/or the slide blocked. If the spring does not bear
heavily enough, it will not lever the nose of the lock down when the
hammer moves forward. The torsion force of the slide lock release spring
as well as the shape and position of its forward end, determine the pres
sure exerted at the correct time. The slide lock spring of the M520 Gun
bears upward on the forward end of the slide lock.
(5) LIFTER.
(a) With the trigger plate group removed, slide lifter inward off its
screw and remove from receiver.
(b) If lifter spring positioned in receiver to rear of lifter is loose, it
should be removed to prevent loss by pushing in on pin end, shown in
extreme right rear, outside face of receiver, using a small pin drift. Other-
wise it should not be removed.

25. REPLACEMENT OF GROUPS.


a. Groups and parts should be thoroughly cleaned, lightly oiled,
and gun lubricated, where necessary, before replacing groups. Replace
as follows:
(1) LIFTER.
(a) If the lifter spring has been removed, replace by inserting pin on
rear end into pin hole in extreme right rear inner wall of receiver. Press
pin through hole using care to see that spring lies flush in its groove when
seated. Pin should project through wall of receiver until flush. If pin is
loose in hole, it can be expanded slightly by tapping outside center of pin
lightly with a small prick punch.
(b) With receiver bottom side up and barrel opening to left, grasp
lifter by forked end and insert vertically into receiver so that pawl on
rear end points to forward end of receiver. Slide lifter onto its screw,
positioned in the inner right wall of receiver and rotate forked end for-
ward, at the same time pressing lifter in towards wall of receiver until
lug on right side of lifter engages under lifter spring. Then, press lifter
in against receiver wall and rotate forked end forward and down. If
trigger plate is not to be replaced immediately, insert pin in trigger plate
pin hole in receiver to retain lifter.
(2) TRIGGER PLATE GROUP.
(a) With receiver bottom side up, barrel opening to left, and lifter
818074 0 - 48 - 6 81
TM 9-285
25
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
assembled to receiver, insert oval end of tang into the groove in rear top
of receiver, with stem to rear, so that the relief cut in tang faces towards
left side of the receiver.
(b) Cock hammer and position slide lock release in rear of slide lock
so that stud on release fits in hole in lock and release lies flush with left
face of trigger plate.
(c) Insert trigger plate, with trigger to rear, into bottom of receiver
at an angle so that forward end of slide lock will slip under rear end of
lifter. Then, press rear end of trigger plate down towards receiver until
trigger plate screw hole in trigger plate is about 1/s inch ahead of corre-
sponding hole in receiver. Then, press trigger plate into receiver and to
rear until tang groove in rear of trigger plate mates with bottom of tang
oval while top of tang oval is still seated in its groove in receiver. When
this mating is effected, press trigger plate down and to rear into receiver
until it is flush with receiver, and screw and pin holes aline.
CAUTION: Care should be observed to prevent forward end of slide
lock release spring from catching in carrier during replacement of trigger
plate group and becoming deformed. If this spring becomes deformed,
the slide lock will not function. If hammer is forward during replace-
ment, end of spring is forced farther forward and is more liable to catch.
Refer to CAUTION, paragraph 24 a (4) (b).
(d) Insert trigger plate screw into its counterbored hole in rear left
side of receiver and screw in part way. Then, insert trigger plate pin in
its hole, just ahead of screwhole, rounded end first, and drive through
receiver and trigger plate until flush with both sides of receiver. Then,
tighten trigger plate screw.
NOTE: To replace trigger plate group of Model 520 and 620 Guns,
slide trigger plate into receiver as explained above. Replace trigger plate
screw and screw in part way. Then replace trigger plate pin. After stock
has been replaced, draw trigger plate screw down tightly. This will allow
the stock to slip between the two tangs more easily. Be sure rear end of
safety lever of the M520 Gun is engaged with thumbpiece in receiver
tang before seating trigger plate group.
(3) STOCK.
(a) With lifter and trigger plate assembled to receiver, slide stock on
stock tang, pistol grip facing down. Mate tenon of stock with mortised
rear end of receiver so that stock fits flush with rear of trigger plate and
receiver.
(b) Place washer on stock tang screw and insert screw in hole in rear
of stock. Mate threads in screw and tang; then screw down clockwise,
drawing stock and receiver tightly together.
(c) Replace butt plate and butt plate screws. Do not draw butt plate
82
TM 9-285
25
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620
screws down too tightly as threads in stock may strip out or composition
butt plate crack.
NOTE: To replace stock on Model 520 and 620 Guns, insert grip end
of stock between tangs on receiver and trigger plate and push towards
receiver until tenon of stock grip mates with mortise in rear end of
receiver, and tang screw holes in both tangs and stock grip aline. Insert
tang screw through receiver tang and stock grip, thread into trigger plate
tang and draw down tightly. Do not force assembly. If stock grip will not
slide into place easily, loosen trigger plate screw, seat stock, insert tang
screw, and then tighten trigger plate screw before tang screw is drawn
down tightly. See that stock and receiver are rigid.
(4) SLIDE AND SLIDING BREECH GROUP.
(a) If the ejector (M620 Gun) has been removed from the receiver,
it should be replaced before replacing the slide and sliding breech.
(b) Place the slide on the bottom of the sliding breech so that the
cam lugs of the locking block seat in the lug camming apertures in the
slide, and the lug on the rear of the slide is facing in the opposite direc-
tion to the extractors on the sliding breech.
(c) Move the slide to the rearward position with respect to the sliding
breech so that the locking block is flush with the top of sliding breech.
Then, insert slide and sliding breech, extractors facing out, into the for-
ward (open) end of the receiver with sliding breech towards top of
receiver and guides on slide mating with guideways in inner walls of
receiver.
(d) Move the slide and sliding breech together towards the rear of
the receiver until the slide strikes the shell stop. Press stop into its groove
in the receiver and move the slide and sliding breech past it until rear of
the slide strikes the slide lock. Press upward on slide lock release to
disengage lock and move slide and sliding breech to rear. Then replace
sliding breech stop screw. The slide should be moved and not the sliding
breech, in order to keep locking block in the lowered position so as not to
interfere with receiver.
(5) BAYONET ATTACHMENT, BARREL, MAGAZINE, AND OPERATING
HANDLE GROUP.
(a) If sliding breech is in locked position, press upward on slide lock
release, to disengage lock from slide. Then, move the slide to the rear to
unlock the sliding breech and then move slide and sliding breech to
rearward position. If sliding breech is in the forward position, the extrac-
tors will extend into the barrel aperture in the receiver, and the barrel
cannot be inserted fully into the receiver.
(b) With the operating handle pushed fully forward and receiver and
barrel group bottom side up, grasp barrel in one hand and receiver in
the other, with the hands close together, and insert the mating guides of
83
TM 9-285
25-26
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
the barrel head into the mating grooves in the receiver, and slide barrel
head down into the receiver until barrel head is flush with bottom of
receiver.
(c) Grasp operating handle and pull it to the rear until bar snaps
into position (mates with slide); then turn magazine tube counterclock-
wise by means of the milled surface until the lugs on the lock nut enter
the notches on sides of the receiver and barrel head. Then screw down
tightly until nut is flush with forward face of receiver.
(d) See that magazine tube is turned in tight, and then push operat-
ing handle forward until action is locked. Then operate gun to test
assembly.
(e) The bayonet attachment, if removed, may be replaced in a man-
ner similar to that prescribed for the Winchester Gun M97 (par. 9 a (6)).

26. FIELD INSPECTION.


a. With the gun completely assembled, test the mechanism for
proper functioning. Fired shells may often be used for testing, when
dummy shells are not available, by turning in the uncrimped end so that
the length of the shell will approximate that of a live shell. Use of live
shells for testing is prohibited.
CAUTION: Be sure gun is fully unloaded before inspection.
b. Operate the gun as follows:
(1) With the sliding breech locked and hammer cocked, push operat-
ing handle slightly forward and press upward on the slide lock release
showing at left of trigger. Pull operating handle fully and smartly to the
rear and then push fully and smartly forward. Reciprocate operating
handle thus several times to test smoothness of action.
(2) Retract operating handle as in (l)-above; then release slide lock
release and push operating handle smartly forward to lock the sliding
breech. Then attempt to retract the operating handle. The operating
handle should not retract.
(3) Pull the trigger, thus allowing the hammer to move forward to
the fired position, and attempt to retract the operating handle. The oper-
ating handle should retract.
(4) Retract the operating handle fully and then push forward until
the sliding breech is fully forward but not locked and the locking block
not fully engaged in the aperture in the top of the receiver. Then pull
the trigger to release the hammer. The hammer should not be released
until the sliding breech is fully locked and the locking block fully seated
in the aperture in top of the receiver.
(5) Place two or more dummy or fired shells in the magazine and
work through the action to test the gun for feeding, loading, extraction
and ejection of shells. The second shell should not leave the magazine
84
TM 9-285
26
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620
until the first shell has been loaded into the chamber, and the sliding
breech is locking behind it.
NOTE: Fired shells will not work through the action as easily as live
or dummy shells as they are somewhat deformed through being fired.
Therefore allowance should be made for friction and smoothness of ac-
tion in positioning the shell.
(6) With sliding breech locked and hammer in cocked position, slide
trigger safety all the way to the right (M620A and M620 Guns) or to
rear (M520 Gun) and attempt to pull the trigger. The trigger should
not pull nor the hammer release.
(7) Slide trigger safety all the way to the left (M620A and M620
Guns) or forward (M520 Gun) and pull the trigger. The trigger should
pull and the hammer be released to fire the gun.
c. When the gun does not operate and function smoothly and prop-
erly when tested as above, damaged or improperly assembled parts are
indicated as follows:
(1) OPERATING HANDLE STICKS. May be due to bent operating
handle bar, burs in bar slot in receiver or barrel head, or dented maga-
zine tube.
(2) SLIDING BREECH DOES NOT LOCK. May be due to foreign matter
on face of sliding breech, in extractor grooves in barrel head or in
locking block aperture in sliding breech, broken firing pin, or burs on
edges of locking block or locking aperture in top of receiver.
(3) HAMMER DOES NOT COCK PROPERLY OR SLIPS. May be due to
burs or foreign matter on sear hooks of hammer or sear, worn or broken
hooks, missing improperly assembled or broken sear or trigger springs,
or improperly assembled or broken mainspring.
(4) FIRING PIN DOES NOT RETRACT INTO SLIDING BREECH. May be
due to broken firing pin, or burs on firing pin or locking block.
(5) SLIDE DOES NOT Go FULLY FORWARD. May be due to jammed
locking block or foreign matter in apertures in slide, jammed slide
plunger, or broken firing pin.
(6) SLIDE LOCK DOES NOT FUNCTION. May be due to bent or burred
slide lock, improperly assembled or bent slide lock spring, improperly
assembled or bent slide lock release spring (usually the case), or burs
on rear of slide. Refer to CAUTION, paragraph 24 a (4) (b).
(7) SLIDE DOES NOT RETRACT FULLY. May be due to broken ham-
mer, improperly assembled mainspring (M620 Gun), improperly as-
sembled stock tang (M620A Gun), or broken firing pin.
(8) SHELLS ARE NOT EXTRACTED OR EJECTED. May be due to worn,
broken or burred extractors, broken or missing extractor springs, or
worn, broken, or missing ejector or ejector spring, or improperly assem-
bled ejector.
85
TM 9-285
26-27
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(9) Two SHELLS FED INTO RECEIVER AT ONCE. May be due to bent,
sticking, or broken shell stop or loose shell stop screw.
(10) SHELL STICKS IN MAGAZINE. May be due to corroded or bent
magazine follower, dented tube, broken or kinked spring, or foreign mat-
ter in magazine tube.
(11) TRIGGER SAFETY STICKS. May be due to burred safety or trig-
ger web (M620A and M620 Guns), broken thumbpiece spring or spring
plunger (M520 Gun), or foreign matter in mechanism.
d. Inspect barrel and test trigger pull (par. 3 n).
e. In addition to inspection of the gun for operation and functioning,
the gun should be inspected generally for condition and defects noted.
Attention should be directed to such defects as cracked wooden parts,
cracked or deformed metal parts, dented magazine tube, loose screws,
loose or binding parts or assemblies, loose barrel or magazine, loose
stock or butt plate, rust, dents, burs, or excessive wear of parts. If de-
fects are such that early malfunction of the gun is indicated, the gun
should be turned over to ordnance personnel for inspection and cor-
rection.
f. Where defects and malfunction cannot be remedied by cleaning,
lubrication, and simple adjustments of assembly which lie within the
scope of using troops, the gun should be turned over to ordnance per-
sonnel for a thorough inspection, correction, and/or repair.
g. Removal of burs on working parts, trigger adjustments, and like
corrections should not be attempted by using troops as stoning of parts
must be exacting, the angle of the faces concerned must not be changed,
and volume of metal must not be materially reduced.
h. A loose barrel, which shakes when assembled, indicates worn barrel
head grooves or magazine nut. The gun should be turned over to ord-
nance personnel for correction or repair.
i. If shell appears unnecessarily loose in chamber with sliding breech
locked, the gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel to be
checked for headspace, or worn or loose locking block.
j. Adjustment and maintenance of the gun in the case of using troops
is limited to the removal and replacement of the parts and groups of
parts (pars. 24 and 25), together with cleaning and lubrication, and such
adjustments as are necessary in assembling the gun as outlined.

27. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION.


a. Cleaning, oiling, and lubricating may be accomplished in a manner
similar to that described for the Winchester M97 Gun (par. 11). Atten-
tion should be given to corresponding parts and surfaces when lubri-
cating.
86
TM 9-285
27
STEVENS SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M620A, M520, AND M620
b. The barrel, magazine, and operating handle group should be re-
moved from the receiver for cleaning the bore, and for thorough clean-
ing the groups should be removed, and the parts and assemblies cleaned,
oiled, and lubricated as directed. With the bayonet attachment assem-
bled to the gun, the bore should be cleaned from the muzzle end, and a
rag stuffed into the receiver to protect the action while cleaning. When
it is necessary to remove the groups, the bore may be cleaned from the
breech end (par. 3 i).
c. Points to be lubricated are:
(1) Operating handle bar opening in barrel head and receiver.
(2) Operating handle bar guideway in receiver.
(3) Lifter screw.
(4) Slide guideways in receiver.
(5) Trigger, hammer, and sear pins, and hammer roller (M620 Gun).
(6) Locking block guides.
(7) Slide plunger.
(8) Outer surface of magazine tube where operating handle tube
bears.

d. In very cold climates oiling and lubricating should be reduced to


a minimum. Only surfaces showing signs of wear should be lightly oiled.
Refer to "Special Maintenance," section XI.

87
TM 9-28'5
28
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Section V

ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37


Paragraph
Description ........................................... 28
Data ................................................ 29
Operation ............................................ 30
Functioning .......................................... 31
Removal of groups .................................... 32
Replacement of groups .................................. 33
Field inspection ....................................... 34
Cleaning and lubrication ................................ 35

28. DESCRIPTION.
a. Identification marks on this gun are generally to be found as
follows:
(1) Name of maker and model number are stamped on top of barrel
near the breech end.
(2) The serial number of the gun is stamped on the lower face of the
barrel near the breech end and on the lower face of the forward end of
the receiver.
b. This gun (figs. 51 and 52) is a manually operated repeating shot-
gun of the slide action, hammerless, solid-frame, and take-down type.
The gun is so constructed that the barrel can be easily removed by dis-
engaging the stud on the magazine nut from the barrel lug, and then un-
locking the barrel from the receiver by disengaging interrupted threads
on the rear end of the barrel from like threads in the forward end of
the receiver. This construction facilitates cleaning and transportation
(par. 3 i).
c. This gun is furnished in various grades having barrels of different
lengths and degrees of boring, and other modifications of design. Basically,
however, the mechanisms of all guns of this make and model are the
same. For convenience herein the guns will be classified as three types:.
riot, sporting skeet, and sporting trap, although variations of these types
may occur.
NOTE: The standard grade of this model gun is commercially known
as the "Featherlight".
(1) The riot-type gun is usually furnished with a 20-inch plain barrel,
bored full cylinder, and may be equipped with a bayonet attachment
and hand guard attached to the muzzle end of the barrel, and a leather
sling attached to a sling swivel on the bayonet attachment and the stock.
If equipped with bayonet attachment it is solid-frame (par. 3 i).
88
TM 9-285
28
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37

iin
I-

I,
.
etR-~~ . . ,c

8 9

*9,
TM 9-285
28
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(2) The sporting skeet-type gun is usually furnished with a 26-inch
plain or ribbed barrel, bored improved cylinder and is without bayonet
attachment or sling.
(3) The sporting trap-type gun (figs. 51 and 52) is similar to the
skeet-type gun but is furnished with a 30-inch barrel, bored full choke
and is without bayonet attachment or sling.

d. General Description (figs. 53, 63 and 64).


(1) The stock of the gun is bolted to the tang on the rear end of the
receiver, and the barrel is locked to the forward end by means of inter-
rupted threads on barrel and in receiver, and fastenedc to the forward
end of the magazine by means of a lug on the barrel and a stud on the
magazine nut as already explained. The magazine tube is screwed into
the receiver at manufacture. The slide handle is mounted and operated
on the magazine tube. The rear end of the slide handle bar passes through
the forward end of the receiver and engages with and operates the
slide, which in turn operates the breechblock, carrier, and shell stops,
and cams back and cocks the hammer.
NOTE: The slide handle refers to the slide handle group, which con-
sists of the slide bar, tube, and wooden slide handle assembled to tube.
(2') The receiver contains the operating mechanism and to its lower
rear end is attached the trigger plate to which is mounted the firing
mechanism and the slide stop. The receiver is open at the bottom to per-
mit loading and the ejection of the fired shell cases. The carrier (figs. 54
and 55) is pivoted to the inside of the receiver and acts to raise the
shells to the bore line in loading and ejects them when extracted from
the barrel chamber by the extractors on the breechblock. The positive
(right) and spring (left) shell stops are pivoted in the forward end of
the receiver to the rear of the magazine opening.
(3) The breechblock (figs.54 and 55) contains the extractors and
the firing pin and their components, and mates with and is operated by
the slide through the medium of a lug and hooked projection on the bot-
tom of the breechblock seating in mating apertures in the slide. A pro-
jection on the rear top of the breechblock seats in front of a locking
shoulder cut in the top of the receiver to lock the breechblock in posi-
tion, when cammed up by the slide in the forward movement.
(4) The slide (figs. 54 and 55) is engaged with the slide bar, as
already explained, by means of a spring pin passing laterally through the
slide and rear end of the slide bar. The slide operates in guideways in
the side walls of the receiver.
(5) The trigger plate contains the trigger, hammer, mainspring, slide
stop, and safety together with their components.
90
TM 9-285
28
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37

Za X o

ZI ·

W ca

--- 0 ' J

' :~ Zf~ 0G Of, j o.0 . .

fi 1 _ Z Z*<~ MEMz ·
C

Z
0
Z-'-z T o E
U !

In
O< - S-

M
I2li/ I

U U 2~~~L

91
TM 9-285
28
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

CARRIER

BREECH BLOCK

SLIDE

Figure 54-Carrier, Breechblock and Slide-Front, Top, and Left


Side View-Ithaca Shotgun M37

(6) The magazine which is of the tubular type is screwed into the
receiver below the barrel and has a capacity of four shells loaded end to
end. The shells are pressed together and fed into the receiver by the
force of the magazine spring acting upon the magazine spring cup.
(7) The positive (right) and spring (left) shell stops are pivoted in
the lower part of the receiver and operated by the slide to block and
release the shells in the magazine.
(8) The slide stop is pivoted in the trigger plate and acts upon the
slide to block its rearward movement after it has locked the breechblock
in position, thereby preventing premature unlocking of the breechblock
(figs. 59 and 60). The slide stop is disengaged from the slide either by
92
TM 9-285
28
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37

CARR I ER

Xs-EXTRACTOR HINGE PIN

FIRING PIN CHECK PIN. -EXTRACTOR

.EXTRACTOR SPRING
LOCKING SHOULDER C O BRE EXTRACTORCK

FIRING PIN

SLIDE PIN
SLIDE STOP LUG rSLIDE
_ PIN CHECK PIN

SLIDE
RA PD 42343

Figure 55-Carrier, Breechblock and Slide-Rear, Bottom and Right


Side View-Showing Location of Parts-Ithaca Shotgun M37

the descending hammer or by manual upward pressure on the lower end


of the stop which projects through the floor of the trigger plate at the
right side of the forward end of the trigger plate guard bow. A hook on
the rear end of the slide stop, engaging with a lug on the side of the
hammer, locks the hammer back in the extreme rearward position when
cammed back by the slide. The rear end of the stop is held in position
to engage the hammer by the slide riding over and depressing the for-
ward end of the stop. The forward end of the stop is released and springs
up, thereby disengaging the lock from the hammer as the slide reaches
the forward position. The hammer is then caught and held by the sear.
This prevents premature release of the hammer.
(9) The trigger safety slides laterally in an aperture in the trigger
plate guard bow just behind the trigger, and acts to block or clear the
trigger thus preventing or allowing retraction to fire the gun.
(10) The bayonet attachment, bayonet, bayonet scabbard, and gun
sling (fig. 5) when and if furnished, are similar to those furnished for
the Winchester Guns M97 and M12 (par. 4 e (9))
93
TM 9-285
29-30
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
29. DATA.
Gage of bore ............................................. 12
Boring of barrel--riot type ........................... Cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting skeet type .................. Improved
Boring of barrel-sporting trap type .................. Full choke
Type of action ........................................ Slide
Type of firing mechanism ......................... Hammerless
Type of magazine ................................... Tubular
Capacity of magazine ................................ 4 shells
Length of barrel-riot type ............................. 20 in.
Length of barrel-sporting skeet type ..................... 26 in.
Length of barrel-sporting trap type ...................... 30 in.
Length of stock, receiver, and magazine assembled (approx.) 313/4 in.
Length of assembled gun-riot type (approx.)............. 40 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.) ..... 46 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ...... 50 in.
Weight of assembled gun-riot type (approx.) ............. 6 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.) .... 61/4 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting trap type-"Featherlight"
(approx.) ........................................ 6/% lb

30. OPERATION.
a. The gun is operated by moving the slide handle fully and smartly
backward and forward. This action unlocks the breechblock, extracts
and ejects the fired shell casing, cocks the hammer, transfers a live shell
from the magazine to the chamber of the barrel, and relocks the breech-
block behind the shell.
CAUTION: During operation, the muzzle of the gun should always
be pointing at a safe spot.

b. Before the slide handle can be retracted the slide stop must be
disengaged from the slide (fig..56). If the gun has been fired and the
hammer consequently forward, the only movement necessary is to recip-
rocate the slide handle as above, as the descending hammer has already
disengaged the stop. If, however, the hammer is in the cocked position,
it is necessary to push up the lower end of the stop which is visible at the
right side of the forward end of the trigger plate guard bow, before mov-
ing the slide handle to the rear. The slide handle should be moved for-
ward slightly to reduce friction between slide and stop while disengaging.
CAUTION: During these operations, the finger should remain outside
the trigger plate guard bow. Reciprocation of the slide handle should be
full and smart to insure extraction of the shell, cocking of the hammer,
and complete locking of the breechblock, and engagement of the slide
94
TM 9-285
30
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37

oi
II

s tb eX -8~~~~~
r+,,,I m~~~~~~~a
: ^ 8~~~~~~~~

In

95
TM 9-285
30-31
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
stop. Slamming of the mechanism, however, should be avoided. When the
gun is being fired as a repeater, all pressure should be removed from the
trigger while operating.
c. With the gun loaded, locked, and cocked, the only movement
necessary to fire the gun is the pulling of the trigger.
d. The trigger safety, positioned in the rear of the trigger plate guard
bow, operates laterally (fig. 57). When pushed to the left, the trigger is
free to be pulled and the gun fired. When pushed to the right, the trigger
is blocked and cannot be pulled nor the gun fired. With a shell in the
chamber, it is best to block the trigger by pushing the safety to the right,
unless the gun is to be fired immediately.
NOTE: The safety is sometimes furnished for left-handed shooters
to operate in opposite direction. This, however, is the exception, but
should be checked, with gun empty, on every gun.
e. To Load and Unload the Magazine.
(1) To load the magazine (fig. 58), press a shell, nose first, into the
rear of the magazine against the magazine spring cup until it slips in
front of and is retained by the spring (left) shell stop. Load another
shell in the same way, pressing it against the base of the first shell loaded
until four in all are loaded. Loading should be done with the breechblock
locked.
(2) To unload the magazine, press in on the spring (left) shell stop,
with breechblock locked, and allow the shells to slip out one by one.
f. To Load and Unload the Gun.
(1) To load a shell from the magazine into the chamber, slide the
safety to the safe position. Then disengage the slide stop and reciprocate
the slide handle (par. 30b). Another shell may then be loaded into
the magazine. Test locking of the breechblock by attempting to retract
the slide handle. The slide handle should not retract. Allow the safety
to remain in the safe position unless gun is to be fired immediately.
(2) To unload the gun, slide safety to safe position as above, and
unload the magazine as explained in paragraph e (2) above. Then dis-
engage the slide stop and retract the slide handle, to extract and eject
the shell in the chamber. Inspect magazine and chamber to make sure
gun is fully unloaded.

31. FUNCTIONING.
a. As already explained, the functioning of the operating mechanism
is accomplished by the reciprocation of the slide handle. The rear end
of the slide bar is engaged with the slide by means of a spring-operated
pin running laterally through slide and bar. As the slide bar is moved
96
TM 9-285
31
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37

4 4

I I
O, 0

J17o4- 0

,o
.a IU

··

o 0i

818074 0-48- 97
TM 9-285
31
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
to the rear it moves the slide with it. The slide moves, for a short distance,
independent of the breechblock, thus allowing the hooked cam lug on
the rear lower face of the breechblock to drop down into a similarly
shaped aperture in the top of the slide (fig. 59). This action unlocks
the breechblock from the top of the receiver. From this point on, the slide
pulls the breechblock with it to the rear. As the slide moves forward
again, it pulls the breechblock with it, and at the end of the forward
movement cams up the rear end of the breechblock in front of the lock-
ing shoulder in the top of the receiver to lock the breechblock to the
receiver (fig. 60).
b. During its rearward movement, the slide cams back the hammer,
mounted in the trigger plate, and releases a shell from the magazine by
cam action on the shell stops. The shell is driven into the receiver by
the force of the magazine spring and is retained in the receiver by the
carrier which has been cammed down by the slide.
c. When the spring (left) shell stop is cammed back on the rearward
movement of the slide so as to release a shell from the magazine, the
positive (right) stop is cammed up so as to engage the following shell.
This movement is reversed as the slide nears the end of its foward move-
ment, the positive stop is cammeil from engagement, and the spring stop
engaged. Thus double feeding is prevented.
d. As the slide is pulled forward by the slide bar, it pulls the breech-
block with it as already explained. The slide cams up the carrier which
lifts the shell in line with the chamber, and the breechblock pushes the
shell into the chamber.
e. As the hammer reaches the extreme rearward position, a lug on the
hammer is caught and held by a hook on the slide stop, and is so held
until the slide nears the forward position and the breechblock has been
cammed up in front of the locking shoulder in the top of the receiver
(fig. 61). At this point, about 1/4 inch from the extreme forward position
of the slide, the slide cams the stop from engagement with the hammer
and the sear immediately engages and retains the hammer in the cocked
position, thus preventing premature firing of the gun.
f. As the slide reaches the extreme forward position, the forward
end of the slide stop, over which it has been riding, springs up behind
it to block any rearward movement of the slide, thus preventing prema-
ture unlocking of the breechblock (fig. 62).
g. The hammer is released to fire the gun by pulling the trigger which
levers the sear from engagement with the sear notch in the hammer.
The sear is integral with the trigger.
98
TM 9-285
31
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37

BREECH BLOCK

, /
-/t

SLIDE RA PD 42368

Figure 59-Breechblock and Slide in Unlocked Position-


Right Side View-Ithaca Shotgun M37

BREECH BLOCK

SLIDE RA PD 42367

Figure 6 0-Breechblock and Slide in Locked Position-


Right Side View-Ithaca Shotgun M37
99
TM 9-285
31
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

I ,

a)
0
L

0 - 'E0e

II.

o cO~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0,
100
*1~~~~~
Io

Wi-_·
vr~~~~~~~~~~

0..
~~~IF ~~~~~~· ~~~~~9" V~~~I-

~~~H~~c~g~~satf~ ~ B
~
w Blsllllls~~~~~P~~lf ~ 0
o ~
Illlli3~~~~~l~e~~j ~ C0

zI 'iI

1000
TM 9-285
31
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37

ioi8 e

Ida W

z1

o E

-i

~o~~~~~
z ~ L1I~~ 0
TM 9-285
32
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
32. REMOVAL OF GROUPS (figs. 53, 63 and 64).
a. Groups and parts should be removed and replaced in the order
given below. Groups and parts when removed should be placed on a
clean, flat surface and care observed to prevent loss of screws and small
parts. Remove as follows:
(1) BARREL AND BAYONET ATTACHMENT.
(a) The bayonet attachment may be removed in a similar manner
to that prescribed for'the Winchester Gun M97 (par. 8 a (1)).
(b) To remove the barrel, disengage slide stop, positioned in forward
left face of trigger plate guard bow, by pressing upward, and pull the
slide handle to the rear. The breechblock must be in the rearward posi-
tion before the barrel can be removed in order to clear the extractors
from the rear of barrel.
(c) Push out the magazine nut pin and using the nut pin as a lever,
turn the magazine nut on the forward end of the magazine counterclock-
wise until the stud on the nut clears the barrel lug with which it is en-
gaged (fig. 65).
(d) Turn barrel 1/4 turn clockwise to disengage the interrupted
threads on the rear end of the barrel from those in the receiver, and pull
the barrel forward out of the receiver (fig. 66). The magazine is screwed
into the receiver at manufacture and should not be removed.
(2) TRIGGER PLATE GROUP. To remove the trigger plate group, the
stock must first be removed. This can be accomplished by removing the
butt plate screws and butt plate and then, using a long shanked screw-
driver, unscrew the stock bolt from hole in butt of stock and pull stock
to rear from the tang on the receiver. The stock bolt has a square head
and if tight, a 3 /s-inch socket wrench may be used to remove it. The
trigger plate can then be removed as follows:
(a) With the hammer in the forward (fired) position, unscrew trigger
plate screw from left rear face of receiver, just above trigger.
(b) Remove screw and pull trigger plate group to the rear out of
receiver.

(3) BREECHBLOCK SLIDE AND CARRIER GROUP. These three assem-


blies should be removed together as follows:
(a) Hold the receiver bottom side up so that magazine faces left;
with the fingernail or small flat instrument, pull the slide pin, visible in
the forward end of the slide, towards the body, at the same time moving
the slide handle forward, until the slide bar is released from the slide.
(b) Unscrew the two carrier screw locking screws, positioned in the
right and left walls of the receiver, and then remove the two carrier
screws.
102
TM 9-285
32
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37

4~~~~~~C
<C~~~~~~~~l

~U~~ a
n ILU
m
z
uD· ca

Zu

Lu a.u
< IL
w-J vr ~~~~~~~~~~
w~~~~~~~~~
L- a-

* Id~~~~~,I
iI

~~~ a~~zF
NJ-I
u~~~~~~L

>~~~~~~
II
I..,

m Lu

I.-

1~~~~~~~03
w~~~~~Ll 0 Z~~~~~~~~
,~~~~o ~~a
u~~~~~~~~~~u
w o~~~~~~~~~~~~.
>~~~~~~

103~~~~~~~
"~~~~~~ ~~

103
TM 9-285
32
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

D~~~~
z

ui< P~Z
V)
~0 I
P~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

- <

-o.~~~~~~~~a

u. I
-- ul~0.

wu~ D~~~~~~~~~~~
Z

0
ui~~~~~~~~~~0 -a0
C

>~~~~~~~
Of 1

o
0o
o 'ii "=
I -0
U~~~~~~~~~~
V)~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~4U

< <5

V) Z~~~~~~~~~~~~

0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Q

~~~~~~~" ~~~~~~~~~SO
U C

I.

CA

0~~~~~~~~~
ct -

104
TM 9-285
32
ITHACA SHOTGUN. 12-GAGE, M37

C4
04E t 0

td t

-J,

' f/ | \|U X
Z/ l . U I .
.lo<

zz z .i : :

U't
'C 2
Z

! S
I
105 E Ct
r~~~~

-a
T. L

105
5 '
TM 9-285
32-33
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(c) Pull the carrier, breechblock, and slide together from the rear of
the receiver.
NOTE: The positive shell stop should be removed from its groove to
prevent loss by pushing inward on pivot stud projecting through right
wall of receiver.

33. REPLACEMENT OF GROUPS.


a. Groups and parts should be thoroughly cleaned, lightly oiled, and
lubricated, if necessary, before replacing. Replace as follows:

(1) BREECHBLOCK, SLIDE AND CARRIER GROUP.


(a) Replace positive shell stop in its groove in inner right wall of
receiver with thin curved end forward. Stop should lie flush in its groove
with the pivot stud flush with outer right face of receiver when assembled.
(b) Hold the breechblock bottom side up, with extractor to left, in
the left hand. Then, place the slide upon the breechblock so that the
hook-shaped aperture in rear of slide mates with hook shaped lug on
rear of breechblock.
(c) Taking carrier in right hand with long points to left and curved
notched end facing up, slide it on to the breechblock from the rear so
that the breechblock lies between the long ends of the carrier with the
slide above it, and the small lug on rear end of slide fits in the notch in
rear end of carrier.
(d) Transfer group to right hand and take receiver in left hand, bot-
tom side up and open end to right. Then, slide group into receiver through
the open end, with the long ends of the carrier pointing into the receiver,
so that the guides on either side of the slide mate with the guideways
in the inner walls of the receiver; push group into receiver until the
slide is checked by rear end of spring (left) shell stop.
(e) Depress forward end of stop and insert small tool under rear end
and pry out slightly from receiver wall, until lug on slide will pass under
stop. Then, push group all the way forward. Do not pry stop out farther
than necessary.
(f) Move carrier to rear until carrier screw holes in carrier and
receiver aline; insert carrier screws and screw in snugly until locking
screw countersinks in head of carrier screws aline with those in receiver.
(Catch threads on both screws before screwing down either screw.)
Then, replace locking screws and draw down snugly and flush. Pin end
of carrier screw must enter carrier before thread on screw will mate with
thread in receiver.
(g) With the slide forward, move the slide handle to the rear until
bar contacts slide pin. Retract pin, visible in bottom of slide, with finger-
106
TM 9-285
33
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37
nail or small flat instrument, and move bar to rear until slide pin engages
hole in rear end of bar and release the pin.
(h) Operate slide handle to test operation of slide and locking of
breechblock.
(2) TRIGGER PLATE GROUP.
(a) With hammer in forward position and slide forward, push the
trigger plate group into lower rear end of receiver, hammer first, so that
guides on plate mate with guideways in receiver walls. With hammer
in forward position, slide stop will not interfere with slide during replace-
ment of trigger plate group. If hammer is cocked, slide stop must be
in disengaged position.
(b) Push plate forward until screw hoies in plate and receiver aline
and replace trigger plate screw from left side of receiver. Screw in snugly
until head of screw is flush with face of receiver.
(c) With trigger plate in position replace the stock by sliding on over
tang on receiver until flush with rear end of receiver and trigger plate.
Then, replace stock bolt and washer and screw down tightly by turning
clockwise. With stock in position, replace butt plate and screw down
snugly. If butt plate screws are screwed down too tightly, screw threads
in stock may strip out or composition butt plate crack.
(3) BARREL AND BAYONET ATTACHMENT.
(a) Disengage slide stop and pull the slide handle fully to the rear,
so that extractor on breechblock will not interfere with barrel during
replacement. Inspect bore of barrel for foreign matter. Insert the
threaded end of the barrel into the barrel aperture in the forward face of
the receiver, with the barrel lug facing to the left (magazine down), and
barrel resting in magazine yoke.
(b) Push barrel as far as it will go into receiver so that the interrupted
threads on barrel and in receiver are in position to mate, then turn barrel
1/4 turn counterclockwise to mate and lock the interrupted threads in
barrel and in receiver.
(c) Push out magazine nut pin, and, using as lever, turn nut clockwise
to mate stud on forward face of magazine nut with hole in barrel lug.
Engage nut snugly with barrel lug, depress pin, and then move slide
handle fully forward.
(d) Disengage slide stop, in forward left face of trigger guard bow, by
pushing upward, and reciprocate slide handle a few times to test assem-
bly for reciprocation of slide and locking and unlocking of breechblock.
Then release stop and push slide handle fully forward to test engagement
of stop with slide.
(e) The bayonet attachment may be replaced in a manner similar to
that prescribed for the Winchester Gun M97 (par. 9 a(6)).
107
TM 9-285
34
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
34. FIELD INSPECTION.
a. With the gun completely assembled, test the mechanism for proper
functioning. Fired shells may often be used for testing where dummy
shells are not available, by turning in the uncrimped end so that the
length of the shell will approximate that of a live shell. Use of live shells
for testing is prohibited.
CAUTION: Be sure gun is fully unloaded before inspection.
b. Operate the gun as follows:
(1) With the breechblock locked and the hammer cocked, press
upward on the lower end of the slide stop, showing at the right side of
the forward end of the trigger plate guard bow. Push slide handle for-
ward slightly; then pull smartly and fully to the rear, and then push
smartly and fully forward. Reciprocate slide handle thus several times
to test smoothness of action.
(2) Retract slide handle as in (1) above, then release slide stop and
push slide handle smartly forward to lock the breechblock. Then attempt
to retract the slide handle. The slide handle should not retract.
(3) Pull the trigger, thus allowing the hammer to move forward to
the fired position and attempt to retract the slide handle. The slide
handle should retract.
(4) Retract the slide handle fully and then push forward until the
breechblock is fully forward but not raised to the locked position. Then
pull the trigger to release the hammer. The trigger should not release the
hammer until the breechblock is seated in front of the locking shoulder
in the receiver.
NOTE: In this gun the breechblock is seated in the locked position
when the slide is still about 1/4 inch from the extreme forward position
and still unblocked by the slide stop. At this point it is possible to release
the hammer but it will strike the rear end of the slide and not the
firing pin and move forward with the slide.
(5) Place two or more dummy or fired shells in the magazine and
work through the action to test gun for feeding, loading, extraction and
ejection of shells. The second shell should not leave the magazine until
the first shell has been ejected.
NOTE: Fired shells will not work through the action as easily as
live or dummy shells as they are somewhat deformed through being
fired. Therefore allowance should be made for friction and smoothness
of action in positioning the shell.'
(6) With breechblock locked and hammer in cocked position, slide
trigger safety all the way to the right and attempt to pull the trigger to
release the hammer. The trigger should not pull nor the hammer be
released.
108
TM 9-285
34
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37
(7) Slide safety all the way to left .and. attempt to pull the trigger.
The trigger should pull and hammer be released to fire the gun.
CAUTION: A left-hand safety should operate in reverse manner.
Guns found to have left-hand safeties should be turned over to ordnance
personnel to have safeties replaced with right-hand safeties.

c. When gun does not operate. and function smoothly and properly
when tested as above, damaged or improperly assembled parts are
indicated as follows:
(1) SLIDE HANDLE STICKS. May be due to bent slide bar, bent or
broken slide pin, or missing slide pin check pin.
(2) BREECHBLOCK DOES NOT LOCK. May be due to foreign matter
on face of breechblock, on locking shoulder in top of receiver or extrac-
tor grooves in receiver or rear of barrel, or burs on locking lugs of breech-
block, or slide.
(3) HAMMER DOES NOT COCK PROPERLY, OR SLIPS. May be due
to burs or foreign matter in sear notch in hammer or worn or burred
nose of sear, or weak or broken trigger spring, bent slide stop, or broken
hammer bar.
(4) FIRING PIN DOES NOT RETRACT IN BREECHBLOCK. May be due
to broken firing pin or spring, or foreign matter in aperture.
(5) SLIDE STOP DOES NOT FUNCTION. May be due to bent slide
stop, broken or improperly assembled slide stop springs, burred or worn
nose of slide stop or burred or worn stop lug on rear of slide.
NOTE: Slide stop release spring should lie under stud on right side
of stop and rear end bear on stop and hammer bar when assembled.
(6) SHELL IS NOT EXTRACTED OR EJECTED. May be due to worn,
broken or burred extractors, broken extractor springs, or bent or broken
carrier.
(7) Two. SHELLS FED INTO RECEIVER AT ONCE. May be due to
broken, bent, or worn positive shell stop or foreign matter in shel stop
seating groove in receiver.
(8) SHELL STICKS IN MAGAZINE. May be due to corroded ( bent
magazine spring cup, dented tube, broken or kinked spring, or eign
matter in tube.
(9) SAFETY STICKS. May be due to burred safety or trigger x._., or
broken safety catch spring.

d. Inspect barrel and test trigger pull as prescribed in paragraph 3 n.

e. In addition to inspection of the gun for operation and functioning,


the gun should be inspected generally for condition, and defects noted.
Attention should be directed to such defects as cracked wooden parts,
109
TM 9-285
34-35
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
cracked or deformed metal parts, dented magazine tube, loose screws
or pins, loose or binding parts or assemblies, loose barrel or magazine,
loose stock or butt plate, rust, dents, burs or excessive wear of parts.
If defects are such that early malfunction of the gun is indicated, the
gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel for inspection and
correction.
f. Where defects and malfunctions'cannot be remedied by cleaning,
lubrication, and simple adjustments of assembly, which lie within the
scope of using troops, the gun should be turned over to ordnance per-
sonnel for a thorough inspection, correction and/or repair.
g. Removal of burs on working parts, trigger adjustments, and like
corrections should not be attempted by using troops as stoning of parts
must be exacting, the angle of the faces concerned must not be changed,
and volume of metal must not be materially reduced.

h. A loose barrel, which shakes when assembled, may be due to


improper assembly caused by not inserting barrel far enough into re-
ceiver before mating interrupted threads of barrel and receiver, or it
may be due to worn parts necessitating adjustment or replacement of
barrel or receiver. If due to worn parts, the gun should be turned over
to ordnance personnel for correction or repair.
i. If shell appears unnecessarily loose in chamber with breechblock
locked, the gun slhould be turned over to ordnance personnel to be
checked for headspace.
j. Adjustment and maintenance of the gun in the case of using
troops is limited to the removal and replacement of the parts and groups
of parts as outlined in paragraphs 32 and 33, together with cleaning
and such adjustments as are necessary in assembling the gun as outlined.

35. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION.


a. Cleaning, oiling, and lubricating may be accomplished in a manner
similar to that described for the'Winchester Gun M97 (par. 11). Atten-
tion should be given to corresponding parts and surfaces when lubricating.
h. The barrel should be removed from the receiver for cleaning the
bore and for thorough cleaning, the groups should be removed and the
parts and assemblies cleaned, oiled, and lubricated as directed. Gun
should be thoroughly cleaned after each two to three thousand shells are
fired; oftener if necessary. With bayonet attachment assembled to the
gun, the bore should be cleaned from the muzzle end and a rag stuffed
into the receiver to protect the action while cleaning. When it is neces-
sary to remove the groups, the bore may be cleaned from the breech end
(par. 3 i).
110
TM 9-285
35
ITHACA SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M37
c. Points to be lubricated are:
(1) Slide bar opening in forward end of receiver.
(2) Slide bar guideway in receiver.
(3) Carrier screws.
(4) Slide guideways in receiver.
(5) Mainspring cup.
(6) Trigger and hammer pins.
(7) Outer surface of the magazine tube where slide handle tube bears.
d. In very cold climate, oiling and lubricating should be reduced to
a minimum. Only surfaces showing signs of wear should be lightly oiled.
Refer to "Special Maintenance," section XI.

111
TM 9-285
36
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

.Section VI

REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10


Paragraph
Description. ........................................... 36
Data ...... .......................................... 37
Operation.., .......................................... 38
Functioning.......................................... 39
Removal of, groups .................................... 40
Replacement of groups .................................. 41
Field inspection ....................................... 42
Cleaning and lubrication ................................ 43

36. DESCRIPTION.
a. Identification marks on this gun are generally to be found as
follows:
(1) Name of maker on top of barrel near rear end.
(2) Boring of barrel on left side of barrel and serial number of gun
on right side near rear end.
(3) The words "REMINGTON (trade mark)," on left side of action
slide bar.
(4) The words "REMINGTON (trade mark) model 10," and serial
number of gun on left side of receiver.
(5) Serial number of gun on right side of trigger guard tang.

b. This gun (figs. 67 and 68) is a manually operated, repeating shot-


gun of the slide action, hammerless, solid-frame and take-down type. The
take-down gun is so constructed that the barrel, magazine and action
bar groups can easily be removed from the receiver by disengaging
interrupted threads in rear end of magazine and barrel from like inter-
rupted threads in the receiver, by which the barrel and magazine are
locked to the receiver. This construction facilitates cleaning and trans-
portation of the gun (par. 3 i).

e. This gun is usually furnished in the standard grade only, having


barrels of different lengths and degrees of boring. Basically, however,
the mechanism of all guns of this make and model are the same. For
convenience herein the guns will be classified as two types: riot and
sporting, although variations of these types may occur.
(1) The riot-type gun (figs. 67 and 68) is usually furnished with a
20-inch plain barrel, bored full cylinder. Some of these guns have a
bayonet attachment and hand guard attached to the muzzle end of the
112
TM 9-285
36
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10

N 0.o 0.

o o
0 §

o
ii C

CO 0

0L
'0
o i

,,,
S S
VI
) |I

) ?

818074
81 O- 48 -

818074 0- 48- 8 113


TM 9-285
36
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
barrel and the magazine, and a leather sling attached to a sling swivel
on the bayonet magazine tube and the stock. If equipped with bayonet
attachment it is solid-frame (par. 3 i).
(2) The sporting-type gun is furnished with a 30-inch barrel, bored
full choke, and is without bayonet attachment or sling.
(3) The M10 is no longer made by Remington, but a number are
still in use in the field.

d. General Description (figs. 69, 70, 77, and 78).


(1) The stock of the gun is fitted to the rear end of the receiver
and bolted to the trigger guard tang, and the barrel and magazine
locked to the forward end of the receiver as already explained in para-
graph b above. The fore end and action bar group is mounted and
operates on the magazine tube. The rear end of the action bar passes
through the forward end of the receiver and engages with, reciprocates,
and cam-operates the breechblock, which in turn engages with and cam-
operates the. carrier.
(2) The magazine which is of the tubular type is positioned beneath
the barrel and has a capacity of five shells loaded end to end. The shells
are pressed together and fed into the receiver by the force of the
magazine spring acting upon the follower. The magazine is locked to the
barrel lug by a lever pivoted in a slot in the magazine plug and held in
position when locked by a spring-loaded detent. The magazine spring is
held in the tube by the magazine plug and follower.
(3) The receiver contains the operating and firing mechanism with
the exception of the trigger, and to its rear end is attached the trigger
guard in which is mounted the trigger, trigger spring, and safety slide.
The receiver is open at the bottom for loading and ejection of shells
and at the rear for passage of the breechblock on its rearward move-
ment. The action bar lock button, which is operated to disengage the
action bar lock and allow the action bar to be retracted, is positioned in
the right wall of the receiver. The carrier stop which supports the rear
end of the carrier is seated in a vertical undercut groove in the rear
inner right wall of the receiver. The ejector spring is seated in an under-
cut groove in the top of the receiver and acts to spring the fired shell
down out of the receiver when extracted from the chamber by the
extractor on the breechblock. The flap of the carrier assists this function
as it is cam-rotated down behind the ejected shell.
(4) The forward end of the carrier (fig. 71) is seated in a blind hole
in the right forward, inner face of the receiver and held firm by a spiral
friction spring also seated in the hole. The rear end of the carrier pivots
on a pin seated in a hole in the carrier stop positioned in the right inner
wall of the receiver. The rear end of the carrier is formed into a cam lug
114
TM 9-285
36
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10

D~~~~
u ~~~~~~~~a-6
0-

5 _1~~~~~~~~~~~
z

_J

z
-J~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~L
wr -J~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~L

z 0
o

.' ,

u
z
l ii -i u.i f
9,
z C
< i LY
_ IA

N~~~~~~

Lu ~ ~ L
oE
< 1 0 0

i~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
w U ~~~~aE

w / <
z~~~
u 16
/ N

ui~i go

0 4m

U~~~~~

-J~~~~~~~~~~L
Lu11 115o
TM 9-285
36
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

o .

00

I
uZ e.
ZI-

.S
i t of '.
c LLUU

O< < . O
uL

u o 0 u

S' r-
z <
< I-

z U 1
TM 9-285
36
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10
which seats in a camming aperture in the right forward face of the
breechblock and by which the breechblock cam-rotates the carrier in a
line parallel to the bore. A curved spring and collar on the forward end
of the carrier acts as a shell retainer to block and release the shells
from the magazine when the carrier is rotated, and a rectangular flap
on the carrier acts to raise the shell to bore line when released from
the magazine to enter the receiver. A small triangular cam lug is
riveted to the flap to guide the breechblock to engagement with the
supporting pins, while passing the flap.
(5) The breechblock (fig. 71) is supported on the left side by the
action bar, and on the right side by a guideway in the receiver. The
forward end is supported on either side, when in the locked position, by
a supporting pin positioned in the receiver wall. When locked, the top
of the rear end of the breechblock seats in front of a locking shoulder
cut in the top of the receiver.
(6) The firing mechanism with exception of the trigger is mounted
in the breechblock and is composed of the firing pin, main spring, firing
pin bushing, sear, cocking head, action bar lock, and extractor, together
with their springs and components. In some guns of late manufacture,
there is a breechblock latch pivoted in the lower rear left face of the
breechblock which holds the breechblock in the locked position until
disengaged by the rearward movement of the cocking head. In other
guns the breechblock is'held by the action bar only, which in turn is
blocked by the action bar lock. The firing pin is housed in a longitudinal
aperture in the breechblock, the rear end passing through the firing pin
bushing pinned in the breechblock. The mainspring is compressed be-
tween a shoulder on the forward end of the firing pin and the firing pin
bushing, and functions the firing pin. The cocking head slides in grooves
in the rear end of the breechblock and is connected to, and retracts the
firing pin. The cocking head is moved to the rear by a lug on the rear
end of the action bar, bearing upon its forward face, as the action bar is
moved rearward. The action bar unlocks, reciprocates and locks the
breechblock by means of the lug referred to above, which seats in a
camming groove in the left side of the breechblock. When moved rear-
ward, the cocking head is caught and retained by the sear, also mounted
in the rear end of the breechblock until the sear is levered from engage-
ment by retraction of the trigger.
(7) The action bar lock is pivoted in the rear end of the breechblock.
The L-shaped forward end passes laterally through the breechblock, and
a spring-loaded shoe on the rear end bears upon the cocking head when
in the rearward position. The lock is put under spring tension by bearing
upon the cocking head when in the rearward (cocked) position, and the
right wall of the receiver. When the breechblock is locked in the forward
117
TM 9-285
36
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Up I

cnU U C

z z 5 <
I I< 0

S
00

a j x~s
; >E/ E

u lit

"'.

<' < <z ~-~~ m~


'~ ,, ~-~
cr

X
x xg
< IJ
- z
d Z

_J Z
TM 9-285
36-37
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10
position, the forward end of the lock springs into a notch in the action
bar cam lug and thus prevents retraction of the bar until released. The
lock is disengaged either by the forward movement of the cocking head
releasing the spring pressure, or by manual pressure on the spring-
loaded lock button extending through the right wall of the receiver.

GUARD TANG
GUARD PIN HOLE

TRIGGER PIN
W,~-7

\~ SAFETY SLIDE PIN

_--GUARD BOW
SAFETY SLIDE

RA PD 49748

Figure 72-Trigger Guard Group-Left Side View-Remington


Shotgun MI10

(8) The extractor is of the claw type, positioned in the top of the
forward end of the breechblock and actuated by a leaf spring.
(9) The safety slide is positioned in the forward end of the trigger
guard bow (fig. 72) and operates longitudinally to block and release the
trigger for retraction.

37. DATA.
Gage of bore ..................................... :......12
Boring of barrel-riot type ............................ ..Cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting trap type ..................... Full choke
Type of action ........................................... Slide
Type of firing mechanism ........................... Hammerless
Type of magazine ...................................... Tubular
Capacity of magazine ................................... 5 shells
Length of barrel-riot type ................................ 20 in.
119
TM 9-285
37-38
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
Length of barrel-sporting trap type ........................ 30 in.
Length of stock and receiver (approx.) ....................... 20 in.
Length of assembled gun-riot type (approx.) .............. 391/2 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ..... 491/2 in.
Weight of assembled gun-riot type-without bayonet attach-
ment (approx.) ................................... .71/2 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ......... lb

38. OPERATION.
a. The gun is operated by moving the fore end smartly and fully
backward and forward. This action unlocks the breechblock, extracts
and ejects the fired shell, cocks the cocking head which is attached to the
firing pin, transfers a live shell from the magazine to the chamber of
the barrel, and relocks the breechblock behind the shell.
CAUTION: During operation, the muzzle of the gun should always be
pointed at a safe spot.
b. Before the action slide can be retracted, the action bar lock must
be disengaged from the action bar. If the gun has been fired and the
cocking head consequently in the forward position, the only movement
necessary is to reciprocate the fore end as above, as the forward move-
ment of the cocking head and subsequent spring action of the action bar
lock button has disengaged the action bar lock from the action bar. If,
however, the cocking head is in the rearward (cocked) position, it is
necessary to depress the action bar lock button protruding through the
right wall of the receiver to disengage the lock before retracting the fore
end (fig. 73).
CAUTION: During these operations, the finger should remain outside
the trigger guard bow. Reciprocation of the fore end should be full and
smart to insure extraction of the shell, cocking of the cocking head, and
complete locking of the breechblock and engagement of the action bar
lock. Slamming of the mechanism, however, should be avoided. When
the gun is being fired-as a repeater, all pressure should be removed from
the trigger while operating.
c. With the gun loaded, locked, and cocked the only movement neces-
sary to fire the gun is to pull the trigger.
d. The trigger safety slide positioned in the forward end of the trigger
guard bow operates longitudinally (figs. 75 and 76). When pushed to
the rear, the trigger is blocked and cannot be pulled to fire the gun.
When pushed forward, the trigger is free to be pulled and the gun fired.
With a shell in the chamber, it is best to block the trigger by pushing
the safety slide to the rear, unless the gun is to be fired immediately. In
this gun the safety slide is easily pushed forward with the finger inside
the trigger guard bow when the gun is mounted to the shoulder to fire.
120
TM 9-285
38
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10

X d
[ E o
-e

0
4 4. F ta

I ..

0 2

o 0

0 a'
TM 9-285
38-39
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
e. To Load and Unload the Magazine.
(1) To load the magazine (fig. 74), press a shell, nose first, into the
rear of the magazine against the magazine follower until it slips in front
of and is retained by the curved spring on the forward end of the carrier.
Load another shell in the same way until five in all are loaded. Loading
should be done with the breechblock locked.
(2) To unload the magazine, push the safety slide to the rear to lock
the trigger, depress the action bar lock button to release the action bar,
and reciprocate the fore end until all the shells in the magazine are
ejected. Then, with breechblock retracted, inspect chamber and magazine
to make sure the gun is fully unloaded.
f. To Load and Unload the Gun.
(1) To load a shell from the magazine into the chamber of the
barrel, push the safety slide to the rear to block the trigger, depress the
action bar lock button to disengage the lock from the action bar, and
reciprocate the fore end. Another shell may then be loaded into the
magazine. Test breechblock for locking by attempting to retract the fore
end. The fore end should not retract.
(2) To unload the gun, proceed as in unloading the magazine as
explained-in e (2) above.
g. To Load the Chamber Only. To load the chamber only, push
the safety slide to the rear to lock the trigger. Load one shell into the
magazine and then reciprocate the fore end as explained above. Another
method is to retract the fore end, and with breechblock thus-in the rear-
ward position, insert a shell horizontally with nose forward, up into the
receiver through the ejection opening. Then push shell forward into
the chamber until retained by the ejector spring, and lock the breech-
block by pushing the fore end all the way forward. Test locking of
breechblock as in f (1) above.

39. FUNCTIONING.
a. As already explained, the functioning of the operating mechanism
is accomplished by the reciprocation of the action bar by means of the
fore end. A cam lug on the rear end of the action bar seats in an irregular
camming aperture in the left side of the breechblock and as the bar is
removed rearward, the rear end of the breechblock is cammed down from
in front of the locking shoulder in the top of the receiver and the breech-
block moved to the rear. As the action bar is moved forward by means
of the fore end, the breechblock is moved forward and the rear end
cammed up in front of the locking shoulder, at the end of the forward
movement.
b. As the action bar moves to the rear in the camming groove of
122
TM 9-285
39
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10

Cao

i; ( v A Q

, (m) 0 4

lI I

_I u,

123 0I- S~~~~~~~~~~


0,
.s x~~~~~~~~~~~l

123~
~ ~ ~
TM 9-285
39
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
the breechblock, the lug on the rear end of the bar strikes the cocking
head, positioned in the rear end of the breechblock, and pushes it to
the rear against the force of the main spring until caught and held by
the sear which is also positioned in the rear end of the breechblock. The
cocking head is attached to the firing pin and thus pulls it to the rear.
The action bar then continues to push the breechblock to the rear to the
end of the rearward movement.
c. The carrier is positioned longitudinally in the right side of the
receiver. The forward end seated in a blind hole in the forward end of
the receiver, and the rear end in a seat in the carrier stop as already
explained. The cam on the extreme rear end of the carrier seats in a
camming groove in the right side of the breechblock. As the breechblock
is moved backward and forward, it cam-rotates the carrier so that the
flap on the carrier moves up and down in the receiver. As the breech-
block nears the end of the rearward movement, it rotates the flap of the
carrier down to a position below the rear end of the magazine. As the
carrier rotates down, the curved shell retaining spring on the forward
end, which has been holding the rearmost shell in the magazine, moves
from engagement with the base of the shell and the shell thus released,
is forced out of the magazine into the receiver by the force of the maga-
zine spring. As the retaining spring rotates from engagement with the
rearmost shell, a small collar on the carrier, just forward of the spring,
rotates down into position to intercept the following shell, thus preventing
double feeding. The released shell moves rearward until its base strikes
the shell stop lug located on the carrier shank to the rear of the flap.
This shell stop lug prevents the shell from striking the breechblock. As
the breechblock moves forward, it rotates the carrier upward and the
carrier lifts the shell to bore line in time for the breechblock to push it
forward into the chamber of the barrel. As the carrier rotates upward,
the retaining spring on the forward end rotates into position to again
block the rearmost shell in the magazine, thereby taking over the func-
tion of the retaining collar which has been holding the shell while the
spring was disengaged from it.
d. The ejector spring is positioned longitudinally in the top of the
receiver to the rear of the chamber of the barrel when assembled. As
the fed shell is lifted to bore line by the carrier, it is pressed against the
ejector spring, and as the breechblock moves forward to chamber the
shell, it in turn presses upon and keeps the spring pressed upward under
tension. As the fired shell is pulled from the chamber by the extractor
on the breechblock when the breechblock is moved rearward, it again
comes under spring pressure of the ejector spring. As soon as the nose
of the shell clears the chamber, the shell is sprung downward out of the
receiver by the spring force of the ejector spring bearing upon it. The
124
TM 9-285
39

REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10


carrier is immediately rotated downward to assist the ejection and clear
the receiver, as the breechblock reaches the end of the rearward move-
ment.
e. The action bar lock is piv,,ted in the rear end of the breechblock
with the long L-shaped forward end of the lock passing laterally through
the breechblock from right to left. A spring-loaded hinged shoe, pivoted
on the rear end of the lock, bears upon the cocking head when in the
rearward (cocked) position. The shoe bearing thus, levers the rear end
of the lock towards the right wall of the receiver and the L-shaped nose
thus is pivoted towards the left wall, through the breechblock, and into
the notch in the action bar lug as the breechblock reaches the locked
position. Thus the bar is locked in position and cannot be retracted to
unlock the breechblock until the bar lock is disengaged. This is accom-
plished, as explained, either by pressing in on the lock button which
extends through the right wall of the receiver or by the forward move-
ment of the cocking head when the gun is fired. The lock button bears
upon the rear end of the lock when the breechblock is in the locked
position and is under spring tension inward, but the spring force of the
lock shoe, when pressing upon the cocking head, is greater than that of
the button and thus holds the lock in place despite the spring force
exerted by the button. When the lock button is manually pressed inward
with a force greater than the opposing force of the lock shoe, it pivots
the forward L-shaped end of the lock from engagement with the action
bar lug. Likewise, when the cocking head moves forward, the pressure
on the lock shoe is released, and the forward end of the lock is levered
out of the slot in the action bar lug by the spring force of the lock button
bearing upon the rear end of the lock, as the spring force exerted by the
shoe, while bearing on the cocking head, no longer opposes the spring
force of the button. The action bar is thus freed to unlock the breech-
block and move it to the rear when the fore end is retracted. This lock-
ing of the action bar prevents premature unlocking of the breechblock.
f. The safety slide operates longitudinally in the forward end of the
trigger guard bow, and is held in position by a spring-loaded steel ball,
positioned in the guard bow, seating in notches in the slide. When the
slide is in the rearward position, it blocks the forward end of the trigger
from pivoting downward and thus the trigger from being pulled to lever
the sear from engagement with the cocking head. When the slide is in
the forward position, it no longer blocks the trigger and it can be pulled
to act upon the sear to release the cocking head and thus fire the gun.
g. Some guns of late manufacture have a breechblock latch, pivoted
in the lower left, rear face of the breechblock. The rear end of the latch
is forced out by the cocking head, when in the rearward position; the
forward end is thus forced inward and in this position, the latch is inop-
125
TM 9-285
39-40
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
erative. When the cocking head moves forward, it releases the rear end
of the latch, and the forward end then springs out into the action bar
groove in the receiver and prevents the rear end of the breechblock
from being moved downward from in front of the locking shoulder in
the top of the receiver. When the cocking head is again moved to the
rear by the action bar, it cams the rear end of the latch outward and thus
rotates the forward end inward and out of the action bar groove in the
receiver. The rear end of the breechblock is thus freed to be moved
down and unlocked by the action bar. The latch prevents an unlocked
breechblock in case of a hangfire.

40. REMOVAL OF GROUPS (figs. 69, 70, 77, and 78)..


a. Groups and parts should be removed and replaced in the order
given below. Groups and parts, when removed, should be placed on a
clean, flat surface and care taken to prevent loss of screws and small
parts. Remove as follows:
(1) BARREL, MAGAZINE AND ACTION BAR GROUP (TAKE-DOWN GUN).
(a) With the breechblock locked, press magazine lever detent, posi-
tioned in forward end of magazine lever, down away from the barrel.
At the same time push in on the short knurled surface 'of the detent to
swing the rear end of the lever out of the magazine plug, to a right angle
with the magazine (tube fig. 79).
(b) Then, using lever, turn the magazine 1/4 turn clockwise to disen-
gage it from interrupted threads in receiver, and move it forward as
far as it will go (fig. 80).
(c) Grasp the fore end and move the action bar forward until it clears
the receiver (fig. 81), then turn the barrel 1/4 turn clockwise, to disen-
gage it from interrupted threads in receiver, and group pull from the
receiver (fig. 82).
(2) BUTT STOCK.
(a) Remove the butt plate by unscrewing the two butt plate screws
and lifting butt plate from butt stock. The butt stock must be removed
from the receiver before the breechblock and carrier can be removed.
(b) With a long-shanked screwdriver inserted in the stock bolt aper-
ture now visible in butt stock, unscrew the butt stock bolt by turning
counterclockwise until free from the trigger guard tang.
(c) Pull the butt stock to the rear from the trigger guard and receiver.
(3) TRIGGER GUARD GROUP.
(a) With breechblock forward, unscrew tang screw check screw from
rear top of receiver and then remove the tang screw from the receiver.
126
TM 9-285
40
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10

V)

< a-
(n~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C I..

M~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~ 0

z Z a
8

u ~ ~ ~ o<~~~~~
U ~o
LL Y c6
M~~~~~~~~

z
Z -a
0
Z 0

lC

ct a~~~~~~~~~
i~~~urcr ~U j
!~~~~~~~~
u_
g ~ ~ ~~o·
<~~~~~~~~~~ :- M
0
w~
cZ~~~~~~~ -

> LL L9
k.

w I

i<li< M c4:
w
<

2 B~glr~127
12
127~~~~~~~~~~1
TM 9-285
40
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
z
w O

)-c VD

> Z

0
9| ZZ
I

U o

l A
BYY a

u Ldm~~~~~ ~u 0
B

-a w~~~~~~~ Z Qr O ~-
o0
- ~~ ~J.

co.o 2

128
TM 9-285
40-41
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10
(b) Unscrew the guard screw check screw from rear right face of
receiver and remove the guard screw from the receiver.
(c) Slide the guard to the rear from the receiver.
(4) BREECHBLOCK AND CARRIER GROUP.
(a) Turn the receiver so that the bottom opening is uppermost and
the tang of the receiver points to the right. The receiver will be consid-
ered as resting in this position until the group is removed.
(b) Press carrier slightly forward (left) and slide the carrier stop
upward and remove it from its T-slot in the right inner, rear wall of
the receiver. This releases the rear end of the carrier assembly.
(c) Depress the action bar lock button projecting from the right
side of the receiver to release the action bar, and with the button
depressed, insert the blade of a screwdriver beneath the rear end of the
breechblock and pry up the breechblock firmly (do not force) until it
starts to rise, then move it with the fingers.
NOTE: If the cocking head is forward, pry up on the breechblock
without pressing action bar lock button as action bar lock will be dis-
engaged. However, in guns which have the breechblock latch assembled
to the lower rear, left side of the breechblock, the latch must be released
by prying -the rear end of the latch towards the receiver before the
breechblock can be unlocked. If cocking head is to rear (cocked posi-
tion), this is not necessary but in this case the lock button must be
pressed as above.
(d) As the rear end of the breechblock is raised clear of the locking
shoulder in the top of the receiver, start moving it to the rear of the'
receiver by pushing on the face of the breechblock through the barrel
opening in the receiver. Press action bar lock shoe, at rear end of breech-
block, towards the right wall of receiver to clear lock from carrier stop
groove in right wall of receiver as breechblock starts out of receiver.
When the breechblock has moved to the rear sufficiently to cam the
carrier flap to its horizontal position, grasp the carrier and pull to the
rear from its seat in the forward end of the receiver. Then, grasp breech-
block and carrier together and pull to the rear out of the receiver, rotating
the carrier slightly downward (towards top of receiver) in progress.
Do not force. The carrier friction spring seated in the carrier seat in the
receiver should be removed to prevent loss, by pulling out of seat. The
action bar lock button in right side of receiver and ejector spring in top
of receiver should not be removed. Exercise care not to bend ejector
spring as proper feeding and ejection of the shell depends upon the flexi-
bility and position of the spring.

41. REPLACEMENT OF GROUPS.


a. Groups and parts should be thoroughly cleaned, lightly oiled, and
818074 0- 48- 9 129
TM 9-285
41
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
lubricated, if necessary, before replacing. Replace as follows:
(1) BREECHBLOCK AND CARRIER GROUP.
(a) Before the breechblock and carrier are replaced in the receiver,
the carrier friction spring should be replaced in its blind hole in right
forward, inside face of the receiver and the ejector spring checked to
see that it is all the way to the rear in its seat.
(b) Turn the receiver bottom side up with the barrel opening to the
left. Then, place the carrier in its groove in the right wall of the receiver
with cam to rear and flap roughly horizontal. Allow the carrier cam to
project about an inch outside the receiver, and hold with the left hand.
(c) Grasp breechblock so that extractor is down and pointed to left
and mate the carrier cam with the camming aperture in the right face
of the breechblock, keeping the flap of the carrier roughly horizontal.
(d) Start the breechblock slowly into its guide grooves in the re-
ceiver and move both carrier and breechblock slowly forward (to left),
with the carrier flap still horizontal, until the forward end of the carrier
is near its seat in the forward end of the receiver.
(e) Slide the carrier forward into its seat and pressing breechblock
flat on the tang, slide the breechblock forward gently until it moves
down to the locked position, allowing the flap of the carrier to rotate
downward towards top of receiver. Do not force.
(f) Secure the carrier by means of the carrier stop, inserted vertically
with pin forward and down into its T-slot in the inner wall of the
receiver. With a screwdriver, push forward on the carrier cam to allow
the pin on the stop to seat properly in its recess in the carrier cam.
(2) TRIGGER GUARD GROUP.
(a) With the receiver still upside down, slide the guard onto the rear
of the receiver so that it mates with the grooves in lower rear face
of the receiver and with the tang, and the tang and guard screw holes
in guard and receiver are in alinement.
(b) Turn receiver and replace tang screw and turn in part way. Then
replace guard screw from right side, catch threads, and turn until check
screw cut is in position; then replace check screw. Then turn tang screw
in tightly, aline check screw cut, and replace check screw.
(3) BUTT STOCK.
(a) Slide the butt stock onto the trigger guard tang and receiver
until it mates evenly and flush.
(b) Insert stock bolt and washer into bolt aperture in butt stock,
catch threads and screw down tightly.
(c) Replace butt plate and screw on snugly. Do not force screws, as
composition plate may crack or wood screw threads strip out.
130
TM 9-285
41
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10

< y> Z / o
<>F .E sp ' Z, . | w

n,._

u-
-
w

~JQ a
00
131m~

0 O
0
E .5

r L ~~~~~~~~

131 ·
TM 9-285
41
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

/. -

-j 0'
0S-
.t
1l'110
Zck.
CP 1 321
1 .. C if~~~
mo~~~~~~~~~

/1.t '2 o
om
Z.°.a'. XA ,
TM 9-285
41-42
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10
(4) BARREL, MAGAZINE AND ACTION BAR GROUP.
(a) Move breechblock forward to locked position.
(b) Inspect bore of barrel for foreign matter, and then slide action
bar fully forward to clear the rear face of the barrel yoke.
(c) Holding group with magazine facing to left, insert the threaded
end of the barrel into the barrel opening in the receiver as far as it
will go. Then turn the group counterclockwise 1/4 turn until the barrel
yoke is stopped by the yoke stop screw projecting from the right side
of the forward face of the receiver. (The flat spot on the left side of the
extreme rear end of the barrel is for the purpose of camming up the
extractor when the barrel is pushed into the receiver. This flat should
be up, in line with extractor, when inserting the barrel. The cut in
the top of extreme rear end of the barrel is for the purpose of furnishing
clearance for the extractor when barrel is assembled).
(d) Slide the action bar into the receiver to engage with the breech-
block. Depress action bar lock button and move action bar and breech-
block all the way to the rear. Then with magazine lever vertically in
line with barrel and receiver, slide the magazine into the receiver as far
as it will go and, using lever, turn magazine 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
Then rotate lever into magazine plug until retained by detent.
(e) Test the assembly by reciprocating the action bar several times
with the action bar lock button depressed. Then, test for locking of
breechblock by removing pressure from the lock button and pushing
fore end all the way forward to lock the breechblock.

42. FIELD INSPECTION.


a. With the gun completely assembled, test the mechanism for proper
functioning. Fired shells may often be used for testing, where dummy
shells are not available, by turning in the uncrimped end so that the
length of the shell approximates that of the live shell. Use of live shells
for testing is prohibited.
CAUTION: Be sure gun is fully unloaded before inspection.
b. Operate the Gun as Follows:
(1) With the breechblock locked and the cocking head cocked, de-
press the action bar lock button protruding through the right wall of
the receiver. Pull fore end smartly and fully to the rear and then push
smartly and fully forward. Reciprocate fore end thus several times to
test smoothness of action.
(2) Retract fore end as in (1) above, then release action bar lock
button and push fore end smartly and fully forward to lock the breech-
block. Then attempt to retract the fore end. The fore end should not
retract.
133
TM 9-285
42
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(3) Pull the trigger thus allowing the cocking head to move forward
to the fired position and attempt to retract the fore end. The fore end
should retract.
(4) Retract the fore end fully and then push forward until the breech-
block is fully forward but not raised to the locked position. Then pull
the trigger to release the cocking head. The trigger should not release
the cocking head until the breechblock is fully locked. (The trigger should
not contact the sear until the breechblock is locked).
(5) Place two or more dummy or fired shells in the magazine and
work through the action to test gun for feeding, loading, extraction and
ejection of shells. The second shell should not leave the magazine until
the first shell has been ejected.
NOTE: Fired shells will not work through the action as easily as live
or dummy shells as they are somewhat deformed through being fired.
Therefore, allowance should be made for friction and smoothness of
action in positioning the shell.
(6) With the breechblock locked and the cocking head in the cocked
position, push the safety slide all the way to the rear and attempt to
pull the trigger. The trigger should not pull.
(7) Push the safety slide all the way forward and attempt to pull
the trigger. The trigger should pull and the cocking head be released
to fire the gun.
c. When gun does not operate and function smoothly and properly
when tested as above, damaged or improperly assembled parts are indi-
cated as follows:
(1) ACTION BAR STICKS. May be due to bent action bar, burred or
broken cam lug on bar or foreign matter in breechblock camming aper-
ture, dented magazine tube or damaged action bar lock.
(2) BREECHBLOCK DOES NOT LOCK. May be due to worn or broken
action bar cam lug, broken or missing breechblock supporting pins in
receiver, foreign matter on face of breechblock, or in extractor cut or
in front of locking shoulder in receiver.
(3) BREECHBLOCK DOES NOT UNLOCK. May be due to worn or broken
action bar lug, broken or missing breechblock supporting pins, damaged
action bar lock or breechblock latch, or foreign matter in mechanism.
(4) COCKING HEAD DOES NOT COCK PROPERLY OR SLIPS. May be
due to worn or broken cam lug on action bar, worn sear nose, broken
sear or sear spring, bent trigger, broken main spring, or foreign matter
in mechanism.
(5) COCKING HEAD DOES NOT RELEASE WHEN TRIGGER IS PULLED.
134
TM 9-285
42
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M10
May be due to bent trigger, broken firing pin or main spring, damaged
sear, or foreign matter in mechanism.
(6) ACTION BAR DOES NOT FUNCTION. May be due to broken action
bar or cam lug, broken action bar lock or cocking head.
(7) ACTION BAR LOCK DOES NOT FUNCTION. May be due to broken
action bar lock, broken or missing lock shoe spring, broken button spring
or spring retainer, or foreign matter in mechanism.
(8) CARRIER DOES, NOT FUNCTION. May be due to broken carrier,
missing carrier friction spring, burred or worn cam on rear of carrier,
damaged carrier stop, or foreign matter in mechanism.
(9) SHELL Is NOT EXTRACTED OR EJECTED. May be due to worn or
broken extractor, broken extractor spring, or bent or broken ejector
spring. If ejector spring is bent or too weak, it will not function properly.
(10) Two SHELLS FED INTO RECEIVER AT ONCE. May be due to
bent or broken carrier shell retainer spring, worn shell retainer collar,
or worn cam on rear of carrier.
(11) SHELL STICKS IN MAGAZINE. May be due to corroded or bent
follower, kinked or broken magazine spring, or dents, foreign matter or
rust in magazine tube.
(12) SHELLS Do NOT CHAMBER PROPERLY. May be due to damaged
carrier, as above, or stiff or bent ejector spring. The latter defect is
usually the cause.
(13) SAFETY SLIDE DOES NOT FUNCTION. May be due to burs on
slide, broken slide spring, or foreign matter in mechanism.

d. Inspect barrel and test trigger pull (par. 3 n).

e. In addition to inspection of the gun for operation and functioning,


the gun should be inspected generally for condition, and defects noted.
Attention should be directed to such defects as cracked wooden parts,
cracked or deformed metal parts, dented magazine tube, loose screws
and pins, loose or binding parts or assemblies, loose barrel or magazine,
loose stock or butt plate, rust, dents, burs, or excessive wear of parts.
If defects are such that early malfunction of the gun is indicated, the
gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel for inspection and
correction.

f. Where defects and malfunctions cannot be remedied by cleaning,


lubrication, and simple adjustments of assembly, which lie within the
scope of using troops, the gun should be turned over to ordnance per-
sonnel for a thorough inspection, correction and/or repair.

g. Removal of burs on working parts, trigger adjustments, and like


corrections should not be attempted by using troops as stoning of parts
135
TM 9-285
42-43
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
must be exacting, the angle of the faces concerned must not be changed,
and volume of metal must not be materially reduced.
h. A loose barrel, which shakes when assembled, may be due to im-
proper assembly caused by not inserting barrel far enough into receiver
before mating interrupted threads of barrel and receiver, or it may be
due to worn parts necessitating adjustment or replacement. If due to
latter cause, gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel for cor-
rection or repair.
i. If shell appears unnecessarily loose in chamber with breechblock
locked, the guns should be turned over to ordnance personnel to be
checked for headspace.
j. Adjustment and maintenance of the gun in the case of using
troops is limited to the removal and replacement of the parts and groups
of parts (pars. 40 and 41), together with cleaning, lubrication, and such
adjustments as are necessary in assembling the gun as outlined.

43. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION.


a. Cleaning, oiling, and lubrication of this gun may be accomplished
in a manner similar to that prescribed for the Winchester Gun M97
(par. 11). Attention should be given to corresponding parts and sur-
faces when lubricating. Barrel magazine and fore end group should be
removed from receiver of take-down gun when cleaning the bore. With
bayonet attachment assembled to the gun, the bore should be cleaned
from the muzzle end, and a rag stuffed into the receiver to protect the
action while cleaning (par. 3 i).
b. Points to lubricate are:
(1) Action bar opening in forward end of receiver.
(2) Action bar cam lug.
(3) Action bar lock pin, nose of lock, and shoe hinge.
(4) Carrier bearing points.
(5) Cocking head.
(6) Breechblock latch.
(7) Trigger pin.
(8) Safety slide.
(9) Carrier cam aperture in breechblock.
(10) Outer surface of magazine tube where action bar tube bears.
c. In very cold climates, oiling and lubrication should be reduced to
a minimum. Only surfaces showing signs of wear should be lightly oiled.
Refer to "Special Maintenance," section XI.
136
TM 9-285
44

Section VII

REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31


Paragraph
Description ......... .. .........................
..... ...... 44
Data ................................................ 45
Operation ............................................ 46
Functioning ....... 47
Removal of groups .................................... 48
Replacement of groups ................................. 49
Field inspection ....................................... 50
Cleaning and lubrication ................................ 51

44. DESCRIPTION.
a. Identification marks on this gun are generally to be found as
follows:
(1) Name of maker, gage, and chamber length are stamped on the
top of the barrel near the rear end.
(2) Serial number of gun is stamped on the left side of the barrel
near the rear end.
(3) Name of maker, model, and serial number of the gun are
stamped on the left side of the receiver.
b. This gun (figs. 83 and 84) is a manually operated, repeating shot-
gun of the slide-action, hammerless and take-down type. The gun is so
constructed that the barrel can easily be removed by disengaging the
barrel lock, positioned in the magazine plug, from the barrel lug and
unlocking the barrel from the receiver by disengaging interrupted threads
on the rear end of the barrel from like threads in the receiver. This con-
struction facilitates cleaning and transportation.
c. This gun is furnished in various grades having barrels of different
lengths and degrees of boring and other modifiations of design. Basi-
cally, however, the mechanism of all guns of this make and model are
the same, except as indicated herein. For convenience the guns will be
classified as three types: riot, skeet and sporting, although variations of
these types may occur.
NOTE: The Remington Shotgun, Model 31, is manufactured in three
grades: the 31-A (fig.83) (standard), 31 skeet (fig.85) and 31-TC
(trap). The riot gun, described herein, is the 31-A (standard) grade;
and the skeet gun, the 31 skeet grade. In this technical manual the guns
are divided into three types only, as explained, which apply to length
of barrel and boring irrespective of grade (par. 31).
137
TM 9-285
44
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

!a -

(.

* ao i
o1
LwI

·3 8 ,

I I qI'.
TM 9-285
44
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31

0
In

4-

13

139
TM 9-285
44
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(1) The riot-type gun (figs. 83 and 84) is usually furnished with a
20-inch plain barrel, bored full cylinder and may not be eqiupped with
a bayonet attachment
(2) The sporting skeet-type gun (fig. 85) is usually furnished with a
26-inch plain or ribbed barrel, bored improved cylinder, and is without
bayonet attachment or sling.
(3) The sporting-type gun, is similar to the skeet-type gun but is
furnished with a 30-inch barrel, bored full choke, and is without bayonet
attachment or sling.

d. General Description (figs. 86, 93 and 94).


(1) The stock of the gun is' bolted to the rear end of the receiver,
and the barrel locked to the forward end of the receiver by means of
interrupted threads on barrel and in receiver, and fastened to the forward
end of the magazine by means of a lug on the barrel and a stud on the
magazine lock which is assembled to the magazine plug. The magazine
tube is screwed into the receiver at manufacture and locked in position.
The fore end and action bar group is mounted and operated on the
magazine tube. The rear end of the action bar passes through the forward
end of the receiver and engages with and operates the slide which in
turn operates the breechblock and carrier, and cams back and cocks the
hammer. The wooden grip of the fore end is thicker on the 31 skeet
grade of gun (fig. 85) than in the 31-A grade gun (fig. 83) and extends
some distance to the rear of the action bar tube when assembled (par.
50j). The magazine lock of the skeet grade gun is held in engagement
with the barrel lug by spring force while that of the 31-A grade gun
is screwed into engagement.
(2) The receiver contains the operating mechanism and to its lower
rear end is attached the trigger plate to which is mounted the firing
mechanism and the action bar lock. The receiver is open at the bottom
to permit loading and at the right side for ejection of the fired shell cases.
The carrier pivots in the inside of the receiver and acts to raise the shell
to bore line in loading. The right and left shell stops pivot in the forward
end of the receiver to the rear of the magazine opening. The ejector is
seated in a T-slot in the left wall of the receiver.
(3) The breechblock contains the right and left extractors, the firing
pin, and their components and mates with and is operated by the slide
by means of a hooked lug on the rear lower face of the breechblock
seating in a like aperture in the top of the slide. When cammed up by
the slide on the forward movement, the top rear end of the breechblock
seats in front of a locking shoulder cut in the top of the receiver to lock
the breechblock in position. A rib staked in the top of the receiver acts
140
TM 9-285
44

REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31

iA -
:d,~~~ ca~
_ Q -8
<
8'
~ ~'
I-u w
~'
e
z

14, 1 0
0

c~ ~- I I I In

14,w 0

141
TM 9-285
44
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
as a guide for the breechblock to hold it in central alinement in the
receiver while opposite the ejection opening.
(4) The slide is engaged with the rear end of the action bar by means
of a lug on the bar seating in a mating notch in the left side of the slide.
The slide operates in guideways cut in the side walls of the receiver.
(5) The trigger plate (figs. 91 and 92) contains the trigger and
integral sear, hammer, mainspring, action bar lock and the safety, together
with their components. In the left side of the trigger plate is the left
shell stop spring plunger which furnishes spring action to the stop.
NOTE: The trigger plate group of the 31-A grade gun (figs. 83 and
84) and the 31 skeet grade gun (fig. 85) are different in design. The
main difference is in the action bar lock. In the 31-A grade gun the lock
is operated by a torsion spring seated in the lock and bearing on a lug
on the hammer, while in the 31 skeet grade gun, it is operated by the
mainspring follower which keys with the action bar lock spring housing
seated in the lock. (The riot-type gun (figs. 83 and 84), is a 31-A grade
gun, and the skeet-type gun (fig. 85) is a skeet grade gun.)
(6) The magazine, which is of the tubular type, is screwed into the
receiver below the barrel and has a capacity of four shells loaded end to
end. The shells are pressed together and fed into the receiver by the
force of the magazine spring acting upon the magazine follower. Some
grades of this gun are furnished in a three-shot model. In the three-shot
model the magazine holds only two shells.
(7) The left-hand and right-hand shell stops are pivoted in the lower
inner walls of the receiver. The left-hand stop is operated by the action
bar, while the right-hand stop is operated by the slide to block and release
the shells in the magazine.
(8) The action bar lock is pivoted in the trigger plate (figs. 91 and
92) and engages with the slide to block its rearward movement after it
has locked the breechblock in position, thereby preventing premature
unlocking of the breechblock. The lock is disengaged from the slide either
by the action of the mainspring follower which moves forward with the
hammer when the gun is fired (skeet grade), or by manual pressure on
the lower end of the lock which projects through the floor of the trigger
plate at the right forward end of the trigger plate guard bow. (In the
31-A grade gun the lock is disengaged by a lug on the hammer bearing
upon the lock spring, or by manually pressing on the lock). In the rear
of the action bar lock, the trigger lock is pivoted and operated by a
plunger and spring, assembled in the action .bar lock. The trigger lock
blocks the trigger from being pulled until the action bar lock is engaged,
thus preventing premature firing of the gun.
142
TM 9-285
44-46
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31
(9) The trigger safety is positioned in the rear of the trigger plate
guard-bow and can be moved laterally to block and free the trigger, thus
preventing or allowing its pulling to fire the gun.

45. DATA.
Gage of bore ............................................. 12
Boring of barrel-riot type ............................. Cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting skeet type ............. Improved cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting trap type ..................... Full choke
Type of action ........................................... Slide
Type of firing mechanism ........................... Hammerless
Type of magazine ...................................... Tubular
Capacity of magazine (5-shot model) ...................... 4 shells
Capacity of magazine (3 shot model) ...................... 2 shells
Length of barrel-riot type ................................ 20 in.
Length of barrel-sporting skeet type ........................ 26 in.
Length of barrel-sporting trap type ......................... 30 in.
Length of stock, receiver and magazine assembled (approx.) ..... 33 in.
Length of assembled gun-riot type (approx.) ............... 40 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.) ........ 46 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ......... 50 in.
Weight of assembled gun-riot type, A grade (approx.) ........ 67/8 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting skeet type and grade
(approx.) ................................... ....... 7.. lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ........ 73/4 lb

46. OPERATION.
a. The gun is operated by moving the fore end fully and smartly
backward and forward. This action unlocks the breechblock, extracts
and ejects the fired shell casing, cocks the hammer, transfers a live shell
from the magazine to the chamber of the barrel, and relocks the breech-
block behind the shell.
CAUTION: During operation, the muzzle of the gun should always
be pointing at a safe spot.
b. Before the fore end can be retracted the action bar lock must be
disengaged from the slide (fig. 95). To facilitate this the fore end should
be moved slightly forward to allow the lock to disengage. If the gun
has been fired and the hammer consequently forward (down), the only
movement necessary is to reciprocate the fore end as above, as the
descending hammer and consequent forward movement of the main-
spring follower (31 skeet grade) or hammer lug (31-A grade) has
already disengaged the lock. If, however, the hammer is in the cocked
position, it is necessary to press back on the lower end of the lock, which
143
TM 9-285
46
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Ao

· , a

a .

oo
II ~I~~~ ~0 _
a. a
a '

ImI

s; t, o ,.v ' o~~~~~~~


s ,< _~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
g nr m 1 b~~~~~~~~~~

S 1| t 1 E~~~~~~~
0 l | a.
~~~Sb Sb

WI 1

: | | ~~~~~44I
TM 9-285
46
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31
is visible at the right side of the forward end of the trigger plate guard
bow, before moving the slide forward and to the rear. When the gun is
being fired as a repeater, the preliminary forward movement of the fore
end is accomplished by the recoil of the gun away from.the fore end,
which is held by the operator.
CAUTION: During these operations, the finger should remain outside
the trigger plate guard bow. Reciprocation of the fore end should be
full and smart to insure extraction of the shell, cocking of the hammer,
and complete locking of the breechblock and engagement of the action
bar lock. Slamming of the mechanism, however, should be avoided.

c. With the gun loaded, locked, and cocked, the only movement
necessary to fire the gun is the pulling of the trigger. Pressure on the
trigger should be removed while the gun is being operated. The mechan-
ism of this gun is such, however, that the hammer cannot be released
until after the breechblock is locked and pressure on the trigger has been
released and again applied. Thus premature firing is prevented.
d. The trigger safety, positioned in the rear of the trigger plate
guard bow,' operates laterally (fig. 87). When pushed to the left (red
band showing), the trigger is free to be pulled and the gun fired. When
pushed to the right, the trigger is blocked and cannot be pulled nor the
gun fired. With a shell in the chamL,-, it is best to block the trigger
by pushing the safety to the right unless the gun is to be fired immediately.
e. To Load and Unload the Magazine.
(1) To load the magazine (fig. 88), press a shell, nose first, into the
rear end of the magazine against the magazine spring follower until it
slips in front of and is retained by the left-hand shell stop. Load another
shell in the same way by pressing it against the base of the first shell
loaded, until four in all are loaded. Capacity of magazine is four shells
for standard five shot gun, and two shells for three shot model. Loading
should be done with the breechblock locked.
(2) To unload the magazine, press in on the left shell stop (with
breechblock locked) and allow the shells to slip out one by one.
f. To Load and Unload the Gun.
(1) To load a shell from the magazine into the chamber, slide the
safety to the safe position. Then disengage the action bar lock and
reciprocate the fore end (par. 46 b). Another shell may then be loaded
into the magazine. Test locking of the breechblock by attempting to
retract the fore end. The fore end should not retract. Allow safety to
remain in safe position unless gun is to be fired immediately.
(2) To unload the gun, slide the safety to the safe position and unload
the magazine (par. 46 e (2)). Then, disengage the action bar lock and
818074 0 - 48- 10 145
TM 9-285
46-47
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
retract the fore end to extract and eject the shell in the chamber. Inspect
magazine and chamber to make sure gun is fully unloaded.

g. To Load the Chamber Only. With the magazine empty, slide the
safety to safe position, disengage the action bar lock, and retract the
fore end. Then, insert a shell through the ejection opening in the receiver
onto the carrier and push the fore end fully and smartly foreward to
lock the breechblock behind the shell. Test locking of breechblock by
attempting to retract the fore end. The fore end should not retract.
Allow safety to remain in safe position unless gun is to be fired imme-
diately.

47. FUNCTIONING.
a. As already explained, the functioning of the operating mechanism
is accomplished by the reciprocation of the fore end. The rear end of
the action bar is engaged with the slide by means of a lug on the bar
mating with a notch in the slide. As the action bar is moved to the rear,
it pushes the slide with it. The slide moves for a short distance inde-
pendent of the breechblock, camming the rear end of the breechblock
down and thus allowing the hooked cam lug on the lower rear end of
the breechblock to drop down into a similarly shaped aperture in the
top of the slide (fig. 89). This action unlocks the breechblock from the
top of the receiver. From this point on, the slide pulls the breechblock
with it to the rear. The breechblock extracts the fired shell from the
chamber by means of the extractors in its forward end and the shell is
knocked out of the receiver by the ejector positioned in the left side of
the receiver wall. As the slide moves forward again, it pulls the breech-
block with it and at the end of the forward movement cams up the rear
end of the breechblock in front of the locking shoulder in the top of
the receiver to lock the breechblock to the receiver (fig. 90).
b. During the rearward movement, the slide cams back the hammer,
mounted in the trigger plate, and cams down the carrier. At the same
time a shell is released from the magazine by cam action of a shoulder
on the action bar with the left-hand shell stop. The shell is driven into
the receiver by the force of the magazine spring and retained there by
the carrier.
e. When the left-hand shell stop is cammed back by the action bar
to release a shell from the magazine, the right-hand shell stop is cammed
upby the slide to engage the following shell. This movement is reversed
as the slide nears the end of its forward movement and the action bar
allows the left-hand shell stop to resume engagement with the following
shell which the right-hand shell stop has been blocking. Thus double
feeding is prevented.
146
TM 9-285
47
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31

BREECH BLOCK

SLIDE-

Figure 89-Breechblock and Slide-Unlocked Position-


Left Side View-Remington Shotgun M31

BREECH BLOCK

SLIDE RA PD 42390

Figure 90-Breechblock and Slide--Locked Position-


Left Side View-Remington Shotgun MJ1
147
TM 9-285
47
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
d. As the slide is pulled forward by the action bar, it pulls the breech-
block with it, as already explained. The slide cams up the carrier which
lifts the shell in line with the chamber and the breechblock pushes the
shell into the chamber.
e. As the hammer reaches the rearward position, it is caught and
held by the nose of the trigger which acts as a sear. At the same time
the trigger lock functioned by the slide lock engages with and blocks
the trigger preventing its pulling. The trigger remains thus blocked until
the slide has reached the extreme forward position and locked the breech-
block. At this point the action bar lock, over which the slide has been
riding, slips from under the slide and springs up in back of it to block

~HAM~MER SLIDE
·HAMMER

TRIGGER PLATE

ACTION BAR LOCK

RA PD 40522

Figure 91-Slide and Trigger Plate Groups-Slide Riding Over


Lock-Remington Shotgun M31

HAMMER SLIDE

TRIGGER PLATE A /

ACTION BAR LOCK

RA PD 40523

Figure 92-Slide and Trigger Plate Groups-Slide Blocked--


Remington Shotgun M31
148
TM 9-285
47-48
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31
rearward movement of the slide (figs. 91 and 92). As the lock springs
up, it disengages the trigger lock from the trigger, which is now free to
be pulled.
f. The hammer is released to fire the gun by pulling the trigger,
which levers the nose of the trigger, which acts as a sear, down from
engagement with the seer notch in the hammer.

48. REMOVAL OF GROUPS (figs. 86, 93 and 94).


a. Groups and parts should be removed and replaced in the order
given below. Groups and parts when removed should be placed on a
clean, flat surface and care observed to prevent loss of screws and
small parts. Remove as follows:
(1) BARREL.
(a) Press action bar lock located just forward of trigger plate bow,
to release slide by disengaging lock, and pull fore end all the way to the
rear (fig. 95). This disengages extractors from rear end of barrel.
(b) Rest gun oan butt plate with magazine forward. Grasp barrel lock,
located at forward end of magazine, pull down (rearward) until free
of stud and pin on rear face of barrel lug, and hold against spring pres-
sure (fig. 96). In 31-A grade guns the barrel lock is threaded and is
disengaged by turning counterclockwise.
(c) Turn barrel clockwise 1/4 turn and pull from receiver (figs. 97
and 98). The magazine is screwed into the receiver at manufacture and
should not be removed.
(d) Close action by pushing fore end all the way forward.
(2) TRIGGER PLATE GROUP.
(a) Push out trigger plate pin, located just above trigger, from right
to left. Turn gun bottom up and, with breechblock in forward position,
depress action bar lock, located at forward end of the trigger plate bow,
to disengage lock from slide.
(b) With lock disengaged, slide trigger plate forward until right and
left side lugs aline with mating slots in walls of receiver and pull group
upward out of receiver. Then remove right and left shell stops from inner
walls of receiver by pressing inward on pivot studs projecting through
receiver walls near lower edge. Stops will usually shake out.
(3) SLIDE, BREECHBLOCK, AND CARRIER GROUP.
(a) With receiver bottom side up and magazine facing to left, move
action bar rearward by pulling fore end to rear- until rear face of small
lug on rear end of slide is alined with forward edge of trigger plate pin
hole in receiver.
149
TM 9-285
48
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

C4

ud.

" i'e II

nn 0
OU - I/ ;a
0,

..,' _~/,
'0
..
.- V I
LL

O-Y o"

cn

vJ i_ ,

uI E

oz . o
m
LLo

. .

150
TM 9-285
48
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31

o , g I
<o ._
a
< o~~~~~~~.
04
zo .0 br
0 uI
0
0 05a

v "
s u,
r B
r @I~~
V0

a~~~< ),

ua

i I o
oz 3

01

151
TM 9-285
48-49
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(b) Lift slide horizontally to clear action bar lug and move disen-
gaged action bar fully forward.
(c) Move slide slightly forward to disengage hook lug from breech-
block and holding slide up disengaged from breechblock, move breech-
block fully forward to locked position, holding carrier down against
breechblock to keep ejector depressed.
(d) With carrier resting on breechblock, move slide forward until
forward end of guides on side faces of slide are 1/s inch to rear of the
trigger plate lug slots in right and left sides of receiver.
(e) Lift up right side of slide and swing slide up and out sidewise
from receiver. This can be done without effort when slide is properly
positioned and can be removed only when properly positioned. Do
not force.
NOTE: To remove the slide, the forward end of the carrier must be
resting upon the breechblock. In this position, it clears and presses the
ejector into its seating groove. If the carrier slips up from the breech-
block, it cannot be depressed again until the ejector is pressed out of
the way of the carrier arm. This can be accomplished by inserting
a small tool through the ejection opening in the side of the receiver and
to the rear of the breechblock to press the ejector back into its seat, and
thus allow the carrier to be depressed against the breechblock.
(f) Swing forward end of carrier upward out of receiver until carrier
is perpendicular to receiver; then press rear ends together to disengage
trunnions from receiver. Then lift carrier up out of receiver.
(4) Press ejector back into its seat, lift rear end of breechblock to
disengage from locking shoulder in receiver, move to rear and lift from
receiver. Then, remove ejector by pulling outward and forward. If ejector
spring is loose in ejector, it should be removed to guard against loss.

49. REPLACEMENT OF GROUPS.


a. Groups and parts should be thoroughly cleaned, lightly oiled and
lubricated, if necessary, before replacing. Replace as follows:
(1) SLIDE, BREECHBLOCK AND CARRIER GROUPS.
(a) With gun bottom side up and magazine to left, pull action bar
fully forward.
(b) Insert the ejector into its T-shaped seat in the left inner wall of
the receiver. If ejector spring has been disassembled, replace it in its
seat in rear inner face of ejector so that expanded spring coil holds
spring in seat. To seat ejector, insert T-end, with spring towards receiver
wall, into undercut vertical groove in ejector seat and push ejector back
and towards receiver until seated against spring force. Do not lever
ejector in towards receiver until forward end is mating with longitudinal
groove of seat. Ejector should seat easily. Do not force.
152
TM 9-285
49
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31
a00

q. d e

v | J n.I
,,, < < <

m
,;S m _- r E0
E, E

2 .5

9'r V tI

153
TM 9-285
49
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

o 0I

C
C
00 cO

hI< 0
,- E

i s oo 0)
t 3u

1 8 | , u

. I

154
TM 9-285
49
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31
(c) Holding ejector in position, insert breechblock horizontally into
rear of receiver so that rounded face is down toward receiver and extrac-
tors pointing to left. Push breechblock all the way forward to the locked
position to hold ejector in place. Be sure slot in top of breechblock
mates with rib in top of receiver to hold it centrally alined.
(d) Insert forked end of carrier vertically into rear of receiver, with
flat of forward end facing to right (rear), and engage trunnions in their
seats in rear, inner walls of receiver.
(e) Swing forward end of carrier downward until the breechblock
lies between the side arms of the carrier and the forward end of the
carrier is resting on the breechblock. To accomplish this the ejector.
must be depressed so that the carrier arm can clear it.
(f) With flat face of slide up and small lug on rear pointing to right
insert slide at an angle, into receiver, left (far) guide first and down, at a
point where the forward ends of the guides on either side of slide will be
1/s inch to rear of trigger plate lug mating slots in receiver walls.
(g) Mate the left (far) guide with its guideway in the receiver and
then press the right (near) guide down into its guideway. This seating
of the slide is easily accomplished if correctly done. Do not force. If
seating is difficult, manipulate slide by raising left (far) guide slightly
until it slips into its guideway; the right (near) guide will then easily slip
down and into its guideway and the slide will lie flat.
NOTE: To replace the slide, the forward end of the carrier must be
resting upon the breechblock. In this position, it clears and presses the
ejector into its seat. If the carrier slips up from the breechblock, it can-
not be depressed again until the ejector is pressed out of the way of the
carrier arm. This can be accomplished by inserting a small drift through
the ejector opening in the side of the receiver and to the rear of the
breechblock to press the ejector into its seat, and thus allow the carrier to
be pressed down against the breechblock.
(h) With the slide seated in its guideways, move it to the rear until
rear face of small rear lug is in line with forward edge of trigger plate
pin hole. Then raise the rear end of the breechblock to free it from the
locking shoulder in the top of the receiver and move it to right (rear)
under the slide until cam lug on breechblock slips into camming aper-
ture in slide and slide rests flat on breechblock. Slide is easily lifted
when positioned as above.
(i) Depress the forward end of carrier slightly to clear the end of
the action bar and move action bar to rear (right) by means of the
fore end until the lug on rear end of bar strikes the slide. Then lift slide
off breechblock and move action bar to rear until lug on bar slips into
notch in slide. Press slide down to mate with bar lug and breechblock
and holding slide in contact with breechblock, move to forward position
155
TM 9-285
49
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
by moving fore end forward (left). Do not attempt to operate slide
unless held down by finger until trigger plate is in position as it will
jump up and jam in guideway.
(j) Seat right shell stop (longer of two) and left shell stop into their
grooves in the lower inside faces of the receiver walls so that the curved
ends point forward and the pivot studs seat in stud holes in receiver.
Press stops flush with receiver. The trigger plate group can then be
replaced (par. 49 a (2) ).
(2) TRIGGER PLATE GROUP.
(a) With breechblock in the locked position, receiver bottom side up,
and shell stops in place as described in a (1) above, cock hammer and
insert trigger plate horizontally into receiver so that lugs on forward end
of trigger plate fit into lug slots in lower edges of receiver walls. Press
plate down horizontally into receiver, exercising care to hold shell stops
flush with receiver walls while seating plate. When plate is seated, slide
to rear until pin holes in plate and receiver aline. If replaced correctly,
the trigger plate seats easily. Do not force..
(b) With trigger plate seated flush in receiver, pin holes in receiver,
and plate alined, insert trigger plate pin, small end first, into pin hole
in left side of receiver. Push pin through until head is seated flush in
counterbore. The trigger plate pin is spring retained.
(3) BARREL.
(a) Press action bar lock, positioned in forward end of trigger plate
bow, to disengage lock from slide, and move slide part way to rear by
pulling fore end to rear to prevent interference of extractors with barrel
when inserting barrel in receiver. If fore end is pulled all the way to
rear, it will interfere with barrel when seating in receiver.
(b) Rest gun upon butt plate in vertical position with magazine for-
ward and grasp barrel lock. Pull spring-type barrel lock down, and hold
against spring pressure. If barrel lock is of screw type, retract fully by
turning counterclockwise.
(c) Inspect bore for foreign matter and insert threaded end of barrel
into barrel aperture of receiver, with barrel lug pointing to left, until
barrel shoulder is stopped by forward face of receiver, with interrupted
threads in barrel in position to mate with those in receiver.
(d) Turn barrel counterclockwise until threads on barrel and in
receiver engage and barrel lug stops against barrel lock.
(e) Release barrel lock to spring forward, and turn until stud and pin
on barrel lug fully engage with their seats in the lock. If screw-type
lock, turn clockwise until fully engaged.
(f) Close action by pushing fore end fully forward. Operate the gun
to test assembly and locking of breechblock and slide.
156
TM 9-285
so
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31
50. FIELD INSPECTION.
a. With the gun completely assembled, test the mechanism for proper
functioning. Fired shells may often be used for testing where dummy
shells are not available, by turning in the uncrimped end so that the
length of the shell will approximate that of a live shell. Use of live shells
for testing is prohibited.
CAUTION: Be sure gun is fully unloaded before inspection.
b. Operate the Gun as Follows:
(1) With the breechblock locked and the hammer cocked, press back
on the rear end of the action bar lock, positioned in forward end of
trigger plate guard bow. Push fore end forward slightly; then, pull
smartly and fully to the rear and then push smartly and fully forward.
Reciprocate fore end thus several times to test smoothness of action.
(2) Retract fore end as in (1) above; then release action bar lock
and push fore end smartly forward to lock the breechblock. Then at-
tempt to retract the fore end. The fore end should not retract.
(3) Pull the trigger, thus allowing the hammer to move forward to
the fired position and attempt to retract the fore end. The fore end should
retract.
(4) Retract the fore end fully and then push forward until the breech-
block is fully forward but not raised to the locked position. Then pull
the trigger to release the hammer. The trigger should not pull nor release
the hammer until the breechblock is fully locked.
(5) Hold firmly back on the trigger while moving the fore end for-
ward to lock the breechblock. The hammer should not be released to
fire gun even after the breechblock is fully locked until pressure is
released from the trigger and reapplied.
(6) Place two or more dummy or fired shells in the magazine and
work through the action to test gun for feeding, loading, extraction and
ejection of shells. The second shell should not leave the magazine until
the first shell has been ejected from the receiver.
NOTE: Fired shells will not work through the action as easily as live
or dummy shells as they are somewhat deformed through being fired.
Therefore, allowance should be made for friction and smoothness of
action in positioning the shell.
(7) With breechblock locked and hammer in cocked position, slide
trigger safety all the way to the right and attempt to pull the trigger to
release the hammer. The trigger should not pull nor the hammer be
released.
(8) Slide safety all the way to the left (so that red band shows) and
attempt to pull the trigger. The trigger should pull and the hammer be
released to fire the gun.
157
TM 9-285
so
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
c. When gun does not operate and function smoothly and properly
when tested as above, damaged or improperly assembled parts are indi-
cated as follows:
(1) ACTION BAR STICKS. May be due to bent action bar, or burred
lug on rear end of bar.
(2) BREECHBLOCK DOES NOT LOCK. May be due to foreign matter
on face of breechblock, on locking shoulder in top of receiver, or in
extractor grooves in receiver or rear end of barrel, or burs on locking lugs
on breechblock or slide, or foreign matter in lug aperture in slide.
(3) HAMMER DOES NOT COCK PROPERLY OR SLIPS. May be due to
wear or foreign matter in sear notch in hammer or on nose of sear,
improperly assembled or broken trigger spring, improperly assembled
action bar lock, broken or improperly assembled hammer link, or broken
mainspring.
(4) FIRING PIN DOES NOT RETRACT IN BREECHBLOCK. May be due
to broken firing pin spring or firing pin, or foreign matter in aperture.
(5) ACTION BAR LOCK DOES NOT FUNCTION. May be due to bent or
burred action bar lock, broken spring, improperly assembled lock spring
housing (31 skeet grade gun) or mainspring follower, displacement of
hammer link, bent or broken lock spring (31-A grade gun), or burred
or worn nose of lock or contacting lug on rear of slide.
NOTE: Action bar lock spring housing (31 skeet grade gun) operates
in a guideway in right wall of trigger plate. The lock is tilted by the
housing which also slides in a groove in the lock. The housing is func-
tioned by the mainspring follower to which it is keyed (par. 44 d (8)).
(6) SHELL Is NOT EXTRACTED OR EJECTED. May be due to worn,
broken or burred extractors, broken or missing extractor springs, broken
ejector, or broken or missing ejector spring.
(7) Two SHELLS FED INTO RECEIVER AT ONCE. May be due to bent
or broken right shell stop, or foreign matter in shell stop seating grooves
in receiver. If first shell is not retained in magazine, the left shell stop
plunger spring (in trigger plate) may be broken.
(8) SHELL STICKS IN MAGAZINE. May be due to corroded or bent
magazine spring follower, dented tube, broken or kinked spring or cor-
rosion or foreign matter in tube.
(9) TRIGGER SAFETY STICKS. May be due to burred safety or trigger
web, or broken or improperly assembled detent spring or ball.
(10) TRIGGER LOCK DOES NOT FUNCTION. May be due to broken
or missing plunger or spring, or damaged lock.
d. Inspect barrel and test trigger pull (par. 3 n).

e. In addition to inspection of the gun for operation and functioning,


the gun should be inspected generally for condition and defects noted.
Attention should be directed to such defects as cracked wooden parts,
158
TM 9-285
50
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M31
cracked or deformed metal parts, dented magazine tube, loose screws
and pins, loose or binding parts or assemblies, loose barrel or magazine,
loose stock or butt plate, rust, dents, burs, or excessive wear of parts.
If defects are such that early malfunction of the gun is indicated, the
gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel for inspection and
correction.
f. Where defects and malfunctions cannot be remedied by cleaning,
lubrication, and simple adjustments of assembly, which lie within the
scope of using troops, the gun should be turned over to ordnance per-
sonnel for a thorough inspection, correction, and/or repair.
g. Removal of burs on working parts, trigger adjustments, and like
corrections should not be attempted by using troops as stoning of parts
must be exacting, the angle of the faces concerned must not be changed,
and volume of metal must not be materially reduced.
h. A loose barrel, which shakes when assembled, may be due to im-
proper assembly caused by not inserting barrel far enough into receiver
before mating interrupted threads of barrel and receiver, or it may be
due to worn parts necessitating adjustment or replacement with new
parts. If due to worn parts, the gun should be turned over to ordnance
personnel for correction or repair.
i. If shell appears unnecessarily loose in chamber with breechblock
locked, the gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel to be
checked for headspace.
j. The wooden handle of the fore end of the 31 skeet grade gun
extends for some distance to the rear of the action ~bar tube. This por-
tion of the fore end sometimes becomes cracked through interference
with the carrier when operated. If the inner, rear face of the wooden
handle shows signs of having been struck by the carrier, the gun should
be turned over to ordnance personnel for correction in accordance with
instructions contained in TM 1285.
k. The rear end of the wooden handle of the 31-A grade gun, while
considerably shorter than that of the 31 skeet grade, projects about 1/2
inch beyond the action bar tube and tapers to a thin edge which is apt
to crack. If cracking is evident, the gun should be turned over to
ordnance personnel for removal of the overhanging portion of the
handle to prevent further cracking of the handle.
1. Adjustment and maintenance of the gun in the case of using troops
is limited to the removal and replacement of the parts and groups of
parts as outlined in paragraphs 48 and 49, together with cleaning, lubri-
cation, and such adjustments as are necessary in assembling the gun
as outlined.
159
TM 9-285
51
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
51. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION.
a. Cleaning, oiling, and lubrication may be accomplished in a manner
similar to that described for the Winchester Gun M97 as outlined in
paragraph 11. Attention should be given to corresponding parts and
surfaces when lubricating.
b. The barrel should be removed from the receiver for cleaning the
bore, and for thorough cleaning, the groups should be removed and the
parts and assemblies cleaned, oiled, and lubricated as directed.
c. Points to be lubricated are:
(1) Action bar opening in forward end of receiver.
(2) Action bar guideway in receiver.
(3)) Carrier trunnions.
(4) Slide guideways in receiver.
(5) Mainspring follower.
(6) Trigger and hammer pins.
(7) Slide lock spring housing guideway in right wall of trigger plate
(skeet grade gun).
(8) Outer surface of magazine tube where action bar tube bears.
d. In very cold climates, oiling and lubricating should be reduced to
a minimum. Only surfaces showing signs of wear should be lightly oiled.
Refer to "Special Maintenance," section XI.

160
TM 9-285
52

Section VIII

REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, Ml AND SPORTSMAN


Paragraph
Description ......... .. .......................... ... 52
Data ................................ 53
Operation ................................ ........... 54
Functioning ......................................... 55
Removal of groups ..................................... 56
Replacement of groups .................................. 57
Use of friction ring ..................................... 58
Field inspetion ....................................... 59
Cleaning and lubrication ................................ 60

52. DESCRIPTION.
a. Identification marks on these guns are generally to be found as
follows:
(1) Name of maker, gage size, and chamber length are stamped on
the left side of the barrel near the rear end, and the serial number of
the gun on the rear end of the barrel guide.
(2) The words "THE SPORTSMAN" are engraved on the right
face of the breech bolt of this model gun.
(3) The name of maker and serial number of the gun are stamped
on the left side of the receiver.
(4) Serial number of gun is stamped on the left face of the receiver
tang and trigger plate tang.
b. The above guns are practically identical with the exception that
the standard M11 Gun has a magazine capacity of four shells; the
Sportsman Model, a capacity of two shells. The guns will, therefore,
be treated as one gun and the Sportsman described, in this technical
manual, with known differences noted. Any slight differences which
may occur in the models due to slight variation of design or changes
which may occur on account of dates of manufacture must be con-
sidered as such.
c. This gun (figs. 99 and 100) is an autoloading or semiautomatic
shotgun, sometimes referred to in error as an automatic shotgun, of the
take-down design. This gun is recoil-operated; the force, generated by
the expanding powder gas acting against the breech bolt on the recoil
movement together with the force generated by the compressed recoil
and action springs on the counterrecoil movement, operates the mechan-
ism of the gun to load, feed, extract and eject the shell and cock the
hammer. The trigger must be pulled each time to fire the gun.
818074 0 - 48-11 161
TM 9-285
52
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

GE .

E4 E

0S
·C r

aa In E
C

a. 0

16

oa
TM 9-285
52
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, Ml I AND SPORTSMAN
d. The gun is so constructed that the barrel can easily be removed
from the receiver by disengagement of the take-down screw (Sports-
man) or by removal of the magazine cap (Mll1), and pulling fore end
and barrel from the receiver. This construction facilitates cleaning and
transportation.
e. This gun is furnished in various grades with barrels of different
lengths and degrees of boring and may have other modifications of
design. For convenience the guns (both models) will be classified as
three types: riot, sporting skeet, and sporting trap, although variations
of these types may occur.
(1) The riot-type gun is usually furnished with a 20-inch plain
barrel, bored full cylinder. Autoloading type guns are not equipped with
bayonet attachments.
(2) The sporting skeet-type gun (figs. 99 and 100) is usually fur-
nished with a 26-inch plain or ribbed barrel, bored improved cylinder.
(3) The sporting trap-type gun is similar to the skeet-type gun but
is furnished with a 30-inch barrel, bored full choke.
f. General Description (figs. 101, 108, and 109).
(1) The stock of the gun is fastened to the tang of the receiver by
the tang screw passing through the tang of the trigger plate, through
the stock grip, and threaded into the receiver tang. This screw is locked
in place by a locking screw. To the rear end of the stock, a composition
butt plate is fastened by two wood screws.
(2) The barrel has a semi-cylindrical- extension threaded to the rear
end, which slides into the forward end of the receiver and a ring guide
brazed to the barrel tube, which slides over the magazine tube. The
magazine tube is screwed into the receiver at manufacture and posi-
tioned by a stop screw. The recoil spring is mounted on the magazine
tube together with a friction ring, friction piece, and spring. The posi-
tioning of these latter parts determine the amount of resistance (fric-
tion) set up against the force of recoil when the barrel is pulled to the
rear by the breech bolt, when locked to it. The barrel is reciprocated
within the receiver and upon the magazine tube by the breech bolt
which is locked to it during the rearward movement, and again at the
end of the forward movement by means of the locking block passing
through an aperture in the barrel extension. A bead sight is driven into
a ramp pinned and brazed to the muzzle end of the barrel and the
ejector of the gun is riveted in a groove in the rear inner wall of the
barrel extension.
(3) The magazine tube is screwed into the forward end of the
receiver and contains the magazine spring and follower retained by a
plug, screwed and staked into the forward end of the magazine (Sports-
man), or spring retainer (M11).
163
TM 9-285
52
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

/ :iS~~~~~~~~~~~~~~S
U aI:

0 a

I g t~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

0~~~~~
of~~~~r

~" 'x /!.


I I-
> .
aIo
7J_ ,,
&,j!Tn·~ o 0~~~~~~~~~4
U'.
0r
Ulan~
.~iz 6f
; i~~ 4
oE~~

cr ~~~~~1··X o~~~~~~

'a
S
164~~~~~~~~~~~4
0
Sn
u- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~U
·-

14

164
TM 9-285
52
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, MI 1 AND SPORTSMAN

In

o
. ,U z X z o z
. 33 Y Z z
mat z
J*
L °U X
2 o X tL V) I X 3 X j

~z U? Ce R w

<~- ----

I6 ZF co
c UX Zm '
OL- ¢. Z
u uz
-
Z ° u zO0 A.Otte
A. of se

0
z

w U

uu U

165 -- uu

4'f0 M .i Z 0 Q. O , I- >

165
TM 9-285
52
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(4) The fore end slides over the magazine tube and is held in posi-
tion by the take-down screw (Sportsman), or magazine cap (Ml1), and
in turn limits the forward movement of the barrel. The magazine cap
(Mll11) is locked in position by a spring plunger.
(5) The receiver contains the operating mechanism, and to its lower
rear end is fastened the trigger plate to which is mounted the firing
mechanism. The trigger plate is secured by a screw and a pin (with
locking screw M11). The receiver is open at the bottom for loading
and at the right side for ejection of the fired shell cases. To the inner
rear wall of the receiver, a fibre cushion is riveted to cushion the breech
bolt at the end of the rearward movement. The rear of the receiver is
formed into a tang in which is pinned the action spring tube. The tang
and tube extend into the stock when the gun is assembled. The action
spring tube houses the action spring which is stopped from rearward
movement by a wooden stop pinned in the rear end of the tube. The
action spring follower is positioned in the forward end of the action
spring, and against it bears the rear end of the link when assembled.
The action spring forces the breech bolt forward on the counterrecoil
stroke through the medium of the link which is pivoted to the locking
block. The locking block slides radially in the bolt and is held in posi-
tion by the firing pin which passes through bolt and locking block. It
is this hinged construction of the link and locking block that enables
the bolt to reciprocate horizontally while at an angle to the link and
action spring. The vertical movement of the link operates the locking
block latch positioned in the breech bolt, by which the locking block is
blocked or freed to move radially in the bolt, when acted upon by
the link.
(6) The carrier is pivoted in the rear of the receiver on two screws
extending through the walls of the receiver and locked in place by lock-
ing screws. In the rear end of the carrier a dog is pivoted under spring
tension supplied by a spring and plunger, positioned behind it in the
carrier. The carrier is raised by means of the dog which bears on the lower
face of the breech bolt, and lowered by action of the carrier spring, posi-
tioned in the receiver.
(7) The carrier latch is pivoted in a groove in the inner right side
of the receiver, on a slotted pin secured by a stop screw, and is actuated
by a coil spring, positioned between it and the receiver. A button bear-
ing on the latch extends through the right wall of the receiver by which
the latch can be manually disengaged from the carrier to free it.
NOTE: The pin and stop screw are replaced in some guns by a screw.
(8) The shell stop is similarly pivoted and actuated in the left side
of the receiver and acts to check the fed shell from entirely entering
the receiver until the proper time.
166
TM 9-285
52
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, Mll1 AND SPORTSMAN
'(9) The breech bolt (fig. 102) functions in guideways in the inner
walls of the receiver, and houses the firing pin which operates longi-
tudinally through the length of the bolt and the locking block, and is
retracted into the bolt by the firing pin spring. The extractor, positioned
in the forward right face of the bolt, is of the claw type and spring-
actuated. The locking block functions radially in guideways in the
breech bolt and is. positioned by the firing pin which passes through it
and the breech bolt. To the lower rear end of the locking block, the link
is pivoted, by which the block is raised to lock the breech bolt and
barrel together when in the forward position. The firing pin is positioned
by the firing pin stop pin passing laterally through the bolt and a groove
in the firing pin. In the under side of the breech bolt the locking block
latch is pivoted and actuated by a coil spring positioned between the
latch and the bolt. The latch blocks the lower end of the locking block
from forward movement until levered up by the link as the rear end
of the link rises at the end of the forward movement. The operating
slide, by which the breech bolt is manually retracted to load and cock
the gun, is positioned in a groove in the right side of the bolt and recipro-
cates with it when the gun functions. The slide also functions with the
link and carrier dog to unlock the breech bolt and barrel.

(10) The trigger plate group (fig. 103) is composed of the hammer,
trigger, safety sear, mainspring, and trigger safety together with their
components. The hammer is pivoted in the forward end of the trigger
plate and is functioned by the mainspring screwed to the tang of the
trigger plate, and bearing on a roller in the lower end of the hammer.
The mainspring is of the leaf type and is slotted to allow the upper
end of the trigger, which acts as the sear, to protrude through it to
engage the hammer. A lug extends from the upper rear face of the
hammer in which there are two notches, one facing forward and the
other to the rear. The trigger is pivoted in the rear end of the trigger
plate; the lower end extending downward into the guard bow. The upper
end of the trigger is U-shaped; the upper ends of the U, forming hooks
facing towards each other. When in the cocked position, the notched
hammer lug lies between these hooks and is held by one or the other
as explained hereafter. This feature prevents the gun from firing auto-
matically as the trigger must be released and again pulled before the
gun will fire. The safety sear is pivoted on a lug on the trigger plate
directly over the trigger and acts as a block to the trigger during the
functioning of the operating mechanism. The safety sear is spring-
actuated by a spring follower seated in the lug. The trigger safety is in
form of a cylinder positioned in the trigger plate to the rear of the
trigger and operating laterally in the trigger plate to block or free the
trigger for pulling, to fire the gun.

167
TM 9-285
52
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

" E

o _
Z M -

0a
-a.

16BC~ ~C

0to
0.3

o , E

IL

U U.3
z 0

168
TM 9-285
52
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, Ml AND SPORTSMAN

N ' in C

§
ul~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~a a.

I.

Lu <~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~u o

W 2
~"~ ~~~~~~~~~~ In
o 2:
LL V)'

<; .. <
C
0

169~~~~~~~~~~~~4
169CL ~~ ~ ~ (

ZZ O

169
TM 9-285
53-54
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES.
53. DATA.
Gage of bore .............................................. 12
Boring of barrel-riot type .............................. Cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting skeet type ............. Improved cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting trap type ..................... Full choke
Type of action .............. '.................... Semiautomatic
Type of firing mechanism ........... ........ Hammerless
Type of magazine .................. .................. Tubular
Capacity of magazine--M11 ............................. 4 shells
Capacity of magazine-Sportsman ..................... 2 shells
Length of barrel-riot type ................................ 20 in.
Length of barrel-sporting skeet type ....................... 26 in.
Length of barrel-sporting trap type ......................... 30 in.
Length of stock, receiver and fore end assembled (approx.).....313/4 in.
Length of assembled gun-riot type (approx.) ................ 40 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.) ........ 46 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ......... 50 in.
Weight of assembled gun-riot type (approx.) . .............. 73/4 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting skeet type-Sportsman
(approx.) ........................................ 8/2 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ....... 81/2 lb

54. OPERATION.
a. This gun is of the semiautomatic type as already explained, and
is loaded and cocked by the force of recoil after the first shot. The only
action necessary thereafter to fire the gun is to pull the trigger. The first
shell, however, must be loaded into the chamber and the hammer cocked
by manual operation. This is accomplished by retraction of the breech
bolt by means of the operating slide (fig. 106).
CAUTION: During operation, the muzzle of the gun should always
be pointing at a safe spot and the finger kept outside of the trigger plate
guard bow.
b. When the gun is operated as a repeater, the shells are loaded into
the magazine, and a shell then transferred to the chamber and the ham-
mer cocked by manual retraction of the slide as already stated. When
operating the gun as a single loader, the bolt can be retracted and hung
in the rearward (open) position by retraction of the operating slide.
This operation unlocks the bolt from the barrel, pulls it to the rear, and
engages it with the dog of the carrier to hang it in the rearward position.
The bolt is again released to move forward by pressing the carrier latch
button, thus allowing the carrier to rise and the dog to release the bolt.
The bolt springs forward and pushes the shell into the chamber of the
barrel, and bolt and barrel are locked together as already explained.
c. The double hook on the trigger retains the hammer in the cocked
170
TM 9-285
54
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, MI I AND SPORTSMAN
position whether the trigger is released betwen shots or not. The trigger,
however, must be released and again pulled before the hammer is
released from the cocked position to fire the gun.
d. The safety sear blocks the trigger from being pulled during the
rearward and forward movement of the operating mechanism. The safety
sear is engaged with the trigger to block its being pulled by the spring
action of the safety sear follower, and disengaged from the trigger by
the rear end of the link as the link locks the bolt and barrel together at
the end of the forward movement. This feature prevents premature firing
of the gun before the bolt and barrel are locked together in the forward
position.
e. The trigger safety is positioned in the rear of the guard bow and
operates laterally in the trigger plate (fig. 104). When pushed fully to
the left, the trigger is free to be pulled and the gun fired. When pushed
fully to the right, the trigger is blocked and cannot be pulled nor the gun
fired. With a shell in the barrel chamber, it is best to block the trigger
by pushing the safety to the right, as explained above, unless the gun is
to be fired immediately.
f. To Load the Magazine (fig. 105).
(1) With breech bolt locked, press the carrier latch button fully
inward to release the forward end of the carrier. Press shell nose down
against carrier until it can be pushed forward against the magazine
follower and into the rear of the magazine. As the base of the shell
passes the end of carrier 'latch, pressure on latch button should be
released slightly. Push the shell forward into the magazine until the
base of the shell passes and is retained by the end of the carrier latch.
(2)'Holding the carrier latch button depressed with the thumb, load
another shell in the same manner pressing it against the base of the first
shell loaded, and push both shells forward into the magazine until the
second shell is caught and held as above. When the carrier latch button
is released, the rearmost shell will spring back and be held by the lock-
ing block latch which projects from the bottom of the bolt.
NOTE: The magazine of the Sportsman Model Gun holds two shells,
while that of the standard M1 1 Gun holds four shells.
g. To Unload the Magazine. Set safety at safe by pushing it all the
way to the right. Then depressing carrier latch button, press carrier
against breech bolt, and holding carrier thus, pull operating handle part
way to the rear to release the shell from the magazine onto carrier, and
lift shell from receiver. The shell in the barrel (if loaded) will return
to the barrel when the slide is released.
h. To Load the Barrel from the Magazine.
() With the magazine loaded set safety at safe by pushing all the
171
TM 9-285
54
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

',.
a~~~~~~~~~

ilit2
t~~~~~~~

4~~~~~~
in

X4o
a.a
0.
o :0~~~~~~~~~
S
II 0
-~~~~ I
I
0
a, e·

0.2
U~~~
o a~~~~~~~~~~~.='-

0C
0
.I

0I.

172

/ /

172
TM 9-285
54
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, Mll AND SPORTSMAN

z
\ Q0eQ0

~~~z
-v < u ,

o~~ ~ ~~~bo
oI

173
TM 9-285
54
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
way to the right. Then pull the operating slide fully to the rear and
release. This action will cock the hammer and feed a shell from the
magazine into the receiver. When the breech bolt springs forward, it will
push the shell into the barrel and close and lock the action.
CAUTION: The fingers should be kept clear of the ejection opening
in the receiver as well as the path of the operating slide handle during
this operation to prevent injury to fingers due to the closing of the action.
(2) After a shell has been loaded from the magazine into the barrel,
another shell may be loaded into the magazine (par. 54 f).

i. To Load the Barrel Only. With the magazine empty, set safety
at safe by pushing all the way to the right and pull operating slide to
rear and hang the bolt. Then place a shell, nose forward, into ejection
opening in the right side of the receiver and allow it to settle on the
carrier. With fingers clear of ejection opening and path of the operating
slide handle, press carrier latch button. The breech bolt will thus be
released to spring forward; move the shell into the barrel and close and
lock the gun. The barrel-is now loaded and the hammer cocked. With
the barrel loaded, it is best to allow the safety to remain at safe, to block
the trigger, unless the gun is to be fired immediately.

j. To Unload Barrel Without Unloading Magazine. If it is neces-


sary to -unload the barrel without unloading the magazine, it can be
accomplished as follows: Set safety at safe by pushing all the way to
the right. Press carrier latch button and then push shell, which pro-
trudes part way from the magazine, fully into the magazine until it is
retained by the forward end of the carrier latch. Keep shell in magazine
by continuing to press on latch button, and retract operating slide (fig.
106) to eject shell in barrel. Then, still pressing on carrier latch button,
allow breech bolt to close slowly (fig. 107) watching to see that the bolt
closes on an empty barrel chamber.

k. To Completely Unload the Gun. When gun is completely loaded


(barrel chamber and magazine) it should be unloaded as follows:
(1) Set safety at safe by pushing all the way to the right.
(2) Unload magazine first as described in g above.
(3) With magazine empty unload the barrel chamber by pulling
operating slide fully to rear, thus ejecting the shell in the barrel.
(4) Inspect barrel and magazine to make sure gun is fully unloaded.
(5) When gun is fully unloaded, the action may be closed by holding
operating handle, pressing carrier latch button, and easing breech bolt to
the forward position.
174
TM 9-285
55
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M11 AND SPORTSMAN
55. FUNCTIONING.
a. As already explained, the functioning of this semiautomatic gun
is accomplished through the force of recoil produced by the expanding
powder gas acting through the shell against the breech bolt when the
gun is fired. In this explanation of functioning, it is assumed that the
gun is fully loaded and has just been fired.
b. As the powder gas expands, it forces the breech bolt to the rear
along with the barrel which is locked to it by the locking block. As the
bolt moves rearward, it pushes the link, which is pivoted to the rear
end of the locking block, to the rear against the force of the expanded
action spring with which it is engaged. The barrel is, at the same time,
pulled to the rear by the breech bolt against the force of the expanded
recoil spring and the resistance of the friction ring and piece, mounted
on the magazine tube, acting against the rear face of the barrel guide
attached to the barrel. Thus the action spring and recoil spring are
compressed during the rearward movement by the bolt and barrel re-
spectively. The resistance to compression of these springs and the
friction set up by .the contracted friction piece, act together against the
force of the expanding powder gas upon the breech bolt (par. 58).
e. The breech bolt and barrel move to the rear, locked together, to
the end of the rearward movement. This point is roughly determined'
by the opposing force of the springs and friction piece as explained
above which stops the groups and then starts them forward. A fibre
cushion riveted to the inner rear face of the receiver cushions the rear
end of the bolt and prevents it from striking the receiver if it recoils too
far on the rearward movement. As the breech bolt and barrel start
forward, the dog on the rear of the carrier, which has been pressing
upon the lower face of the bolt through the pressure of the carrier
plunger spring, engages with the operating slide and checks the slide.
The forward end of the carrier is prevented from rotating upward by
the carrier latch. The operating slide, which has been bearing on the
forward face of the link, likewise checks the link. The bolt, continuing
forward, unlocks itself from the barrel as the locking block is rotated
downward out of the locking aperture in the barrel by the momentarily
held link pulling upon the locking block. As the bolt is unlocked, the
barrel springs forward, pulled by the force of the now compressed recoil
spring bearing on the rear face of the barrel guide.
d. The bolt is momentarily held and released as follows:
(1) When the bolt is unlocked, it is held to the rear by the engage-
ment of the carrier dog with the operating slide and link as already
explained. The bolt is held thus until the forward end of the carrier,
which has been held in the lower position by the carrier latch, is freed
to be rotated upward by the force of the action spring acting through
175
TM 9-285
55
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
the link and slide which are bearing upon the carrier dog. As the for-
ward end of the carrier rises, the dog is disengaged from the slide and
the bolt is free to move forward.
(2) The carrier latch is disengaged from the carrier by the shell
which has been fed from the magazine into the receiver. This shell is
held by the shell stop and released by the barrel as it springs forward
when unlocked as explained in f below. The released shell springs to
the rear and strikes and depresses the rear end of the carrier latch, and
thus disengages the latch from the carrier. The carrier is thus freed to be
rotated upward as explained above.
(3) When the last shell has been fired, the bolt is held to the rear
by the carrier dog as explained. There being no shell in the receiver
to release the carrier by striking and depressing the carrier latch, the
bolt will be held until the carrier is released manually by pressure on
the carrier latch button.
(4) The bolt thus released as explained above moves forward, pro-
pelled by the expanding action spring by means of the link and locking
block. As the bolt is pushed forward, the link is at an angle to the axis
of the bolt. In this position, the forward end of the link lies above the
rear end of the locking block latch which is pivoted in the bolt and
bearing on a shoulder on the locking block, preventing its rotation
upward. The link thus pushes the bolt forward although the link is
pivoted to the lower end of the locking block. As the bolt thus pro-
pelled nears the forward position, the rear end of the link rises until
the link is nearly parallel to the axis of the bolt. As the rear end of the
link rises, the forward end levers the locking block latch down from
engagement with the locking block, and immediately begins to rotate the
locking block upward in the bolt. This movement is so timed that
the locking block is rotated fully through the bolt and into the locking
aperture in the barrel extension as the bolt reaches the forward posi-
tion, thus locking bolt and barrel together again. The rear lug on the
locking block, striking the sloping rear end of the barrel extension,
cushions the bolt and starts the locking block rotating upward.
e. When the bolt moves rearward, pulling the barrel, on the recoil
movement, the fired shell, held in position on the face of the bolt by the
extractor on the right-hand side, moves to the rear with the bolt and
barrel. As the barrel is freed from the bolt at the beginning of the for-
ward (counterrecoil) movement, it springs forward as explained. As
the rear of the barrel extension passes the face of the bolt, the ejector
pinned in the left.,wall of the barrel extension strikes the base of the
fired shell held to the face of the bolt by the extractor and knocks it
to the right out of the ejection opening in the receiver, pivoting it about
the extractor.
176
TM 9-285
55
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M 1 AND SPORTSMAN
f. As the barrel extension continues forward, it strikes and disen-
gages the shell stop which has been holding the next shell to be loaded.
The shell springs rearward, propelled by the force of the magazine
spring, to release the carrier latch and hence the bolt, and is then lifted
to the bore line by the carrier which is rotated up by the link as explained
in d above. The shell is pushed forward into the barrel by the bolt as
it moves forward and the carrier spring returns the carrier to the lower
position.
g. As the rear end of the carrier latch is depressed by the shell and
thus disengaged from the carrier, the forward end is rotated outward into
the path of the next shell in the magazine. The latch holds the shell thus
until the carrier moves downward again after having lifted the previous
shell to the bore line. As the carrier moves downward it releases the rear
end of the carrier latch which it has been holding depressed. As the rear
end springs outward, the forward end rotates in towards the receiver wall
and thus frees the shell it has been holding. This shell springs to the rear
and is held by the forward end of the locking block latch on the bolt,
which has now reached the forward position, as the carrier reaches the
lower position and thus retains the shell in the receiver. The above func-
tioning prevents double feeding. The shell is held thus by the locking
block latch until the bolt starts rearward again, when the shell follows
it until caught and retained by the shell stop, from which it is subse-
quently released by the barrel extension on its forward movement as al-
ready explained.
h. The hammer is cocked by the link, which straddles it, on the rear-
ward movement of the bolt. The sear hooks on the trigger (fig. 103)
engage with notches in the hammer to hold it in the cocked position,
whether the trigger' has been released between shots or not. The safety
sear blocks the trigger preventing its being pulled until disengaged by
the link as the bolt reaches the locked position. Detailed explanation
of the functioning of the trigger is as follows:
(1) The upper part of the trigger is shaped like a U with two sear
hooks facing each other. A lug projecting from the rear face of the ham-
mer is notched on both sides to engage with the sear hooks on the trigger.
The notched lug of the hammer rotates down between these hooks when
cammed back by the link on the rearward movement of the bolt. If the
trigger is in the forward (released) position, the forward hook engages
with the forward notch in the hammer. If the trigger is in the rearward
(pulled) position, the rear hook engages with the rear notch in the ham-
mer. Thus the hammer is caught and held in the cocked position whether
the trigger has been released or not. If the trigger has been held in the
pulled position and the hammer caught by the rear hook, the trigger
must be released and again pulled before the gun can be fired. Release
818074 o- 48- 12 177
TM 9-285
55-56
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
of the trigger disengages the rear hook but the hammer is immediately
caught and held by the forward hook. When the trigger is again pulled,
the hammer is released and rotates forward, propelled by the force of the
main spring, to strike the rear of the firing pin positioned in the breech
bolt.
(2) The safety sear, however, has been engaged with the rear of the
trigger by the action of its spring follower. In order to pull the trigger,
the safety sear must be disengaged. This is accomplished by the rear
end of the link, which straddles the safety sear as it reaches the forward
position to lock the bolt. This feature prevents the gun from being pre-
maturely fired before the breech bolt is locked to the barrel.

i. The trigger safety functions laterally in the trigger plate just be-
hind the trigger. A web on the rear face of the lower part of the trigger
slips into a notch in the safety when the safety is pushed to the left and
thus disengaged, allowing the trigger to be pulled. When the safety is
shifted laterally to the right, the trigger web cannot enter the notch in
the safety and therefore cannot be pulled.

56. REMOVAL OF GROUPS (figs. 101, 108, and 109).


a. Groups and parts should be removed and replaced in the order
given below. Groups and parts when removed should be -placed on a
clean, flat surface and care exercised to prevent loss of screws and small
parts. Remove as follows:
(1) BARREL AND FORE END.
(a) With breech bolt in the forward position and gun held in vertical
position, rest butt on solid surface.
(b) Push barrel back into receiver a short distance and hold in that
position to relieve pressure of recoil spring on fore end; unscrew take-
down screw (Sportsman) or magazine cap (M11), located at forward
end of fore end from magazine tube (fig. 124). If screw is tight, breech
bolt may be retracted and hung in rearward position and fore end held
down against force of recoil spring while loosening screw. Push out cross
pin in screw head and use as lever (fig. 110).
(c) When take-down screw (Sportsman) or magazine cap (M11) is
fully disengaged from magazine, ease barrel upward out of receiver until
free of pressure of recoil spring (fig. 125).
(d) Slide fore end, with take-down screw attached, up and off maga-
zine and barrel and then pull barrel up and out of receiver (fig. 111).
(e) Note relative positions of friction piece, friction ring, and recoil
spring as mounted on the magazine tube and if removed, replace in iden-
tical manner. Refer to paragraph 58 for assembly of these parts for vary-
ing recoil pressures.
178
TM 9-285
56
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, MI1 AND SPORTSMAN

I-.~~~~~~~. I.-
a~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~
z
_
LU o~~~~~~~~ o
LLI
_u a
LUL

a: Z
°
w~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

a
r~~~~~ o o
a0

rO~~~~E:

ce
ui~
~~~~~~~~0
~~~~~~~~~~~~tu
-F
t

-I >~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~L
oE
< 0
LL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~L
z -
:E u
I-
M
Lu~~~~~~~~~u
a
00~~~~~~~~~~1 O? 0 O

M EL
0~~~~~
~O C
z0 C~~~
VI~~~~~~~~~~~~.

0 0 uI umu ao
V)
w u cO~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~u

..
Z<_1 ccO
II 0~~~~~~

UU QZZ~~17

179
TM 9-285
56
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

/,C

IL uuI I
ILA . ;.-^ 0 0z: U
0
VI IZ
. -J I
Xi z Z Z °

u 3[ 0-Z
g X ;Xt:\ 3 3t

0. x ~~~~0

,,/

-uI 80-

i. I

z - In

0z <
M Lu
t oc~~ uJ LL.
Z
EL Y

<

i1
rr q z z18

180
TM 9-285
56
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, Mll1 AND SPORTSMAN

TAKE-DOWN SCREW PIN

TAKE-DOWN SCREW

a- FORE-END

if
/

RA PD 42376

Figure 10--Disengaging Take-down Screw While Holding Fore End


Against Spring Tension--Remington Shotgun, Sportsman
181
TM 9-285
56
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

uid~~~i 0

0,
,' I.

/ E

.0
'I
C

>

,-n, ii O~~~~~~~~~~~

1,U S?/I-0

~i) .=.2
TM 9-285
56
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, Ml 11AND SPORTSMAN
(f) Replace fore end on magazine tube, press down against recoil
spring, and screw in take-down screw or magazine cap (Mll1) to hold
recoil spring, friction piece, and friction ring in position. Exercise care
not to lose friction piece spring.
CAUTION: Do not press carrier latch button allowing breech bolt to
spring forward after barrel is removed from receiver. To move bolt for-
ward and remove tension from action spring, grasp operating slide handle
firmly; then, press carrier latch button and ease bolt to forward position
against force of action spring.

(2) BUTT STOCK. Due to expansion of action spring when breech


bolt is removed, it is necessary to remove this spring before removing the
groups from the receiver. To remove the spring, the butt stock must first
be removed. This is accomplished by removing tang screw locking screw,
and then the tang screw from under side of trigger plate tang (rear screw
in tang), and pulling butt stock to rear from receiver and. action spring
tube. (If withdrawal of butt stock is difficult, remove trigger plate pin,
press carrier latch button to release carrier, and press forward end of
trigger plate upward slightly into receiver.)
(3) TRIGGER PLATE GROUP.
(a) With butt stock removed, remove trigger plate pin locking screw
from lower left hand side of receiver (near center) and, using pin drift,
drive out trigger plate pin from right to left.
(b) Remove trigger plate screw from lower rear corner of left side of
receiver, and pull trigger plate group downward out of receiver.
(4) CARRIER.
(a) Press forward end of carrier spring from under retaining stud and
remove spring from pivot stud. Be careful spring does not fly out when
disengaging forward end.
(b) Remove locking screws and then, carrier screws from right and left
sides of receiver and lift out carrier. Carrier screws are largest screws in
sides of receiver, just to rear of center.
(5) ACTION SPRING.
(a) With butt stock, trigger plate and carrier removed, press in the
wooden plug at rear end of action spring tube, and using pin drift, push
out cross pin.
(b) Holding plug with finger against force of spring, withdraw drift
slowly and ease plug and spring to rear out of tube. When fully ex-
panded, pull plug, spring, and spring follower to rear out of tube.
(6) BREECH BOLT AND LINK. Recoil spring, friciton piece, and ring
must be moved forward on the magazine tube before breech bolt can be
removed from receiver.
183
TM 9-285
56-57
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(a) Move breech bolt until locking block latch pin alines with hole
in left side of receiver to rear of shell stop. Then, using straight pin drift,
push pin clear through breech bolt and receiver from right to left; then,
withdraw pin drift slowly at same time holding down locking block latch
against force of latch spring. When drift is removed, ease latch upward
and remove latch and spring.
(b) Swing rear end of link downward to clear operating slide, and
move breech bolt forward out of receiver with the link attached. The op-
erating slide will slide out of the breech bolt as it moves forward and the
handle of the slide strikes the forward edge of the ejection opening in
the receiver.

57. REPLACEMENT OF GROUPS.


a. Groups and parts should be thoroughly cleaned, lightly oiled, and
lubricated, if necessary, before replacing. Replace as follows:

(1) BREECH BOLT AND LINK.


(a) With recoil spring, friction piece, and ring moved forward on the
magazine tube, slide the link and breech bolt, link first, into the forward
end of the receiver, so that guides on lower face of breech bolt mate with
guideways in receiver.
(b) Move breech bolt to rear into receiver until half the bolt has en-
tered. Then, holding operating slide. by the handle, slip rear end into
receiver to rear of bolt, through ejection opening in right side. Hold slide
parallel to bolt and move bolt to rear, at the same time mating guides
on slide with guideways in right side of bolt. As slide enters bolt, move
bolt to rear thus seating slide in bolt. The link must be pointed downward
to accomplish the mating.
(c) Slide recoil spring, friction piece, and friction ring to rear on naga-
zine tube, in their proper order and position and replace fore end to hold
in place (par. 56 a (1) (e) and (f)).
(d) Slide breech bolt to rear until locking block latch pin holes in bolt
and receiver aline, insert latch pin through left side of receiver and left
wall of bolt to hold in position, then, replace latch spring in seat in bolt
and place latch on top of spring with long flat end to rear and drilled
lug down. Press latch down on spring, aline hole in latch with holes in
receiver, and bolt and push pin through latch and bolt until flush with
both sides of bolt. Move bolt to see that pin does not interfere with
receiver.

(2) CARRIER.
(a) With receiver bottom side up, move breech bolt forward and push
link towards top of receiver.
(b) With carrier dog up and to rear, slide carrier, beneath spring re-
taining stud, into receiver and aline screw holes in carrier with those in
184
TM 9-285
57
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, Mll1 AND SPORTSMAN
receiver. Replace carrier screws; then, turn screws until cuts in screw
heads aline with countersinks for locking screws and replace locking
screws. (Catch threads in both carrier screws before tightening either
screw. Be careful not to cross threads).
(c) Slide carrier spring onto the pivot stud in left rear of receiver so
that short leaf rests on rear of carrier. Then, press down long leaf of spring
and slip under retaining stud head just forward of pivot stud. Hold
spring to prevent slipping from pivot stud while positioning long leaf.

(3) ACTION SPRING.


(a) With breech bolt forward, insert action spring follower first (as-
sembled to spring) into rear end of action spring tube. Push through
tube and mate rear nose of link with indent in follower.
(b) Press action spring into tube until head of wooden plug (as-
sembled to spring) is flush with end of tube. Turn plug until pin hole in
plug alines with that in tube and insert plug pin. Still holding plug, push
pin through until flush with tube. A pin drift may be used to hold plug
while inserting pin.
(4) TRIGGER PLATE GROUP.
(a) With the breech bolt forward and the hammer cocked, press trig-
ger plate group, with tang to rear, horizontally upward into the rear under
side of the receiver and adjust until pin and screw holes in trigger plate
and receiver aline. If plate does not seat easily, retract operating slide
slightly to allow safety sear to enter slot in link.
(b) Insert trigger plate pin from left side and push through until
head is flush with face of receiver.
(c) Using screwdriver in slotted head of pin, turn pin until cut in
pin head alines with locking screw countersink in receiver. Then replace
locking screw.
(d) Insert trigger plate screw from left side of receiver, catch threads,
and turn down tightly.
(5) BUTT STOCK.
(a) Push butt stock on over action spring tube until stock fits snugly
and evenly against rear face of receiver, and tang screw hole in trigger
plate tang and stock aline. Stock may be seated by striking butt smartly
with heel of hand. Do not strike butt on hard surface.
(b) Replace tang screw and screw in tightly until cut in screw head
alines with locking screw countersink in tang; then replace locking screw.
If replacement of butt stock is difficult, remove trigger plate pin. Replace
pin after assembly.
(6) BARREL AND FORE END.
(a) With breech bolt forward, fore end removed from magazine tube,
and recoil spring, friction piece, and friction ring in their proper order
185
TM 9-285
57-58
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
and position, hold gun in vertical position and rest butt of stock on firm
surface.
(b) Slide the barrel extension into open end of receiver so that
guides on barrel extension mate with guideways in receiver and barrel
guide slips over magazine tube and bears on friction assembly on tube.
(c) Slide fore end on barrel and magazine tube as far as it will go.
(d) Grasp muzzle end of barrel and push barrel down into receiver
against spring: force until the barrel extension is wholly within the re-
ceiver. Then, press fore end down until it mates evenly with receiver and
engage and screw down take-down screw (Sportsman) or magazine cap
(M11) until tight. Pin in screw can be pushed out and used as a lever,
if necessary. Be sure fore end is fully mated flush with receiver and take-
down screw or magazine cap (M11) is tight.
(e) Release barrel and operate gun to test assembly.

58. USE OF FRICTION RING.


a. Proper use of friction ring and piece will reduce recoil and prevent
excessive wear of parts. To change friction adjustment, remove fore end
and barrel and assemble the recoil spring, friction piece (with friction
spring assembled), and the friction ring as prescribed below.

(1) FOR HEAVY LOADS. When heavy loads are used, ranging from
31/4 to 33/4 drams (or equivalent) of powder, assemble as follows:
(a) Place the recoil spring on the magazine tube first so that it bears
directly against the receiver. The Sportsman Model Gun has a stop ring
on the magazine next to the receiver, held in position by a set screw. This
ring should not be removed.
(b) Place the friction ring next on the magazine tube with the outside
bevel to the rear against the recoil spring.
(c) Place the friction piece (with friction spring assembled) on the
magazine tube ahead of the friction ring.
NOTE: Refer to figure 112, position 1.

(2) FOR LIGHT LOADS. When light loads are used, 3 drams (or
equivalent) or less of powder, assemble as follows:
(a) Place friction ring next to receiver with outside bevel facing
forward, away from receiver.
(b) Place recoil spring next to friction ring.
(c) Place friction piece (with friction spring assembled) next to recoil
spring.
NOTE: Refer to figure 112, position 2.

(3) FOR USE WITH CUTTS COMPENSATOR. When the Cutts Com-
pensator is mounted to the gun barrel, assemble as follows:
186
TM 9-285
58
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, MI i AND SPORTSMAN

,_ RECEIVER

FRICTION PIECE
RECOIL SPRING MAGAZINE TUBE FRICTION SPRING

FRICTION RING

RA PD 40551

Sportsman-POSITION 1I-Heavy Loads

RECEIVER

FRICTION PIECE
FRICTION RING RECOIL SPRING FRICTION SPRING

MAGAZINE TUBE

RA PD 40552

Sportsman-POSITION 2--Light Loads

R EC E IV ER

FRICTION SPRING
'Al/FRICTION PIECE RECOIL SPRING MAGAZINE TUBE

FRICTION RING

RA PD 40553

Sportsman--POSITION 3--With Cutts Compensator

Figure 112-Recoil Adjustments-Remington Shotgun M 11


187
TM 9-285
58-59
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(a) Place friction piece (with friction spring assembled) next to re-
ceiver.
(b) Place recoil spring next to friction piece.
(c) Place friction ring next to recoil spring with outside bevel facing
forward, away from spring.
NOTE: Refer to figure 112, position 3. The Cutts Compensator is a
slotted tube, sometimes attached to the muzzle end of the barrel for the
purpose of reducing recoil and controlling shot pattern.
(4) The friction is progressively reduced (subpar. a to c above),
figure 112, positions 1 to 3. In order to reduce recoil and excessive wear
of parts, use greatest friction possible which will give satisfactory func-
tioning of gun. If gun fails to eject, however, try next lighter friction
adjustment; if failures occur with position 1, try position 2; if failures
occur with position 2, try position 3.
(5) Magazine tube should be kept free from foreign matter and rust
and lightly oiled. If gun does not function smoothly and freely, lubricate
friction piece and ring lightly.

59. FIELD INSPECTION.


a. With the gun completely assembled, test the mechanism for proper
functioning. Fired shells may often be used for testing, when dummy
shells are not available, by turning in the uncrimped end so that the
length of the shell will approximate that of a live shell. Use of live shells
for testing is prohibited.
CAUTION: Keep fingers clear of ejection opening and path of oper-
ating slide handle as bolt moves forward with considerable force when
released and may cause injury to operator. Be sure gun is fully unloaded
before inspection.

b. Operate the gun as follows:


(1) Grasping fore end with left hand and, operating slide handle
with right hand, pull breech bolt all the way to the rear until bolt is
caught and hung by carrier dog. Barrel should remain in forward po-
sition.
(2) With bolt hung in rearward position, press carrier latch release
button and allow the bolt to spring forward. The bolt should spring for-'
ward smartly to the extreme forward position to lock with the barrel.
(3) Load a dummy shell into the magazine (par. 54 f). Retract
breech bolt fully by means of operating slide and attempt to hang bolt
in rearward position. Bolt should not hang, due to shell bearing on car-
rier latch (par. 55 d).
188
TM 9-285
59
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, Ml 11 AND SPORTSMAN
(4) Allow bolt to spring forward to load the shell into the barrel
chamber. Retract bolt fully by means of operating slide to eject the
shell and attempt to hang bolt. Bolt should hang, as there is no longer
a shell in the receiver to bear upon the carrier latch.
(5) Test gun for doubling as follows:
(a) With gun fully unloaded, pull bolt fully to the rear by means of
the operating slide handle until it is hung by the carrier dog.
(b) Hold bolt thus with right hand, and with the left hand press
carrier latch button to release the bolt, and ease bolt forward just enough
to release it from the hung position (about 1/4 in.). Then, with left hand,
pull the trigger.
(c) Holding trigger retracted, ease bolt slowly forward to the locked
position.
(d) Then ease pull on trigger slowly until entirely removed and the
trigger moves forward. The hammer should not release to fire the gun
during the slow release of the trigger.
(e) When trigger is fully released, pull it again. The hammer should
release to fire the gun when the trigger is thus pulled.
NOTE: This test is to insure that the gun will not double (fire auto-
matically) if the trigger is not released (c (10) below). To insure the
gun will not double, it is desirable that the movement of the trigger at
the center point of finger contact be not less than 1/16 inch.
(6) Retract the bolt fully and, then, holding operating slide, press
carrier latch button and allow the bolt to close slowly. Release and at-
tempt to pull the trigger at intervals during the closing of the bolt. The
trigger should not pull to fire the gun until the operating slide handle
is within l/( to 1/s inch from the normal forward position. This test is
to make sure that the gun will not fire until the locking block is engaged
with the recoil shoulder of the barrel extension and bolt and barrel thus
locked together.

(7) Retract bolt fully and then allow it to move fully forward to the
locked position, thereby cocking the hammer. Then, push the trigger
safety all the way to the right and attempt to pull the trigger. The trig-
ger should not pull nor the hammer be released to fire the gun.

(8) Push the safety all the way to the left and attempt to pull the
trigger. The trigger should pull and the hammer be released.

c. When the gun does not operate and function smoothly when tested
as above, damaged or improperly assembled parts are indicated as fol-
lows:
(1) BOLT DOES NOT HANG IN REARWARD POSITION WITH GUN UN-
LOADED. May be due to broken or worn carrier dog, worn retaining
189
vM 9-285
59
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
notch of operating slide or link shoulder, broken or missing carrier latch
spring, broken carrier latch or foreign matter under forward end of latch.

(2) BOLT DOES NOT SPRING FORWARD SMARTLY WHEN RELEASED.


May be due to broken action spring, link broken or improperly seated in
action spring follower, jammed or broken carrier or carrier latch, broken
locking block latch or broken or missing latch spring.

(3) BOLT DOES NOT LOCK TO BARREL. May be due to foreign matter
in receiver or barrel extension, burred locking block or locking apertures
in barrel extension, or broken or jammed locking block latch spring.
(4) CARRIER DOES NOT FUNCTION TO HANG BOLT OR LIFT SHELL.
May be due to broken carrier dog or follower spring, jammed or broken
carrier latch, foreign matter in mechanism, or worn or broken operating
slide.
(5) CARRIER DOES NOT RETURN TO LOWER POSITION. May be due
to broken or improperly assembled carrier spring, or jammed or broken
carrier latch.

(6) SHELL DOES NOT SPRING FROM MAGAZINE WHEN RELEASED.


May be due to broken or kinked magazine spring, dented tube, bent
follower, or foreign matter or rust in tube.
(7) HAMMER DOES NOT COCK OR SLIPS. May be due to worn or
broken hooks on trigger, or notches in hammer, broken trigger or main-
spring, or foreign matter in mechanism.
(8) SAFETY SEAR DOES NOT RELEASE TRIGGER WHEN BOLT IS
LOCKED. May be due to broken or jammed safety sear spring follower,
or damaged safety sear.
(9) TRIGGER SAFETY DOES NOT OPERATE. May be due to burred
web on rear of trigger, burs in slot in safety, broken, or bent leaf on trig-
ger spring which bears on safety ball, or foreign matter in aperture.
(10) HAMMER Is RELEASED WHEN TESTED (par. 59 b (5)). May be
due to worn or broken hooks on hammer or trigger, foreign matter in
notches, or spread or broken upper U-end of trigger.
(11) THE FOLLOWING MALFUNCTIONS MAY OCCUR WHEN GUN IS
FIRED:
(a) Barrel Is Not Unlocked From Breech Bolt. May be due to broken
or damaged carrier dog or carrier latch, worn operating slide notch, or
broken slide.
(b) Shells Do Not Eject. May be due to broken ejector in'barrel
extension, broken extractor or incorrect friction adjustment (par. 58
a (4)).
190
TM 9-285
59-60
REMINGTON SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, Mll1 AND SPORTSMAN
(c) Shell Stop Does Not Function. May be due to broken stop or
broken or missing stop spring.
(d) Two Shells Enter Receiver at Once (Double Feeding). May be
due to broken carrier latch or carrier dog.

d. Inspect barrel and test trigger pull (par. 3 n).

e. In addition to inspection of the gun for operation and functioning,


the gun should be inspected generally for condition and defects noted.
Attention should be directed to such defects as cracked wooden parts,
cracked or deformed metal parts, dented or rusted magazine tube, loose
screws and pins, loose or binding parts or assemblies, loose barrel or
magazine, loose stock or butt plate, rust, dents, burs, or excessive wear
of parts. If defects are such that early malfunction of the gun is indi-
cated, the gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel for inspec-
tion and correction.
f. Where defects and malfunctions cannot be remedied by cleaning,
lubrication and simple adjustments of assembly, which lie within the
scope of using troops, the gun should be turned over to ordnance person-
nel for a thorough inspection, correction and/or repair.

g. Removal of burs on working parts, trigger adjustments and like


corrections should not be attempted by using troops, as stoning of parts
must be exacting, the angle of the faces concerned 'must not be changed,
and volume of metal must not be materially reduced.

h. In addition to inspection of the barrel (d above), it should be in-


spected for looseness and alinement in the barrel extension. The draw
marks on barrel and barrel extension should be in alinement as mis-
alinement of these parts will cause binding of the barrel guide with the
magazine tube and affect the functioning of the gun when assembled.
If misalinement is evident, the gun should be turned over to ordance
personnel for correction.
i. If shell appears unnecessarily loose in chamber with breech bolt
locked, the gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel to be
checked for headspace and worn locking block.
j. Adjustment and maintenance of the gun in the case of using troops
is limited to the removal and replacement of the parts and groups of
parts, as outlined in paragraphs 56 and 57, together with cleaning, lubri-
cation, and such adjustments as are necessary in assembling the gun as
outlined.

60. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION.


a. Cleaning, oiling, and lubrication may be accomplished in a manner
191
TM 9-285
60
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
similar to that described for the Winchester Gun M97 (par. 11). Atten-
tion should be given to corresponding parts and surfaces when lubri-
cating.
b. The fore end and barrel should be removed from the receiver for
cleaning the bore, and for thorough cleaning, the groups should be re-
moved from the receiver and assemblies cleaned, oiled and lubricated as
directed.
c. Points to lubricate are:
(1) Outer surface of barrel extension and barrel extension guides.
(2) Friction piece and friction ring when necessary, where they bear
on magazine tube. Tube should be kept clean and lightly oiled. Too
much oil will reduce friction, and prevent proper functioning of gun (par.
58 a (5)).
(3) Breech bolt guides and surface, occasionally.
(4) Link pin, connecting locking block with link.
(5) Locking block guides.
(6) Trigger and hammer pins.
(7) Carrier (trunnion) screws.
(8) Action spring follower. Spring should be removed occasionally
and tube cleaned and oiled.
(9) Safety sear stud and spring follower.
d. Oiling and lubrication should be light, as excess oil collects foreign
matter and powder residue which will become gummy, impede function-
ing of gun, and produce undue wear of parts. In very cold climates,
oiling and lubrication should be reduced to a minimum. Only surfaces
showing signs of wear should be lightly oiled. Refer to "Special Mainte-
nance," section XI.

192
TM 9-285
61

Section IX

SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720


Paragraph
Description ................... ....................... 61
Data ................................................ 62
Operation ............................................ 63
Functioning .................. ..................... 64
Removal of groups ...................... ... 65
Replacement of groups ............................... 66
Use of friction ring ..................................... 67
Field inspection ......... ........................... 68
Cleaning and lubrication ................................ 69

61. DESCRIPTION.
a. Identification marks on this gun are generally to be found as fol-
lows:
(1) Name of maker and model number of' the gun are stamped on
the left side of barrel near the rear end, and the chamber length and
gage size in the corresponding position on the right side of the barrel.
(2) The word "SAVAGE" is embossed on the left side of the receiver.
(3) The serial number of the gun is stamped on the forward lower
face of the receiver and the left side of the trigger guard tang.
(4) The letters U.S. are stamped on the forward left face of the re-
ceiver.

b. This gun (figs. 113 and 114) is an autoloading or semiautomatic


shotgun similar in every way to the Remington Gun Mll11 covered in
Section VIII, which varies slightly from the Sportsman Model. Like
the Remington gun this gun is recoil operated, the force generated by
the expanding powder gas acting against the breech bolt on the recoil
movement, together with the force generated by the compressed recoil
and action springs on the counterrecoil movement, operates the mech-
anism of the gun to load, feed, extract and eject the shell, and cock the
hammer. The trigger must be pulled each time to fire the gun.

e. This gun is so constructed that the barrel can easily be removed


from the receiver by removal of the magazine cap and pulling fore end
and barrel from the receiver. This construction facilitates cleaning and
transportation.
818074 0- 48 - 13 193
TM 9-285
61
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

n
sn

I 4

l,

1I1 I

194..

.0A. m

194a,
TM 9-285
61
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12 GAGE, M720
d. This gun is furnished with barrels of different lengths and de-
grees of boring and may have other modifications of design. For con-
venience the gun will be classified as three types: riot, sporting skeet
and sporting trap although variations of these types may occur.
(1) The riot-type gun (figs. 113 and 114) is usually furnished with
a 20-inch plain barrel, bored full cylinder. Autoloading shotguns may not
be equipped with bayonet attachments.
(2) The sporting skeet-type gun is usually furnished with a 26-inch
plain or ribbed barrel, bored improved cylinder, and is without bayonet
attachment or sling.
(3) The sporting trap-type gun is similar to the skeet-type gun but is
furnished with a 30-inch barrel bored full choke, and is without.bayonet
attachment or sling.

e. General Description (figs. 115, 122, and 123). The general


description of this gun is similar in every way to that of the Remington
Gun M11 described in section VIII. The parts vary somewhat in shape
in the two guns and they: are not interchangeable. The position, removal,
replacement, and functioning of the parts are generally the same as the
Remington Gun Ml11. A few parts, however, are slightly different in de-
sign and nomenclature.
(1) The stock of the gun is fastened to the tang of the receiver by the
tang screw passing through the tang of the trigger plate, through the
stock grip, and threaded into the receiver tang. This screw is locked in
place by a locking screw. To the rear end of the stock, a composition
butt plate is fastened by two wood screws.
(2) The barrel has a semicylindrical extension threaded to the rear
end which slides into the forward end of the receiver, and a ring guide
brazed to the barrel tube which slides over the magazine tube. The
magazine tube is screwed into the receiver at manufacture, and posi-
tioned by a stop screw. The recoil spring is mounted on the magazine
tube together with a friction ring, friction piece, and spring. The posi-
tioning of these latter parts determines the amount of resistance (fric-
tion) set up against the force of recoil when the barrel is pulled to the
rear by the breech bolt when locked to it. The barrel is reciprocated
within the receiver and upon the magazine tube by the breech bolt which
is locked to it during the rearward movement, and again at the end of
the forward movement, by means of the locking block passing through
an aperture in the barrel extension. A bead sight is driven into a ramp,
pinned and brazed to the muzzle end of the barrel, and the ejector of
the gun is riveted in a groove in the rear inner wall of the barrel ex-
tension.
195
TM 9-285
61
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

.r m~B~~m
m

i iIDnB~ - o

la E

C .i *>

9 ot~~E~lll v,
"i;-L.~~~~~

Zip
196
TM 9-285
61
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720

uz
lee

ZU Z
Zg 0
c
U
UJ OU

ou zI M

VI Ln Ln0 f- W QOW a
YO L UU O 0U
uu VI uFul&F' 1 Zw
o- oo u w

-JZZJ VwW"Y ~0O94 wZZ A

02 U U U D
co ,'-

197
TM 9-285
61
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(3) The magazine tube is screwed into the forward end of the re-
ceiver and contains the magazine spring and follower retained by a split
spring retainer, positioned in the forward end of the magazine.

(4) The fore end slides over the magazine tube and is held in posi-
tion by the magazine cap and in turn limits the forward movement of the
barrel. The magazine cap is locked in position by a spring plunger.

(5) The receiver contains the operating mechanism and to its lower
rear end is fastened the trigger guard to which is mounted the firing
mechanism. The trigger guard is secured by a screw, and a pin with lock-
ing screw. The receiver is open at the bottom for loading and at the right
side for ejection of the fired shell cases. The rear of the receiver is
formed into a tang in which is screwed the action spring tube. The tang
and tube extend into the stock when the gun is assembled. The action
spring tube houses the action spring which is stopped from rearward
movement by a wooden stop pinned in the rear end of the tube. The ac-
tion spring follower is positioned in the forward end of the action spring,
and against it bears the rear end of the link when assembled. The action
spring forces the breech bolt forward on the counterrecoil stroke by
means of the link, which is pivoted to the locking block. The locking
block slides radially in the bolt and is held in position by the firing pin
which passes through bolt and locking block. It is this hinged construc-
tion of the link and locking block that enables the bolt to reciprocate
horizontally while at an agle to the link and action spring. The vertical
movement of the link operates the locking block latch positioned in the
breech bolt, by which the locking block is blocked or freed to move radi-
ally in the bolt, when acted upon by the link.

(6) The carrier is pivoted in the rear of the receiver on two screws
extending through the walls of the receiver and locked in place by lock-
ing screws. In the rear end of the carrier a dog is pivoted under spring
tension supplied by a spring and plunger positioned behind it in the
carrier. The carrier is raised by means of the dog which bears on the
lower face of the breech bolt and lowered by action of the carrier spring
positioned in the receiver.
(7) The carrier latch is pivoted in a groove in the inner right side
of the receiver on a pin with a threaded head and is actuated by a coil
spring positioned between it and the receiver. A button bearing on the
latch extends through the right wall of the receiver, by which the latch
can be manually disengaged from the carrier to free it.

(8) The shell stop is similarly pivoted and actuated in the left side
of the receiver and acts to check the fed shell from entirely entering
the receiver until the proper time.
198
TM 9-285
61
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720

al

~~~~z -A;0~.
we

a-
oq"
0
P~- z

e *o ,

~199
~~ 0

199
TM 9-285
61
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(9) The breech bolt (fig. 116) functions in guideways in the inner
walls of the receiver and houses the firing pin which operates longi-
tudinally through the length of the bolt and the locking block, and is
cammed back into the bolt by the locking block as the block rotates
downward. The extractor, positioned in the forward right face of the
bolt, is of the claw type, and spring actuated. The locking block func-
tions radially in guideways in the breech bolt' and is positioned by the
firing pin which passes through it and the breech bolt. To the lower rear
end of the locking block, the link is pivoted by which the block is
rotated upward to lock the breech bolt and barrel together when in the
forward position. The firing pin is positioned by the firing pin stop pin
passing laterally through the bolt and a groove in the firing pin. In
the under side of the breech bolt, the locking block latch is pivoted
and actuated by a coil spring, positioned between the latch and the bolt.
The latch blocks the lower end of the locking block from forward
(radial) movement until levered up by the link as the rear end of the
link rises at the end of the forward movement. The operating slide, by
which the breech bolt is manually retracted to load and cock the gun,
is positioned in a groove in the right side of the bolt and reciprocates
with it when the gun functions. The slide also functions with the link
and carrier dog to unlock the breech bolt and barrel.

(10) The trigger guard group (fig. 117) is composed of the hammer,
trigger, safety sear, mainspring, and trigger safety together with their
components. The hammer is pivoted in the forward end of the trigger
guard and is functioned by the mainspring screwed to the tang of the
trigger guard and bearing on a roller in the lower end of the hammer.
The mainspring is of the leaf type and is slotted to allow the upper
end of the trigger which acts as the sear to protrude through it to engage
the hammer. A lug extends from the upper rear face of the hammer
in which there are two notches, one facing forward and the other to the
rear. The trigger is pivoted in the rear end of the trigger guard, the lower
end extending downward into the guard bow. The upper end of the
trigger is U-shaped, the upper ends of the U forming hooks facing
towards each other. When in the cocked position, the notched hammer
lug lies between these hooks and is held by one or the other as explained
hereafter. This feature prevents the gun from firing automatically as the
trigger must be released and again pulled before the gun will fire. The
safety sear is pivoted on a lug on the trigger guard directly over the
trigger and acts as a block to the trigger during the functioning of the
operating mechanism. The safety sear is spring actuated by a spring
follower seated in the lug. The trigger safety is in the form of a cylinder,
positioned to the rear of the trigger and operating laterally in the trigger
guard to block or free the trigger for pulling to fire the gun.
200
TM 9-285
61
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720

C4

d °O EO ~~~~~C
tk B

o ,

0I0
a

20

201
TM 9-285
62-63
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
62. DATA.
Gage of bore ............................................. 12
Boring of barrel--riot type ........................... Cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting skeet type ........... Improved cylinder
Boring of barrel-sporting trap type .................. Full choke
Type of action ................................ Semiautomatic
Type of -firing mechanism .......................... Hammerless
Type of magazine ................................... Tubular
Capacity of magazine ................................ 4 rounds
Length of barrel ' riot type ................. ........... 20 in.
Length of barrel-sporting skeet type ..................... 26 in.
Length of barrel-sporting trap type ...................... 30 in.
Length of stock, receiver and fore-end assembled (approx.). . 321/2 in.
Length of assembled gun-riot type (approx.) ........... 391/2 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.)... 451/2 in.
Length of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) .... 491/2 in.
Weight of assembled gun-riot type (approx.) ............. 75/% lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting skeet type (approx.) ....... 8 lb
Weight of assembled gun-sporting trap type (approx.) ..... 81/4 lb

63. OPERATION.
a. This gun is of the semiautomatic type as already explained and is
loaded and cocked by the force of recoil after the first shot. The only
action necessary, thereafter, to fire the gun is to pull the trigger. The first
shell, however, must be loaded into the chamber and the hammer cocked
by manual operation. This is accomplished by retraction of the breech
bolt by means of the operating slide (fig. 120).
CAUTION: During operation, the muzzle of the gun should always be
pointing at a safe spot and the finger kept outside of the trigger guard bow.
h. When the gun is operated as a repeater, the shells are loaded into.
the magazine, and a shell then transferred to the chamber, and the ham-
mer cocked by manual retraction of the -slide as already stated. When
operating the gun as a single loader, the bolt can be retracted and hung
in the rearward (open) position by retraction of the operating slide.
This operation unlocks the bolt from the barrel, pulls it to the rear, and
engages it with the dog of the carrier to hang it in the rearward position.
The bolt is again released to move forward by pressing the carrier latch
button, thus allowing the carrier to rise and the dog to release the bolt.
The bolt springs forward and pushes the shell into the chamber of the
barrel, and bolt and barrel are locked together as already explained,
c. The double hook on the trigger retains the hammer in the cocked
position whether the trigger is released between shots or not. The trigger,
202
TM 9-285
63
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720
however, must be released and again pulled before the hammer is
released from the cocked position to fire the gun.
d. The safety sear blocks the trigger from being pulled during the
rearward and forward movement of the operating mechanism. The safety
sear is engaged with the trigger to block its being pulled by the spring
action of the safety sear follower and disengaged from the trigger by the
rear end of the link as the link locks the bolt and barrel together at the
end of the forward movement. This feature prevents premature firing of
the gun before the bolt and barrel are locked together in the forward
position.
e. The trigger safety is positioned in the rear of the guard bow and
operates laterally in the trigger guard (fig. 118). When pushed fully to
the left, the trigger is free to be pulled and the gun fired. When pushed
fully to the right, the trigger is blocked and cannot be pulled nor the gun
fired. With a shell in the barrel chamber, it is best to block the trigger by
pushing the safety to the right, as explained above, unless the gun is to be
fired immediately.
f. To Load the Magazine.
(1) With breech bolt locked, press the carrier latch button fully in-
ward to release the forward end of the carrier. Press shell nose down
against carrier until it can be pushed forward against the magazine fol-
lower and into the rear of the magazine (fig. 119). As the base of the
shell passes the end of carrier latch, pressure on latch button should be
released slightly. Push the shell forward into the magazine until the base
of the shell passes and is retained by the end of the carrier latch.
(2) Holding the carrier latch button depressed with the thumb, load
another shell in the same manner, pressing it against the base of the first
shell loaded, and push both shells forward into the magazine until the
second shell is caught and held as above. When the carrier latch button
is released, the rearmost shell will spring back and be held by the locking
block latch which projects from the bottom of the bolt.
g. To Unload the Magazine. Set safety at safe by pushing it all
the way to the right. Then, depressing carrier latch button, press carrier
against breech bolt and holding carrier thus, pull operating handle part
way to the rear to release the shell from the magazine onto carrier, and
lift shell from receiver. The shell in the barrel (if loaded) will return to
the barrel when the slide is released.
h. To Load the Barrel from the Magazine.
(1) With the magazine loaded, set safety at safe by pushing all the
way to the right. Then, pull the operating slide fully to the rear and
release. This action will cock the hammer and feed a shell from magazine
203
TM 9-285
63
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

l 4C

IL
a O
CE

~~~~~(C
C4~ 0

K W~~~~~~~~~
O I,
0
., E

at s~~~~~~
I
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~- a
o m ·a
Is ~~~~~~~~a
6X~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1

an~~~~~~~~
fj~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~4

.D j m
a, ~~ J .
,g," 0

U. I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I
ao a,

204~~~~~~~~~~~0

2~
0

04-
TM 9-285
63
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720
to receiver. When the breech bolt springs forward, it will push the shell
into the barrel and close and lock the action.
CAUTION: The fingers should be kept clear of the ejection opening
in the receiver as well as the path of the operating slide handle during this
operation, to prevent injury to fingers due to the closing of the action.
(2) After a shell has been loaded from the magazine into the barrel,
another shell may be loaded into the magazine (f above).

i. To Load the Barrel Only. With the magazine empty, set safety
at safe by pushing all the way to the right and pull operating slide to rear
and hang the bolt (fig. 120). Then, place a shell, nose forward, into ejec-
tion opening in the right side of the receiver and allow it to settle on the
carrier. With fingers clear of ejection opening and path of the operating
slide handle, press carrier latch button. The breech bolt will thus be
released to spring forward; move the shell into the barrel and close and
lock the gun. The barrel is now loaded and the hammer cocked. With the
barrel loaded, it is best to allow the safety to remain at safe to block the
trigger unless the gun is to be fired immediately.

j. To Unload Barrel Without Unloading Magazine. If it is neces-


sary to unload the barrel without unloading the magazine, it can be
accomplished as follows:
(1) Set safety at safe by pushing all the way to the right. Press carrier
latch button and then push shell, which protrudes part way from the
magazine, fully into the magazine until it is retained by the forward end
of the carrier latch. Keep shell in magazine by continuing to press on
latch button and retract operating slide to eject shell in barrel. Then, still
pressing on carrier latch button, allow breech bolt to close slowly (fig.
121), watching to see that the bolt closes on an empty barrel chamber.

k. To Completely Unload the Gun. When gun is completely loaded


(barrel and magazine) it should be unloaded as follows:
(1) Set safety at safe by pushing all the way to the right.
(2) Unload magazine first (g above).
(3) With magazine empty, unload the barrel chamber by pulling
operating slide fully to rear, thus ejecting the shell in the barrel.
(4) Inspect barrel chamber and magazine to make sure gun is fully
unloaded.
(5) When gun is fully unloaded, the action may be closed by holding
operating handle, pressing carrier latch button, and easing breech bolt to
the forward position.
205
TM 9-285
63
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

N~~~~~

i~~~~~~~~~~~
a. h,

a
CD

i2 [~ '"
0
U,

0C z 0

i~~~~~~~~~~~tI

IVP
;!i ~
* m
z

~
I`
W)~~~~~~~~~~v Lu~~~~~~~~~~~u

-C IA

ii ~ ~~~~
<~~~~~
4.
V) U
1
Z~~ ~ -

jI ii
w
o

z~
Lu
0~~~
~

h~~~~~=,
I
5
*S~L

a
',
-
<lB

C4~~~~~~~~~~~~~4

I~~~~~~~
I
1.1~

a,
~~1~ 5

e :la~~~~~~
i~~~~~~~~~i

206

206
TM 9-285
64
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720
64. FUNCTIONING.
a. As already explained, the functioning of this semiautomatic gun is
accomplished through the force of recoil produced by the expanding
powder gas acting through the shell against the breech bolt when the gun
is fired. In this explanation of functioning, it is assumed that the gun is
fully loaded and has just been fired.

b. As the powder gas expands, it forces the breech bolt to the rear
along with the barrel which is locked to it by the locking block. As the
bolt moves rearward, it pushes the link, which is pivoted to the rear end
of the locking block, to the rear against the force of the expanded action
spring with which it is engaged. The barrel is, at the same time, pulled to
the rear by the breech bolt against the force of the expanded recoil spring
and the resistance of the friction ring and piece, mounted on the magazine
tube, acting against the rear face of the barrel guide attached to the barrel.
Thus the action spring and recoil spring are compressed during the rear-
ward movement by the bolt and barrel respectively. The resistance to
compression of these springs and the friction set up by the contracted
friction piece act together against the force of the expanding powder gas
upon the breech bolt (par. 67).

c. The breech bolt and barrel move to the rear, locked together, to the
end of the rearward movement. This point is roughly determined by the
opposing force of the springs and friction piece as explained above which
stops the groups and then starts them forward. As the breech bolt and
barrel start forward, the dog on the rear of the carrier, which has been
pressing upon the lower face of the bolt through the pressure of the car-
rier plunger spring, engages with the operating slide and checks the slide.
The forward end of the carrier is prevented from rotating upward by the
carrier latch. The operating slide, which has been bearing on the forward
face of the link likewise checks the link. The bolt continuing forward,
unlocks itself from the barrel extension as the locking block is rotated
downward out of the locking aperture in the barrel by the momentarily
held link pulling upon the locking block. As the bolt is unlocked the
barrel springs forward, propelled by the action of the expanding recoil
spring bearing on the rear face of the barrel guide. As the locking block
rotates downward, it cams the firing pin back into the bolt, and holds it
there until the bolt and barrel are again locked together.

d. The bolt is momentarily held and released as follows:


(1) When the bolt is unlocked, it is held to the rear by the engagement
of the carrier dog with the operating slide and link as already explained.
The bolt is held thus until the forward end of the carrier, which has been
held in the lower position by the carrier latch, is freed to be rotated
upward by the force of the action spring acting through the link and slide
207
TM 9-285
64
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
which are bearing upon the carrier dog. As the forward end of the carrier
rises, the dog is disengaged from the slide and the bolt is freed to move
forward.
(2) The carrier latch is disengaged from the carrier by the shell, which
has been fed from the magazine into the receiver. This shell is held by
the shell stop and released by the barrel as it springs forward when
unlocked (f below). The released shell springs to the rear and strikes and
depresses the rear end of the carrier latch, and thus disengages the latch
from the carrier. The carrier is thus freed to be rotated upward as
explained above.
(3) When the last shell has been fired, the bolt is held to the rear by
the carrier dog as explained. There being no shell in the receiver to
release the carrier by striking and depressing the carrier latch, the bolt
will be held until the carrier is released, by manual pressure on the carrier
latch button.
(4) The bolt thus released, as explained above, moves forward pro-
pelled by the action spring through the medium of the link and lock-
ing block. As the bolt is pushed forward, the link is at an angle to the
axis of the bolt. In this position, the forward end of the link lies above
the rear end of the locking block latch which is pivoted in the bolt and
bearing on a shoulder on the locking block, preventing its rotation up-
ward. The link thus pushes the bolt forward although the link is pivoted
to the lower end of the locking block. As the bolt thus propelled nears
the forward position, the rear end of the link rises until the link is nearly
parallel to the axis of the bolt. As the rear end of the link rises, the for-
ward end levers the locking block latch down from engagement with
the, locking block, and immediately begins to rotate the locking block
upward in the bolt. This movement is so timed that the locking block
is rotated fully through the bolt and into the locking aperture in the
barrel extension as the bolt reaches the forward position, thus locking
bolt and barrel together again. The rear lug on the locking block, strik-
ing the sloping rear end of the barrel extension, cushions the bolt and
starts the locking block rotating upward.
e. When the bolt moves rearward on the recoil movement, the fired
shell, held in position on the face of the bolt by the extractor on the right
hand side, moves to the rear with the bolt and barrel. As the barrel is
freed from the bolt at the beginning of the forward (counterrecoil)
movement, it springs forward as explained. As the rear of the barrel
extension passes the face of the bolt, the ejector pinned in the left wall
of the barrel extension strikes the base of the fired shell held to the face
of the bolt by the extractor and knocks it to the right out of the ejection
opening in the receiver, pivoting it about the extractor.
208
TM 9-285
64
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720
f. As the barrel extension continues forward, it strikes and disen-
gages the shell stop which has been holding the next shell to be loaded.
The shell springs rearward, propelled by the force of the magazine
spring, to release the carrier latch and hence the bolt, and is then lifted
to the -bore line by the carrier which is rotated up by the link as ex-
plained in d above. The shell is pushed forward into the barrel chamber
by the bolt, as it moves forward, and the carrier spring returns the car-
rier to the lower position.
g. As the rear end of the carrier latch is depressed by the shell and
thus disengaged from the carrier, the forward end is rotated outward
into the path of the next shell in the magazine. The latch holds the
shell thus until the carrier moves downward again after having lifted
the previous shell to the bore line. As the carrier moves downward, it
releases the rear end of the carrier latch which it has been holding de-
pressed. As the rear end springs outward, the forward end rotates in
towards the receiver wall and thus frees the shell it has been holding.
This shell springs to the rear and is held by the forward end of the lock-
ing block latch on the bolt, which has now reached the forward position,
as the carrier reaches the lower position and thus retains the shell in
the receiver. The above functioning prevents double feeding. The shell
is held thus by the locking block latch until the bolt starts rearward
again, when the shell follows it until caught and retained by the shell
stop, from which it is subsequently released by the barrel extension on
its forward movement as already explained.
h. The hammer is cocked by the link, which straddles it, on the rear-
ward movement of the bolt. The sear hooks on the trigger (fig. 117)
engage with notches in the hammer to hold it in the cocked position,
whether the trigger has been released between shots or not. The safety
sear blocks the trigger preventing its being pulled until disengaged by
the link, as the bolt reaches the locked position. Detailed explanation
of the functioning of the trigger is as follows:.
(1) The upper part of the trigger is shaped like a U with two sear
hooks facing each other. A lug projecting from the rear face of the
hammer is notched on both sides to engage with the sear hooks on the
trigger. The notched lug of the hammer rotates down between these
hooks when cammed back by the link on the rearward movement of the
bolt. If the trigger is in the forward (released) position, the forward hook
engages with the forward notch in the hammer. If the trigger is in the
rearward (pulled) position, the rear hook engages with the rear notch
in the hammer. Thus the hammer is caught and held in the cocked posi-
tion whether the trigger has been released or not. If the trigger has been
held in the pulled position and the hammer caught by the rear hook,
the trigger must be released and again pulled before the gun can be
818074 0- 48- 14 209
TM 9-285
64-65
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
fired. Release of the trigger disengages the rear hook, but the hammer
is immediately caught and held by the forward hook. When the trigger
is again pulled, the hammer is released and rotates forward propelled
by the force of the main spring, to strike the rear of the firing pin posi-
tioned in the breech bolt. With the locking block in the raised (locking)
position, the firing pin is free to move forward in the bolt.
(2) The safety sear, however, has been engaged with the rear of the
trigger by the action of its spring follower. In order to pull the trigger,
the safety sear must be disengaged. This is accomplished by the rear
end of the link, which straddles the safety sear, as it reaches the forward
position to lock the bolt. This feature prevents the gun from being pre-
maturely fired before the breech bolt is locked to the barrel.

i. The trigger safety functions laterally in the trigger guard just


behind the trigger. A web on the rear face of the lower part of the trigger
slips into a notch in the safety when the safety is pushed to the left and
thus disengaged, allowing the trigger to be pulled. When the safety is
shifted laterally to the right, the trigger web cannot enter the notch in
the safety and therefore cannot be pulled.

65. REMOVAL OF GROUPS (figs. 115, 122, and 123).


a. Groups and parts should be removed and replaced in the order
given below. Groups and parts when removed should be placed on a
clean, flat surface and care observed to prevent loss of screws and small
parts. Remove as follows:
(1) BARREL AND FORE END.
(a) With breech bolt in the forward position and gun held in vertical
position, rest butt on solid surface.
(b) Push barrel back into receiver a short distance and hold in that
position to relieve pressure of recoil spring on fore end; unscrew magazine
cap at forward enid of fore end (fig. 124).
(c) When magazine cap is fully. disengaged from magazine, ease barrel
upward out of receiver until free of pressure of recoil spring (fig. 125).
(d) Slide fore end up and off magazine and barrel and then pull barrel
up and out of receiver.
(e) Note relative positions of friction piece, friction ring, and recoil
spring as mounted on the magazine tube and if removed, replace in identi-
cal manner (par. 67) for assembly of these parts for varying recoil
pressures.
(f) Replace fore end on magazine tube, press down against recoil
spring, and screw on magazine cap to hold recoil spring, friction piece and
friction ring in position. Exercise care not to lose friction piece spring.
CAUTION: When breech bolt is in rearward position, do not press
210
TM 9-285
65
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720

"-) 0 :,-, , <

0
v uii /t
C

,~ ~~ ~~~~~~~~~-,
<: u
/
o~~~~~~~~~~~~~u
o
o _
b.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I<
~
LL~

$ u~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~u
< ° < I0
,i Lug L a

< d /LI '


E m

m;'; - 01

LL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I
XF- ' ' -\ ¢
~
,,u ~~~~~~~~~~~~~
%
S t i3z

m
;)
:~fo 21 U " 0 Y~~
z 0.
z ) O
0 :

j:_~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~L Z z L

6·~~~~~~~~-

,9 L~~~~~~~~~~~L
oU u

it!~~~~i

211
TM 9-285
65
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

zXo
0
"

0~~~~~~
I; u ~ o

ZU Lyo ~.~~~~~~~~~~~I
'r Z
_ u u
N~~

I/!<uxu
Lu ~-L ~ ~ X" a

0
CL
64
n~ ~~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ n- <~~~~
L

O."s~~~~~ ·

o~~
0.> a
¼ zz
I~~:- x~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-J u
Z

LU
m ;g z a

za
uj
,,~~~~1

U 0 Iii

212
TM 9-285
65
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720

- 'V BARREL - BARREL

I-

MAGAZINE CAP

FORE-END

figure 124-REinIrEl

Savage Shotgun, M720 Savage Shotgun, M720


213
TM 9-285
65
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
carrier latch button allowing breech bolt to spring forward, with barrel
removed from receiver. To remove tension from action spring, grasp
operating slide handle firmly; then, press carrier latch button and ease
bolt to forward position against force of action spring.
(2) BUTT STOCK. Due to expansion of action spring when breech
bolt is removed it is necessary to remove this spring before removing
the groups from the receiver. To remove the spring, the butt stock must
first be removed. This is accomplished by removing the butt stock
screw locking screw and then the butt stock screw from under side of
trigger plate tang (rear screw in tang) and withdrawing butt stock to
rear from receiver and action spring tube. (If withdrawal of butt stock
is difficult, remove trigger guard pin, press carrier latch button to release
carrier, and press forward end of trigger guard upward slightly into
receiver.)

(3) TRIGGER GUARD GROUP.


(a) With stock removed, remove trigger guard pin locking screw from
lower left hand side of receiver (near center) and, using pin drift, drive
out trigger guard pin from right to left.
(b) Remove trigger guard screw from lower rear corner of left side
of receiver, and pull trigger guard group downward out of receiver.
(4) CARRIER.
(a) Press forward end of carrier spring from under retaining stud
and remove spring from pivot stud. Be careful spring does not fly out
when disengaging forward end.
(b) Remove locking screws and then carrier screws from right and
left sides of receiver and lift out carrier. Carrier screws are largest screws
in sides of receiver, just to rear of center.
(5) ACTION SPRING.
(a) With butt stock, trigger plate, and carrier removed, press in the
wooden plug at rear end of action spring tube and using pin drift, push
out cross pin.
(b) Holding plug with finger against force of spring, withdraw drift
slowly and ease plug and spring to rear out of tube. When fully ex-
panded pull plug, spring, and spring follower to rear out of tube.
(6) BREECH BOLT AND LINK. Recoil spring, friction piece, and ring
must be moved forward on the magazine tube before breech bolt can be
removed from receiver.
(a) Move breech bolt until locking block latch pin alines with hole
in left side of receiver to rear of shell stop. Then, using straight pin
drift, push clear through breech bolt and receiver; then, withdraw pin
drift slowly, at same time holding down locking block latch against
214
TM 9-285
65-66
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720
force of latch spring. When drift is removed, ease latch upward and
remove latch and latch spring.
(b) Swing rear end of link downward to clear operating slide, and
move breech bolt forward out of receiver with the link attached. The
operating slide will slide out of the breech bolt as it moves forward and
the handle of the slide strikes the forward edge of the ejection opening
in the receiver.

66. REPLACEMENT OF GROUPS.


a. Groups and parts should be thoroughly cleaned, lightly oiled, and
lubricated, if necessary, before replacing. Replace as follows:

(1) BREECH BOLT AND LINK.


(a) With recoil spring, friction piece, and ring moved forward on the
magazine tube, slide the link and breech bolt, link first, into the forward
end of the receiver, so that guides on lower face of breech bolt mate with
guideways in receiver.
(b) Move breech bolt to rear into receiver until half the bolt has
entered. Then, holding operating slide by the handle, slip rear end into
receiver, to rear of bolt, through ejection opening in right side. Hold
slide parallel to bolt and move bolt to rear, at the same time mating
guides on slide with guideways in right side of bolt. As slide enters bolt,
move bolt to rear thus seating slide in bolt. The link must be pointed
downward to accomplish the mating.
(c) Slide recoil spring, friction piece, and friction ring to rear on
magazine tube, in their proper order and position, and replace fore end
to hold in place (par. 65 a (1) (f)).
(d) Slide breech bolt to rear until locking block latch pin holes in
bolt and receiver aline, insert latch pin through left side of receiver and
left wall of bolt to hold in position; then, replace latch spring in seat in
bolt and place latch on top of spring, with long flat end to rear and
drilled lug down. Press latch down on spring; aline hole in latch with
holes in receiver and bolt and push pin through latch and bolt until
flush with both sides of bolt. Move bolt to see that pin does not interfere
with receiver.

(2) CARRIER.
(a) With receiver bottom side up, move breech bolt forward and
push link towards top of receiver.
(b) With carrier dog up and to rear, slide carrier beneath spring re-
taining stud, into receiver, and aline screw holes in carrier with those in
receiver. Replace carrier screws; then, turn screws until cuts in screw
heads aline with countersinks for locking screws and replace locking
215
TM 9-285
66
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
screws. Catch threads in both carrier screws before tightening either
screw. Be careful not to cross threads.
(c) Slide carrier spring onto the pivot stud in left rear of receiver so
that short leaf rests on rear of carrier. Then, press down long leaf of
spring and slip under stud head just forward of pivot stud. Hold spring
to prevent slipping from pivot stud while positioning long leaf.

(3) ACTION SPRING.


(a) With breech bolt forward, insert action spring, follower first
(assembled to spring), into rear end of action spring tube. Push through
tube and mate rear nose of link with indent in follower.
(b) Press action spring into tube until head of wooden plug (assem-
bled to spring) is flush with end of tube. Turn plug until pin hole in
plug alines with that in tube and insert plug pin. Still holding plug, push
pin through until flush with tube. A pin drift may be used to hold
plug while inserting pin.

(4) TRIGGER GUARD GROUP.


(a) With the breech bolt forward and the hammer cocked, press
trigger guard group with tang to rear horizontally upward into the rear
under side of the receiver and adjust until pin'and screw holes in trigger
plate and receiver aline. If guard does not seat easily, retract operating
slide slightly to allow safety sear to enter slot in link.
(b) Insert trigger guard pin from left side and push through until
head is flush with face of receiver.
(c) Using screwdriver in slotted head of pin, turn pin until counter-
sink in pin head alines with locking screw countersink in receiver. Then,
replace locking screw.
(d) Insert trigger guard screw from left side of receiver; catch threads
and turn down tightly. Aline cut in screw head with locking screw coun-
tersink in receiver and replace locking screw.

(5) BUTT STOCK.


(a) Push butt stock on over action spring tube until stock fits snugly
and evenly against rear face of receiver and butt stock screw hole in
trigger guard tang and stock aline. Stock may be seated by striking
butt smartly with heel of hand. Do not strike butt on hard surface.
(b) Replace butt stock screw and screw in tightly until cut in screw
head alines with locking screw countersink in tang; then replace locking
screw. If replacement of butt stock is difficult, remove trigger guard pin.
Replace pin after assembly.

(6) BARREL AND FORE END.


(a) With breech bolt forward, fore end removed from magazine tube,
216
TM 9-285
66-67
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720
and recoil spring, friction piece, and friction ring in their proper order
and position on magazine tube, hold gun in vertical position and rest
butt of stock on firm surface.
(b) Slide the barrel extension into open.end of receiver so that guides
on barrel extension mate with guideways in receiver and barrel guide
slips over magazine tube and bears on friction assembly on tube.
(c) Slide fore end on barrel and magazine tube as far as it will go.
(d) Grasp muzzle end of barrel and push barrel down into receiver
against spring force, until the barrel extension is wholly within the
receiver. Then, press fore end down until it mates evenly with receiver
and engage and screw down magazine cap on forward end of magazine
tube until tight. Be sure fore end is fully mated flush with receiver and
magazine cap is tight.
(e) Release barrel and operate gun to test assembly.

67. USE OF FRICTION RING.


a. Proper use of the friction ring and piece will reduce recoil and
prevent excessive wear of parts. The adjustment of these parts in this
(Savage) gun varies slightly from that of the Remington guns. The
parts also vary slightly in design; the friction ring on the Remington
guns has an inside bevel on one face and an outside bevel on the other,
while that of this (Savage) gun has an inside bevel on one face only.
b. To change friction adjustment, remove fore end and barrel and
place the recoil spring, friction piece (with friction spring assembled),
and friction ring as prescribed below.
(1) FOR HEAVY LOADS. When heavy loads are used ranging from
31/4 to 33/4 drams (or equivalent) of powder, assemble as follows:
(a) Place the recoil spring on the magazine tube first, so that it bears
directly against the receiver.
(b) Place the friction ring next on the magazine tube with the inside
bevel facing forward.
(c) Place the friction piece (with friction spring assembled) on the
magazine tube ahead of the friction ring.
NOTE: Refer to figure 126, position 1.
(2) FOR LIGHT LOADS. When light loads are used, ,3 drams (or
equivalent) or less of powder, assemble as follows:
(a) Place friction ring on the magazine tube first, with inside bevel
facing to rear towards receiver.
(b) Place the recoil spring on the magazine tube next.
(c) Place the friction piece (with friction spring assembled) ahead of
recoil spring.
NOTE: Refer to figure 126, position 2.
217
TM 9-285
67
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Z a
°P rC~
a .
4

Z L

-I~Z -

O< 0,

z z

>~~~~~~~~~~~~0

:218
TM 9-285
67-68
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720
c. Magazine tube should be kept free from foreign matter and rust,
and lightly oiled. If gun does not operate smoothly and freely, lubricate
friction piece and ring lightly. If friction is too great, gun may fail to
eject shell when fired. If gun fails to eject, clean and lubricate magazine
tube and friction piece and ring. If this does not correct fault and fric-
tion is adjusted for heavy loads, change adjustment to that for light
loads, and test. If action slams too much with this lighter friction adjust-
ment, turn gun over to ordnance personnel for correction.

68. FIELD INSPECTION.


a. With the gun completely assembled, test the mechanism for proper
functioning. Fired shells may often be used for testing when dummy
shells are not available, by turning in the uncrimped end so that the
length of the shell will approximate that of a live shell. Use of live
shells for testing is prohibited.
CAUTION: Keep fingers clear of ejection opening and path of operat-
ing slide handle when operating gun, as bolt moves forward with con-
siderable force when released and may cause injury to operator. Be
sure gun is fully unloaded before inspection.
b. Operate the Gun as Follows:
(1) Grasping fore end with left hand and operating slide handle with
right hand, pull breech bolt all the way to the rear until bolt is caught
and hung by carrier dog. Barrel should remain in forward position.
(2) With bolt hung in rearward position, press carrier latch release
button and allow the bolt to spring forward. The bolt should spring for-
ward smartly to the extreme forward position to lock with the barrel.
(3) Load a dummy shell into the magazine (par. 63 f). Retract
breech bolt fully by means of operating slide and attempt to hang bolt
in rearward position. Bolt should not hang, due to shell bearing on
carrier latch as explained (par. 64 d).
(4) Allow bolt to spring forward to load the shell into the barrel
chamber. Retract bolt fully by means of operating slide to eject the
shell and attempt to hang bolt. Bolt should hang, as there is no longer
a shell in the receiver to bear upon the carrier latch.
(5) Test gun for doubling as follows:
(a) With gun fully unloaded, pull bolt fully to the rear by means of
the operating slide handle, until it is hung by the carrier dog.
(b) Hold bolt thus with right hand and with the left hand press car-
rier latch button to release the bolt and ease bolt forward just enough
to release it from the hung position (about 1/4 inch). Then, with left
hand, pull the trigger.
219
TM 9-285
68
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(c) Holding trigger retracted ease bolt slowly forward to the locked
position.
(d) Then, ease pull on trigger slowly until entirely removed and the
trigger moves forward. The hammer should not release to fire the gun
during the slow release of the trigger.
(e) When trigger is fully released, pull it again. The hammer should
release to fire the gun when the trigger is thus pulled. This test is to
insure that the gun will not double (fire automatically) if the trigger
is not released. To insure the gun will not double, it is desirable that the
movement of the trigger at the center point of finger contact be not less
than 16/ inch (par. 68 c (10) ).
(6) Retract the bolt fully and, then, holding operating slide, press
carrier latch release button and allow the bolt to close slowly. Release
and attempt to pull the trigger at intervals during the closing of the bolt.
The trigger should not pull to fire the gun until the operating slide
handle is within lf to 1/8 inch from the normal forward position. This
test is to make sure that the gun will not fire until the locking block is
engaged with the recoil shoulder of the barrel extension and bolt and
barrel thus locked together.
(7) Retract bolt fully and then allow it to move fully forward to
the locked position, thereby cocking the hammer. Then push the trigger
safety all the way to the right and attempt to pull the trigger. The trigger
should not pull, nor the hammer release to fire the gun.
(8) Push the safety all the way to the left, and attempt to pull the
trigger. The trigger should pull and the hammer release to fire the gun.

c. When the gun does not operate and function smoothly when
tested as above, damaged or improperly assembled parts are indicated
as follows:

(1) BOLT DOES NOT HANG IN REARWARD POSITION WITH GUN


UNLOADED. May be due to broken or worn carrier dog, worn retaining
notch of operating slide or link shoulder, broken or missing carrier latch
spring, broken carrier latch or foreign matter under forward end of
latch.

(2) BOLT DOES NOT SPRING FORWARD SMARTLY WHEN RELEASED.


May be due to broken action spring, link broken or improperly seated
in action spring follower, jammed or broken carrier or carrier latch,
broken locking block latch, or broken or missing latch spring.
(3) BOLT DOES NOT LOCK TO BARREL. May be due to foreign matter
in receiver or barrel extension, burred locking block or locking apertures
in barrel extension, or broken or jammed locking block latch spring.
220
TM 9-285
68
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720
(4) CARRIER DOES NOT FUNCTION TO HANG BOLT OR LIFT SHELL.
May be due to broken carrier dog or follower spring, jammed or broken
carrier latch, foreign matter in mechanism, or worn or broken operating
slide.
(5) CARRIER DOES NOT RETURN TO LOWER POSITION. May be due
to broken or improperly assembled carrier spring, or jammed or broken
carrier latch.
(6) SHELL DOES NOT SPRING FROM MAGAZINE WHEN RELEASED.
May be due to broken magazine spring, dented tube, bent follower, or
foreign matter or rust in tube.
(7) HAMMER DOES NOT COCK, OR SLIPS. May be due to worn or
broken hooks on trigger, or notches in hammer, broken trigger or main-
spring, or foreign matter in mechanism.
(8) SAFETY SEAR DOES NOT RELEASE TRIGGER WHEN BOLT IS
LOCKED. May be due to broken or jammed safety sear spring follower,
or damaged safety sear.
(9) TRIGGER SAFETY DOES NOT OPERATE. May be due to burred
web on rear of trigger, burs in slot in safety, broken or bent leaf on
trigger spring, which bears on safety ball, or foreign matter in aperture.
(10) HAMMER IS RELEASED WHEN TESTED (h (5) above). May be
due to worn or broken hooks on hammer or trigger, foreign matter in
notches or spread or broken upper U-end of trigger.
(11) THE FOLLOWING MALFUNCTIONS MAY OCCUR WHEN GUN IS
FIRED:
(a) Barrel Is Not Unlocked from Breech Bolt. May be due to broken
or damaged carrier dog or carrier latch, worn operating slide notch, or
broken slide.
(b) Shells Do Not Eject. May be due to broken ejector in barrel
extension, broken extractor or incorrect friction adjustment (par. 67 c).
(c) Shell Stop Does Not Function. May be due to broken stop or
broken or missing stop spring.
(d) Two Shells Enter Receiver at Once (Double Feeding). May be
due to broken carrier latch or carrier dog.
d. Inspect barrel and test trigger pull (par. 3 n).
e. In addition to inspection of the gun for operation anr. functioning,
the gun should be inspected generally for condition, and defects noted.
Attention should be directed to such defects as cracked wooden parts,
cracked or deformed metal parts, dented or rusted magazine tube, loose
screws and pins, loose or binding parts or assemblies, loose barrel or
magazine, loose stock or butt plate, missing locking screws, rust, dents,
burs or excessive wear of parts. If defects are such that early malfunc-
221
TM 9-285
68-69
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
tion of the gun is indicated, the gun should be turned over to ordnance
personnel for inspection and correction.
f. Where defects and malfunctions cannot be remedied by cleaning,
lubrication, and simple adjustments of assembly, which lie within the
scope of using troops, the gun should be turned over to ordnance per-
sonnel for a thorough inspection, correction, and/or repair.
g. Removal of burs on working parts, trigger adjustments, and like
corrections should not be attempted by using troops, as stoning of parts
must be exacting, the angle of the faces concerned must not be changed,
and volume of metal must not be materially reduced.
h. In addition to inspection of the barrel (d above), it should be
inspected for looseness and alinement in the barrel extension. The draw
marks on barrel and barrel extension should be in alinement, as mis-
alinement of these parts will cause binding of the barrel guide with the
magazine tube and affect the functioning of the gun when assembled.
If misalinement is evident, the gun should be turned over to ordnance
personnel for correction.
i. If shell appears unnecessarily loose in chamber with breech bolt
locked, the gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel to be
checked for headspace and worn locking block.
j. Adjustment and maintenance of the gun, in the case of using
troops, is limited to the removal and replacement of the parts and
groups of parts (pars. 65 and 66), together with cleaning, lubrication,
and such adjustments as are necessary in assembling the gun as outlined.

69. CLEANING AND LUBRICATION.


a. Cleaning, oiling, and lubrication may be accomplished in a mgn-
ner similar to that described for the Winchester Gun M97 (par. 11).
Attention should be given to corresponding parts and surfaces when
lubricating.
b. The fore end and barrel should be removed from the receiver for
cleaning the bore, and for thorough cleaning, the groups should be re-
moved from the receiver and assemblies cleaned, oiled, and lubricated
as directed.
c. Points to lubricate are:
(1) Outer surface of barrel extension and barrel extension guides.
(2) Friction piece and friction ring, when necessary, where they bear.
on magazine tube. Tube should be kept clean and lightly oiled. Too
much oil will reduce friction and prevent proper functioning of gun
(par. 67 c).
(3) Breech bolt guides and surface, occasionally.
(4) Link pin, connecting locking block with link.
222
TM 9-285
69
SAVAGE SHOTGUN, 12-GAGE, M720
(5) Locking block guides.
(6) Trigger and hammer pins.
(7) Carrier (trunnion) screws.
(8) Action spring follower. Spring should be removed occasionally
and tube cleaned and oiled.
(9) Safety sear stud and spring follower.
d. Oiling and lubrication should be light, as excess oil collects for-
eign matter and powder residue which will become gummy, impede
functioning of gun, and produce undue wear of parts. In very cold
climates, oiling and lubrication should be reduced to a minimum. Only
surfaces showing signs of wear should be lightly oiled. Refer to "Special
Maintenance," section XI.

223
TM 9-285
70-71
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Section X

STOPPAGES AND IMMEDIATE ACTION


Paragraph
General .............................................. 70
Stoppages and immediate action ......................... 71
Malfunctions, possible cause and correction ................. 72
To remove a shell from the chamber ..... ........... 73
To remove a shell from the magazine ...................... 74
70. GENERAL.
a. A malfunction is the failure of a part or assembly of the gun to per-
form the operation it is designed for. A malfunction will result in a stop-
page, or failure of the gun mechanism to perform its function when
operated. Thus, the failure to extract a fired shell may be termed a mal-
function and the consequent blocking of the barrel chamber preventing
the loading of a live shell may be termed a stoppage. Such a stoppage may
be due to a malfunction of the mechanism or faulty ammunition such as
rupture of a shell.
h. Immediate action is the term applied to the automatic application
of a predetermined method of relieving the stoppage and thus putting the
gun in action as soon as possible.
c. Stoppages due to improper operation of the gun or faulty ammuni-
tion may, as a rule, be quickly relieved through immediate action. Stop-
pages caused by malfunction of parts due to wear, breakage, or improper
assembly, cannot as a rule be immediately relieved and to such imme-
diate action does not apply. Both types of stoppages will be covered
herein. The failure, its probable cause, and suggested correction will be
tabulated in order. Other stoppages may occur and should be dealt with
by analyzing their cause and, if possible, correcting it. A thorough under-
standing of the proper assembly, operation, and mechanical functioning
of the gun is essential in determining the cause of malfunctions and
stoppages.
71. STOPPAGES AND IMMEDIATE ACTION.
a. Stoppages and immediate action, as treated herein, comprises only
such procedure as can be immediately applied through direct operation
to put a gun in action which has become jammed or has failed to function.
If immediate action does not put the gun in action, it should be inspected
and remedied (par. 72).
b. In the slide action type of shotgun covered herein, proper operation
is of the greatest importance to the functioning of the gun. Reciprocation
224
TM 9-285
71
STOPPAGES AND IMMEDIATE ACTION
of the slide handle should be complete and positive. The slide handle
should be retracted smartly and fully to insure extraction and ejection
of the fired shell and positive locking and/or cocking of the hammer. The
slide handle should be pushed forward smartly and fully to insure positive
chambering of the shell, locking of the breech bolt, and engagement of
the slide lock. Unnecessary slamming of the mechanism should be
avoided. In the autoloading guns the operating slide should be pulled
fully to the rear and then released on the initial loading for the same
general reasons.
c. The table of Stoppages and Immediate Action given below is
intended for guidance only and should be applied to the gun in question
as applicable. The terms slide handle, slide lock, and safety are applicable
to like parts on the slide action guns covered herein. The term operating
slide is applicable to the autoloading guns covered herein. Knowledge
of the proper operation of the gun is assumed.
d. Stoppages and Application of Immediate Action.

Stoppages Immediate Action


Gun fails to fire. Reciprocate action slide handle or
retract and release operating
slide and fire.
Gun still fails to fire. Glance into magazine. If empty,
reload gun and fire.
Fed shell fails to chamber. Retract action slide handle, or
operating slide, remove fed shell
from receiver; check chamber
for shell or ruptured case. Re-
move obstruction; load and fire.
Gun fails to fire (shell fed and Inspect primers of ejected shells.
ejected when gun is operated). If normally indented, faulty am-
munition is indicated. Reload
gun and fire. If lightly indented,
broken, or obstructed, firing pin
is indicated.
Gun fails to fire (trigger fails to Check position of safety. Shift to
pull). fire position if on safe. Release
and again pull trigger in Rem-
ington Gun M31 and autoload-
ing guns.
Gun fails to fire (hammer unre- Check position of safety. Recipro-
leased). cate action slide handle or re-
tract and release operating slide,
and fire.
818074 0- 48- 15 225
TM 9-285
71-72
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
CAUTION: When gun fails to fire, point muzzle to safe spot and
turn ejection opening towards ground before operating to minimize effect
of a possible hangfire shell (par. 93).

72. MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSE AND CORRECTION.


a. Malfunctions may be caused by broken, damaged, or incorrectly
assembled parts, faulty ammunition, incorrect operation of the gun, or
the presence of fouling or foreign matter in the mechanism. Guns should
be kept clean and lubricated at all times and inspected for operation and
functioning at regular intervals or after encountering extreme conditions
such as dust storms or the like. The receivers of slide action and auto-
loading shotguns are comparatively open and foreign matter can easily
enter and clog the mechanisms. A clean, properly lubricated gun, inspected
at frequent intervals, and ammunition stored and handled to prevent
deterioration, is the best insurance against malfunctions and stoppages
(pars. 92 and 94).
b. As organization spare parts are not provided for these guns, only
such adjustments and minor repairs may be performed as lies within
the scope of using troops and can be accomplished without replacement
of parts. A gun which fails to operate or function properly should be
turned over to an officer or qualified mechanic for inspection. If such
inspection discloses malfunction due to damaged or broken parts, the
gun should be turned over to ordnance personnel for repair.
CAUTION: When handling loaded guns for malfunction, the safety
should be immediately placed at safe and gun handled with extreme
care until fully unloaded.
c. The slide action guns covered in this technical manual are in gen-
eral similar in basic design, operation, and functioning. The autoloading
guns covered are practically identical in these respects. As already ex-
plained, nomenclature of similar parts varies somewhat with the make
of gun. Malfunctions will therefore be covered generally herein as a
guide only to be applied to the specific gun if and when applicable.
d. The possible malfunctions listed herein and their probable causes
and remedies are not subject to immediate action and are within the
scope of using troops only as indicated. Before inspecting guns, slide
safety to safe position and fully unload gun.
e. Failure to Fire. Failure to fire may be due to a number of causes,
as follows:
(1) EMPTY CHAMBER
(a) Due to failure of operator to load, failure of operating mechanism
to feed, empty or jammed magazine.
226
TM 9-285
72
STOPPAGES AND IMMEDIATE ACTION
(b) To Remedy. Pump shell into chamber; load magazine; inspect
and clear magazine (par. 74).
(2) FAILURE OF SHELL.
(a) Due to faulty primer, short or broken firing pin or foreign matter
in firing pin aperture, broken hammer, broken or weak hammer spring.
(b) To Remedy. Examine primer of shell. If primer is deeply in-
dented, faulty ammunition is indicated; if lightly indented, damaged
firing mechanism is indicated and gun should be turned over to ordnance
personnel for correction.
(3) UNCOCKED HAMMER.
(a) Due to insufficient retraction of operating mechanism to cock
hammer when loading shell into chamber, broken hammer spring,
broken, bent, or incorrectly assembled hammer bar (Remington M31
and Ithaca M37 Guns), broken or burred sear or broken sear spring,
foreign matter in sear notch of hammer or broken sear or trigger spring.
In autoloading guns, incorrect assembly of friction ring and piece may
cause trouble (pars. 58 and 67).
(b) To Remedy. Test functioning of operating mechanism, firing
mechanism. Turn gun over to ordnance personnel for correction.
(4) SAFETY ENGAGED.
(a) Due to failure to disengage safety which will block trigger when
pulled, thus preventing release of hammer, foreign matter in safety aper-
ture or broken parts.
(b) To Remedy. Test positioning and retention of safety; turn gun
over to ordnance personnel for correction.
(5) UNLOCKED BREECH BOLT.
(a) Due to failure to move slide smartly and fully forward, obstruc-
tion in shell seat or extractor cuts in barrel, obstruction in top of receiver,
swollen shell preventing full seating in chamber, or slide lock failing to
hold slide in position.
.(b) To Remedy. Push slide smartly and fully forward; reciprocate
slide handle and relock bolt; examine above parts for obstruction or
foreign matter; check slide lock for function. If breech bolt does not lock
every time after removal of foreign matter, turn gun over to ordnance
personnel for correction.
f. Failure to Load. Failure of the mechanism to load a shell into
the chamber of the barrel may be due to a number of causes as follows:
(1) BLOCKED CHAMBER.
(a) Due to unextracted shell, or ruptured shell casing lodged in
chamber.
(b) To Remedy. Place safety at safe position. Remove shells from
227
TM 9-285
72
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
magazine and receiver; close and lock action; then, retract operating
handle to extract fired shell or remove (par. 73); examine chamber and
bore, and remove broken casing or obstruction if present.
(2) FAULTY EXTRACTION AND EJECTION.
(a) Due to malfunction of or broken extractors or ejector, thus allow-
ing unejected, fired shell to remain in chamber or receiver, thus block-
ing feeding of next live shell. In the Remington M11 and Sportsman,
and the Savage M720 Guns, this fault may be due to improper assembly
of friction ring and piece on magazine tube causing failure to eject
(pars. 58 and 67).
(b) To Remedy. Remove fired shell and examine ejector and ex-
tractors for malfunction or fracture. Check position of friction ring and
piece on magazine tube (autoloading guns) for load used. Examine
ejector spring of Remington Gun M10 for tension (par. 42 c (9) and
(12)).
(3) MALFUNCTIONS OF CARRIER.

(a) Due to damage, incorrect assembly, or presence of foreign matter,


thereby preventing its proper functioning and alinement of shell being
fed.
(b) To Remedy. Examine and test function of carrier and spring.
Turn gun over to ordnance personnel for correction.
(4) DOUBLE FEEDiNG.
(a) Usually caused by malfunction of shell stop (or carrier latch,
autoloading guns), thus allowing two shells to slip out of magazine into
receiver during feeding operation. May be caused by foreign matter under
shell stop or damaged stop.
(b) To Remedy. Examine and check function of stop (or latch); clean
and adjust. If damaged, turn gun over to ordnance personnel for correction.
g. Failure to Feed. Failure to feed a shell into position to be loaded
into the chamber may be due to blocking through failure of loading func-
tion or other causes as follows:
(1) JAMMED MAGAZINE.
(a) Due to broken or kinked magazine spring, dented or fouled tube,
bent or fouled follower or swollen shell.
(b) To Remedy. Move magazine follower back and forth in magazine
to loosen. If action of follower is not smooth and free, turn gun over to
ordnance personnel for correction.
(2) MALFUNCTION OF CARRIER. Same as in f (3) above.
(3) MALFUNCTION OF SHELL STOPS.

(a) Due to foreign matter under stop, broken or deformed stop, or


damaged or missing stop spring.
228
TM 9-285
72
STOPPAGES AND IMMEDIATE ACTION
(b) To Remedy. Check function of stop; clean if fouled. If damaged,
turn gun over to ordnance personnel for correction.
h. Failure of Action Slide Handle to Retract (Slide Action Guns).
Failure of the action slide handle to retract may be due to several reasons:
(1) FAILURE OF ACTION SLIDE LOCK TO DISENGAGE WHEN MANU-
ALLY OPERATED OR WHEN GUN Is FIRED.

(a) Due to improper operation, burs on slide lock, foreign matter in


assembly, or improper assembly or broken parts.
(b) To Remedy. Check function of lock, clean mechanism. If still
faulty, turn gun over to ordnance personnel for correction.
(2) FIRED SHELL STUCK IN CHAMBER.
(a) Due to swollen shell or fouling in chamber, preventing extraction
by usual methods.
(b) To Remedy. Push safety to safe position and unload magazine.
If extractors are visible, disengage from shell if possible; retract slide,
unload magazine, and remove shell in chamber (par. 73).
(3) JAMMED HAMMER, SLIDE OR BOLT.
(a) Due to foreign matter in mechanism, broken hammer, or hammer
spring, disengaged or broken hammer bar (Ithaca M37 or Remington
M31 Guns), or other part of firing mechanism.
(b) To Remedy. Slide safety to safe position; fully unload gun; re-
move trigger plate group. Inspect and clean mechanism. If damaged,
turn gun over to ordnance personnel for correction.
(4) JAMMED ACTION SLIDE BAR.
(a) Due to bent or twisted bar, causing excessive friction with receiver.
(b) To Remedy. Turn gun over to ordnance personnel for correction.
(5) JAMMED ACTION SLIDE LOCK.
(a) Due to deformed or burred lock mechanism or foreign matter in
assembly, thus preventing disengagement of lock from slide or action
slide bar, and preventing retraction of slide handle.
(b) To remedy. Slide safety to safe position. Fully unload gun. Check
function of lock; remove trigger plate group (or operating mechanism);
examine and clean lock mechanism. If still faulty, turn gun over to ord-
nance personnel for correction.
i. Safety F6 iRto GpelRate.
(1) May be due to burs on safety or housing, or foreign matter block-
ing safety, or missing or broken parts.
(2) To REMEDY. Remove trigger plate group. Check operation of
safety. Clean and lubricate as far as possible. If still inoperative, turn gun
over to ordnance personnel for correction.
j. Trigger Fails to Pull or Release.
229,
818074 0 - 48 - 16
TM 9-285
72
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
(1) The failure of the trigger to pull may be due to incorrectly posi-
tioned safety, burs, damaged or missing parts, or foreign matter in
mechanism. If trigger fails to release (move forward) before pulling, it
may be due to above reasons or broken or improperly assembled trigger
spring.
(2) To REMEDY. Remove trigger plate group. Check function of safety
and trigger and clean assembly. If damaged, turn over to ordnance per-
sonnel for correction.
k. Breech Bolt Fails to Lock.
(1) This may be caused by foreign matter in the extractor cuts in
receiver or barrel or in the locking aperture in top of the receiver (or
barrel extension, autoloading guns), preventing proper seating of the
breech bolt. Again the breech bolt may alip from the locked position due
to failure of the slide lock to function to block the slide and, hence, the
breech bolt in position. It also may be due to incompletely seated shell
due to foreign matter in chamber seat or bore, or swollen shell, burs or
broken firing pin (Stevens slide action, Remington or Savage autoload-
ing Guns.)
(2) To REMEDY. Check function of parts; remove group from guns.
Inspect, clean, and test. If shell causes trouble; place safety in safe posi-
tion, extract shell and unload gun before inspection. Inspect bore and
shell seat in barrel. If due to faulty parts, turn gun over to ordnance
personnel for correction.
1. Breech Bolt Fails to Unlock.
(1) Failure to unlock may be due to jammed shell, jammed slide, or
other mechanism, or to failure of the slide lock when disengaged to release
the slide or action slide handle bar. May be due to broken firing pin in
Stevens slide action guns, and in Remington and Savage autoloading
guns.
(2) To REMEDY. Work mechanism gently to ascertain trouble. If
live shell is in chamber, place safety at safe, unload magazine, remove
trigger plate, and remove operating groups, if possible. If this is not
easily accomplished, turn gun over to ordnance personnel for correction.
m. Shell Fails to Fire.
(1) May be due to faulty ammunition, broken or jammed firing pin,
broken or weak mainspring (par. e (2) (b) above and sec. XIII).
(2) To REMEDY. Examine primer of shell; if lightly dented, broken
or jammed parts are indicated as above; if normally dented, faulty am-
munition is indicated. Remove and inspect breech bolt and trigger plate
group. Turn gun over to ordnance personnel for correction.
n. Gun Fires as Breech Bolt Locks.
(1) May be due to pressure kept on trigger by operator as action
slide handle is pushed forward, failure of sear to retain hammer due to
230
TM 9-285
72-74
STOPPAGES AND IMMEDIATE ACTION
burs, foreign matter, or broken parts. Mechanism of Remington M31,
M11, and Sportsman, and Savage M720 Guns is designed to make this
fault impossible, unless parts are damaged or broken. Trigger must be
released and again pulled before hammer is released.
(2) To REMEDY. Unload and test functioning of gun; remove trigger
plate group; inspect parts and clean. If gun still fails to function
properly, turn over to ordnance personnel for correction.
NOTE: Refer to paragraph 97 for causes of shell failure.

73. TO REMOVE A SHELL FROM THE CHAMBER.


a. If a fired shell becomes jammed in the chamber of the barrel so
that it cannot be extracted in the usual manner and the extractors are
engaged, unload the magazine and insert a cleaning rod in the muzzle
end of the barrel. Then disengage the action slide lock and push shell
out of chamber at the same time retracting the action slide handle to
unlock the bolt.
CAUTION: Be sure shell has been fired before attempting removal.
b. If a live shell becomes jammed in the chamber and cannot be
extracted in the usual manner, proceed as follows:
(1) Slide safety to the safe position.
(2) Unload magazine.
(3) Turn gun over to officer, qualified mechanic, or ordnance person-
nel for correction.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to ram a live shell from the chamber
even if breechbolt is retracted, as primer may strike bolt and fire shell.

74. TO REMOVE A SHELL FROM THE MAGAZINE.


a. If a shell becomes jammed in the magazine so that the force of
the magazine spring will not push it out into the receiver when the shell
stop is disengaged from the base of the shell, proceed as follows:
(1) Slide safety to safe position and unload chamber.
(2) Using the finger or blunt stick, attempt to work shell gently back
and forth in magazine to free it.
CAUTION: Do not use sharp instrument or strike base of shell, as
detonation of the primer may result and the shell be fired.
(3) If shell cannot be freed in the manner prescribed in (a) above
turn gun over to qualified ordnance personnel for correction.
(4) If shell can be removed, examine shell, magazine tube, and
follower. If shell is swollen or deformed, fault is probably with the
shell. If, after shell is removed, the follower still fails to move smoothly
the full distance in the tube or tube follower appear dented or cor-
roded, turn gun over to qualified ordnance personnel for correction.
231
TM 9-285
75-76
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Section XI

SPECIAL MAINTENANCE
Paragraph
Care and cleaning in cold climates ........................ 75
Care and cleaning in hot climates ......................... 76
Preparation of shotguns for storage ....................... 77
Cleaning of shotguns as received from storage ................ 78
75. CARE AND CLEANING IN COLD CLIMATES.
a. In temperatures below freezing, it is necessary that the moving
parts of the shotgun be kept absolutely free from moisture. It has also
been found that excess oil on the working parts will solidify to such an
extent as to cause sluggish operation or complete failure.
b. The shotgun should be disassembled under supervision of an officer
or the chief mechanic and metal parts completely cleaned with SOL-
VENT, dry-cleaning, before use in temperatures below 0 F. The work-
ing surfaces of parts which show signs of wear may be lubricated by
rubbing with a cloth which has been wet with OIL, lubricating, preserva-
tive, light, and wrung out. At temperatures above 0 F, the shotgun may
be oiled lightly after cleaning by wiping with a slightly oiled cloth, using
OIL, lubricating, preservative, light.
c. Upon bringing indoors, the shotgun should be allowed first to
come to room temperature. It should then be disassembled, wiped com-
pletely dry of the moisture which will have condensed on the cold metal
surfaces, and thoroughly oiled with OIL, lubricating, preservative, light.
If possible, condensation should be avoided by providing a cold place in
which to keep shotguns when not in use. For example, a separate cold
room with appropriate racks may be used, or, when in the field, racks
under proper cover may be set up outdoors.
d. If shotgun has been fired, it should be thoroughly cleaned and
oiled. The bore may be swabbed out with an oily patch, and when the
weapon reaches room temperature, thoroughly cleaned and oiled as pre-
scribed in paragraph 11 and paragraphs pertaining to the cleaning of
the gun in question.
e. Before firing, the shotgun should be cleaned and oil removed
(par. b above). The bore and chamber should be entirely free of oil
before firing.
76. CARE AND CLEANING IN HOT CLIMATES.
a. Tropical Climates.
(1) In tropical climates where temperature and humidity are high
or where salt air is present, and during rainy seasons, the shotgun should
232
TM 9-285
76-77
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE
be thoroughly inspected daily and kept lightly oiled when not in use.
The groups should be dismounted at regular intervals and, if necessary,
disassembled under the supervision of an officer or the chief mechanic,
sufficiently to enable the drying and oiling of parts.
(2) Care should be exercised to see that unexposed parts and surfaces
are kept clean and oiled, such as the under side of the barrel, magazine
tube, inner surface of slide handle tube, interior of magazine tube, slide
handle bar, interior of receiver, operating parts, trigger group, spring
wells, and similar parts and surfaces.
(3) OIL, lubricating, preservative, light, should be used for lubri-
cation.
(4) Wood parts should also be inspected to see that swelling due to
moisture does not bind working parts. (If swelling has occurred, shave
off only enough wood to relieve binding.) A light coat of OIL, linseed,
raw, applied at intervals and well rubbed in with the heel of the hand
will help to keep moisture out. Allow oil to soak in for a few hours
and then wipe and polish with dry, clean rag.
NOTE: Care should be taken that linseed oil does not get into mech-
anism or on metal parts as it will become gummy when dry. Varnished
surfaces will not absorb linseed oil.
b. Hot, Dry Climates.
(1) In hot, dry climates where sand and dust are apt to get into the
mechanism and bore, the shotgun should be wiped clean daily or oftener,
if necessary. Groups should be dismounted, and disassembled under the
supervision of an officer or the chief mechanic, as far as necessary to
facilitate thorough cleaning.
(2) When the shotgun is being used under sandy conditions, all
lubricant should be wiped from the weapon. This will prevent sand
carried by the wind from sticking to the lubricant and forming an abra-
sive compound which will ruin the mechanism. Immediately upon leav-
ing sandy terrain, the weapon must be relubricated with OIL, lubricating,
preservative, light.
(3) In such climates wood parts are apt to dry out and shrink. A
light application of OIL, linseed, raw, applied as in a (4) above, will
help to keep wood in condition.
(4) Perspiration from the hands is a contributing factor to rust be-
cause it contains acid. Therefore, metal parts should be wiped dry
frequently.
(5) During sand or dust storms, breech and muzzle should be kept
covered, if possible.

77. PREPARATION OF SHOTGUNS FOR STORAGE.


a. OIL, lubricating, preservative, light, is the most suitable oil for
preserving the mechanism of shotguns. This oil is efficient for preserving
233
TM 9-285
77-78
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
the polished surfaces, the bore, and the chamber for a period of from
two to six weeks, dependent on the climatic and storage conditions.
Shotguns in short term storage should be inspected every five days and
the preservative film renewed if necessary.
b. COMPOUND, rust-preventive, light, is a semisolid material. This
compound is efficient for preserving the polished metal surfaces, the
bore, and the chamber for a period of one year or less, dependent on
the climatic and storage conditions.
c. Shotguns should be cleaned and prepared with particular care.
The bore, all parts of the mechanism, and the exterior of the shotguns
should be thoroughly cleaned and then dried completely with rags. In
damp climates, particular care must be taken to see that the rags are
dry. After drying a metal part, the bare hands should not touch that
part. All metal parts should then be coated either with OIL, lubricating,
preservative, light, or COMPOUND, rust-preventive, depending on the
length of storage (a and b above). Application of the COMPOUND,
rust-preventive, to the bore of the shotgun is best done by dipping the
cleaning brush or patch assembled to cleaning rod in COMPOUND, rust-
preventive, and running it through the bore two or three times. Cleaning
brush must be clean. Before placing the shotgun in the packing chest
see that the bolt is in its forward position and that the hammer is
released to relieve tension of spring. Then, handling the shotgun by the
wood parts only, it should be placed in the packing chest, the wooden
supports at the butt and muzzle having previously been painted with
COMPOUND, rust-preventive. Under no circumstances should a shot-
gun be placed in storage contained in a cloth or other cover or with a
plug in the bore. Such articles collect moisture which causes the weapon
to rust.
NOTE: If shotguns are packed in cardboard containers or original
manufacturer's cartons, each gun or section of gun, if taken-down, should
be wrapped in oilproof paper after preparing for storage.
78. CLEANING OF SHOTGUNS AS RECEIVED FROM STORAGE.
a. Shotguns which have been stored in accordance with paragraph 77
above will be coated with either OIL, lubricating, preservative, light, or
COMPOUND, rust-preventive, light. Shotguns received from ordnance
storage will, in general, be coated with COMPOUND, rust-preventive,
heavy. Shotguns received from manufacturers will usually be coated
with "Cosmoline," which is similar to COMPOUND, rust-preventive,
light. Remove as much of compound and oil as possible with rags;
then, use SOLVENT, dry-cleaning, to remove all traces of the compound,
or oil. Particular care should be taken to see that all recesses in which
springs or plungers operate, trigger mechanism and slide lock groups
(or similar parts) are cleaned thoroughly (par. 11). After using the
234
TM 9-285
78
SPECIAL MAINTENANCE
SOLVENT, dry-cleaning, make sure it is completely removed from all
parts with clean, dry rags. Then oil and lubricate gun (par. 11). If
guns are to be used immediately, bore and chamber should be wiped
dry of oil and excess oil removed from exterior surfaces with a dry rag.
CAUTION: Failure to clean the firing pin and the recess in the bolt
in which it operates, or the slide lock and trigger mechanism, may result
in gun failure at normal temperatures, and will most certainly result in
serious malfunctions if the shotguns are operated in low temperature
areas, as COMPOUND, rust-preventive, and lubricating oil will congeal
or frost on the mechanism.
b. SOLVENT, dry-cleaning, is an inflammable noncorrosive petro-
leum distillate, of low inflammability, used for removing grease. It should
not be used near open flame, and smoking is prohibited where it is being
used. It is generally applied with rag swabs to large parts and as a bath
for small parts. The surfaces must be thoroughly dried immediately after
removal of the solvent. To avoid leaving finger marks, which are ordi-
narily acid and induce corrosion, gloves should be worn by persons
handling parts after such cleaning. SOLVENT, dry-cleaning, will attack
and discolor rubber.

235
TM 9-285
79-81
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Section XII

MATERIEL AFFECTED BY GAS


Paragraph
Protective measures .................................... 79
Cleaning ............................................. 80
Decontamination ...................................... 81
Special points pertaining to shotguns ....................... 82
79. PROTECTIVE MEASURES.
a. When materiel is in constant danger of gas attack, unpainted metal
parts will be lightly coated with engine oil. Instruments are included
among the items to be protected by oil from chemical clouds or chemical
shells, but ammunition is excluded. Care will be taken that the oil does
not touch the optical parts of instruments or leather or canvas fittings.
Materiel not in use will be protected with covers as far as possible.
Ammunition will be kept in sealed containers.
b. Ordinary fabrics offer practically no protection against mustard
gas or lewisite. Rubber and oilcloth, for example, will be penetrated
within a short time. The longer the period during which they are ex-
posed, the greater the danger of wearing these articles. Rubber boots
worn in an area contaminated with mustard gas may offer a grave danger
to men who wear them several days after the bombardment. Imperme-
able clothing will resist penetration more than an hour, but should not
be worn longer than this.
80. CLEANING.
a. All unpainted metal parts of materiel that have been exposed to
any gas except mustard and lewisite must be cleaned as soon as possible
with SOLVENT, dry-cleaning, or ALCOHOL, denatured, and wiped dry.
All parts should then be coated with engine oil.
b. Ammunition which has been exposed to gas must be thoroughly
cleaned before it can be fired. To clean ammunition use AGENT,
decontaminating, noncorrosive, or if this is not available, strong soap
and cool water. After cleaning, wipe all ammunition dry with clean
rags. Do not use dry powdered AGENT, decontaminating (chloride of
lime used for decontaminating certain types of materiel) on or near
ammunition supplies, as flaming occurs through the use of chloride of
lime on liquid mustard.
81. DECONTAMINATION.
a. For the removal of liquid chemicals (mustard, lewisite; etc.) from
materiel, the following steps should be taken:
236
TM 9-285
81
MATERIEL AFFECTED BY GAS
(1) PROTECTIVE MEASURES.
(a) For-all of these operations a complete suit of impermeable cloth-
ing and a service gas mask will.be worn. Immediately after removal of
the suit, a thorough bath with soap and water (preferably hot) must be
taken. If any skin areas have come in contact with mustard, if even a
very small drop of mustard gets into the eye, or if the vapor of mustard
has been inhaled, it is imperative that complete first-aid measures be
given within 20 to 30 minutes after exposure. First-aid instructions are
given in TM 9-850 and FM 21-40.
(b) Garments exposed to mustard will be decontaminated. If the
impermeable clothing has been exposed to vapor only, it may be decon-
taminated by hanging in the open air, preferably in sunlight for several
days. It may also be cleaned by steaming for two hours. If the im-
permeable clothing has been contaminated with liquid mustard, steam-
ing for six to eight hours will be required. Various kinds of steaming
devices can be improvised from materials available in the field.
(2) PROCEDURE.
(a) Commence by freeing materiel of dirt through the use of sticks,
rags, etc., which must be burned or buried immediately after this opera-
tion.
(b) If the surface of the materiel is coated with grease or heavy oil,
this grease or oil should be removed before decontamination is begun.
SOLVENT, dry-cleaning, or other available solvents for oil should be
used with rags attached to ends of sticks.
(c) Decontaminate the painted surfaces of the materiel with bleaching
solution made by mixing one part AGENT, decontaminating (chloride
of lime), with one part water. This solution should be swabbed over all
surfaces. Wash off thoroughly with water, then dry and oil all surfaces.
(d) All unpainted metal parts and instruments exposed to mustard or
lewisite must be decontaminated with AGENT, decontaminating, non-
corrosive, mixed one part solid to fifteen parts solvent (ACETYLENE
TETRACHLORIDE). If this is not available, use warm water and soap.
Bleaching solution must not be used, because of its corrosive action.
Instrument lenses may be cleaned only with PAPER, lens, tissue, using
a small amount of ALCOHOL, ethyl. Coat all metal surfaces lightly
with engine oil.
(e) In the event AGENT, decontaminating (chloride of lime), is not
available, materiel may be temporarily cleaned with large volumes of
hot water. However; mustard lying in joints or in leather or canvas
webbing is not removed by this procedure and will remain a constant
source of danger until the materiel can be properly decontaminated. All
mustard washed from materiel in this manner lies unchanged on the
237
TM 9-285
81-82
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
ground, necessitating that the contaminated area be plainly marked with
warning signs before abandonment.
(f) The cleaning or decontaminating of materiel contaminated with
lewisite will wash arsenic compounds into the soil, poisoning any water
supplies in the locality for either men or animals.
(g) Leather or canvas webbing that has been contaminated should be
scrubbed thoroughly with bleaching solution. In the event this treatment
is insufficient, it may be necessary to burn or bury such materiel.
(h) Detailed information on decontamination is contained in FM
21-40, TM 9-850,'and TC 38, 1941, Decontamination.
82. SPECIAL POINTS PERTAINING TO SHOTGUNS.
a. The shotguns should be completely disassembled under the super-
vision of an officer or the chief mechanic, for cleaning and decontamina-
tion, and special attention given to the points enumerated below:
(1) Bore and chamber.
(2) Interior of magazine tube and parts.
(3) Guideways and apertures in receiver.
(4) Trigger mechanism.
(5) Inner surface of action slide handle tube or like part.
(6) Apertures in breech bolt or like parts.
(7) Spring wells.
(8) Friction parts and inside of fore end (autoloading guns).
(9) Apertures in carrier of Winchester Gun M97.
(10) Action spring tube and spring (autoloading guns).
(11) Bayonet attachment, hand guard, and sling.
(12) Safety apertures.
(13) Bayonet and bayonet scabbard, with special attention to catch,
and interior of scabbard.
(14) Gun sling. (Disassemble when cleaning and decontaminating).

238
TM 9-285
83-85

Section XIl

AMMUNITION
ParaQraph
General .................................. I..... 83
Nomenclature . ............... ......................... 84
Classification .................. .............. ........ 85
Firing tables ................. I ........................ 86
Identification ......................................... 87
Lot number ............................... .......... 88
Grade ....................................... ....... 89
Marking . ... ..................................... 90
Packing and marking ................................... 91
Care, handling, and preservation .......................... 92
Precautions in firing .................................... 93
Storage ..................................... ........ 94
Authorized rounds ..................................... 95
Data ................................................ 96
Defects found after firing.: ................. ......... 97
Field report of accidents ................................. 98

83. GENERAL.
*a. The information in this section pertaining to the several types of
shotgun shells (shot shells) authorized for use in authorized commercial
standard shotguns of pump action and autoloading types, includes
description, means of identification, care, use, and ballistic data. Shotgun
shells are procured by the Ordnance Department from several commer-
cial manufacturers.

84. NOMENCLATURE.
a. Standard nomenclature is used herein in all references to specific
items of issue.

85. CLASSIFICATION.
a. Based upon use, the shotgun shells used in these shotguns may be
classified as:
(1) Guard or combat load-contains 11/s ounces of No. 00 buckshot.
(2) Trap load-contains 11/s or 11/4 ounces of No. 71/2 chilled shot.
(3) Skeet load-contains 11/s ounces of either No. 71/2 chilled shot
or No. 9 chilled shot.
(4) Hunting load-contains any of the above mentioned loads.
239
TM 9-285
86-88
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
86. FIRING TABLES.
a. Ballistic data are published herein in paragraph 96. They will not
be published separately.
87. IDENTIFICATION.
a. General. Since shotgun shells are commercial items, they do not
have any model designation. However, although they all have the same
general appearance, each type of shotgun shell may be identified by the
stamping on the metal head, shell body, and closing wad (par. 90) and
by the markings on packing containers and boxes (par. 91).
b. Description. Shotgun shells consist of a brass or steel head, a
primer, a paper case or shell body, a smokeless powder propelling charge,
cardboard and felt wads, a load of lead shot, and a closing wad. In addi-
tion to the markings on the ammunition and packing containers, the
shotgun shells may be further identified by the physical characteristics
described below:
(1) SHOTGUN SHELL FOR GUARD OR COMBAT USE. These shells have
waterproofed paper cases, and metal heads, ranging from approximately
1 inch down to .35 inch in length (fig. 127). Metal heads approximately
.80 inch in length or above will only appear on shells having a guard or
combat load, although many of these are now equipped with the low
(.35) metal-heads. In the past some shells have had the entire case
made of brass and these are authorized for guard or combat use only.
(2) SHOTGUN SHELL FOR TRAP OR SKEET SHOOTING. These consist
of a paper case or shell body set in a metal head which is under 1/2 inch
in length.
(3) SHOTGUN SHELLS FOR HUNTING. Any of the above shells, with
the exception of those having the all-brass case for guard or combat use
only, may be used for the appropriate type of hunting.
88. LOT NUMBER.
a. When ammunition is manufactured, an ammunition lot number
which becomes an essential part of the marking is assigned in accordance
with pertinent specifications. This lot number is marked on all packing
containers. It is required for all purposes of record, including grading,
use, and reports on condition, functioning, and accidents in which the
ammunition might be involved. Since it is impracticable to mark the
ammunition lot number on each individual shotgun shell, every effort
should be made to maintain the ammunition lot number of shells that
have been removed from their original packings. Shotgun shells for which
the ammunition lot number has been lost are placed in grade 3 (unser-
viceable ammunition which will not be fired). Therefore, when shells
are removed from their original packings, they should be marked or
tagged so that the ammunition lot number may be preserved.
240
TM 9-285
89-90
AMMUNITION
89. GRADE.
a. No grades are assigned to serviceable shotgun shells. Grade 3 indi-
cates unserviceable ammunition, which will not be fired but will be
destroyed locally. Instructions for the destruction of ammunition are
contained in TM 9-1900.

90. MARKING.
a. General. Stampings on the closing wad, paper case or shell body,
and metal head of the shotgun shells (fig. 127) are used as a means of
identification of the ammunition. Further identification is obtained from
the markings on packing containers (par. 91) which includes that of
the lot number (pars. 87 and 88).

h. Marking on Closing Wad.


(1) Markings stamped on closing wads are given in Table I. The
numerals indicate the quantities of propellent and weight and size of
the shot load, for example, "3-11 s--7 1/2C" indicates 3 drams equivalent
of smokeless powder and 11/8s ounces of No. 71/2 chilled shot.

Tab!: ,.

Stamping on closing wad Load

3-00-BUCK Guard or combat


3-11/8-71/2 C Trap or skeet
3-11/4-71/2 C Trap
3--1 /s-9 C Skeet

(2) In addition, the name or symbol of the manufacturer and the


name of the powder manufacturer may also be stamped on the clos-
ing wad.

e. Marking on Case. Some shotgun shells have the information


stamped on the closing wad repeated on the paper case or shell body
(b above). In addition, the trade name and type of load of the shotgun
shell may also be stamped on the case.

d. Marking on Metal Head. The stampings on the metal head are


indicated in Table II. This stamping generally consists of initials or
symbol of manufacturer, gage size of shell, and trade name for the par-
ticular type of shotgun shell.
241
TM 9-285
90
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

.I.. O

wwO
1I-

.. II
TM 9-285
90-92
AMMUNITION
Table II.

Marking on metal head for:

Guard or combat load

Manufacturer Former marking* New marking** Sporting load

Federal Cartridge Co. Federal No. 12 Hi Federal No. 12 Hi Federal No. 12 Monark
Power Power
Peters Cartridge Co. P-Peters No. 12 P-Peters No. 12 P-Peters No. 12 Victor
DeLuxe Target High Velocity Trap Load
Remington Arms Co. Rem UMC No. 12 Rem UMC No. 12 Rem UMC No. 12
Arrow Nitro Express Shurshot
Western Cartridge Co. Western No. 12 Western No. 12 Western No. 12 Xpert
Record Super X
Winchester Repeating W.R.A. 12 Leader W.R.A. 12 Super- W.R.A. 12 Ranger
Arms Co. speed .

*Shotgun shell procured in accordance with U. S. specification 50-5-1A, February 17, 1939.
**Shotgun shell procured in accordance with U. S. specification 50-5-IB, April 28, 1942.

91. PACKING AND MARKING.


a. Packing. Shotgun shells are packed 25 shells per carton, 20
cartons (500 shells) per case. The case for domestic shipment may be
wood or fiber; for oversea shipment, it will be metal-lined wood. Repre-
sentative dimensions and weight are:

Size in inches .................................. 15 x 103/8 x 93/4


Area .............................................. 1.08 sq ft
Volume ...................................... ...... 0.88 cu ft
Weight ..................................... .......... 65 lb

b. Marking. Cases and cartons of this ammunition bear the com-


mercial markings of the manufacturer and in addition the lot number,
type of load, and the phrase "U. S. property." These markings generally
include manufacturer's name and address, quantity, gage size, gun cham-
ber length, type of ammunition, type of propellent powder, and such
trade names as indicated in Table II. The phrases "Loaded shot shells"
or "Small-arms ammunition" also appear on the packing cases.

92. CARE, HANDLING, AND PRESERVATION.


a. Small-arms ammunition, as compared with other types of ammu-
nition, is not dangerous to handle. Care, however, must be observed to
keep the packing cases from becoming broken or damaged. All broken
cases must be immediately repaired and careful attention given to the
transfer of all markings to the new parts of the box. In case the packing
box contains a metal liner, the liner should be air tested and sealed
provided that equipment for this work is available:
243
TM 9-285
92-93
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
b. Ammunition boxes should not be opened until the ammunition is
required for use. Ammunition removed from its container, particularly
in damp climates, is apt to corrode, thereby causing the ammunition to
become unserviceable.
c. The ammunition should be protected from mud, sand, dirt, and
water. If it gets wet or dirty, it should be wiped off at once. Verdigris or
light corrosion, if it forms on the metal part of the shells, should be
wiped off. However, shells should not be polished to make them look
better or brighter. Ammunition which is seriously corroded should not
be fired.
d. The use of oil or grease on cartridges is prohibited.
e. Do not fire shotgun shells with defects.
f. Ammunition should not be exposed to the direct rays of the sun
for any length of time. Such exposure may affect seriously its firing
qualities.
g. Whenever shotgun shells are taken from original packing con-
tainers, they will be so tagged or otherwise marked so that the ammuni-
tion may be identified as to lot number. Such identification is necessary
to prevent otherwise serviceable ammunition from being placed in
grade 3, because of loss of lot number.

93. PRECAUTIONS IN FIRING.


a. Because a misfire cannot immediately be distinguished from a
hangfire, when a misfire occurs, the ejection opening of the gun should
be turned toward the ground and the shotgun shell ejected. Should the
malfunction be a hangfire, this procedure will prevent the resulting
flame from causing injury to the firer. Although some models of shot-
guns can be recocked and refired, for example the Winchester M97, the
above procedure is strongly recommended should a misfire occur.
b. Before firing, the firer should be sure that the bore of the weapon
is free of any foreign matter such as cleaning patches, mud, sand, snow,
and the like, and especially a shell of smaller gage which has been placed
or lodged in the barrel through error. To fire a weapon with any obstruc-
tion in the bore may cause the gun to burst and result in injury to
the firer.
e. Shotgun shells should not be fired unless they are identified by lot
number. Such identification prevents the ammunition from becoming
grade 3 ammunition.
d. It should be kept in mind that the shotgun shells issued by the
Ordnance Department are designed for use in authorized commercial
standard shotguns having a chamber 23/4 inches in length. Although
244
TM 9-285
93-96
AMMUNITION
the occasion may arise whereby this ammunition is used in shotguns
having longer chambers, the shotgun shells should not be used in shot-
guns having chambers shorter than 23/4 inches. To do so may result in
dangerously high chamber pressures.

94. STORAGE.
a. Whenever practicable, small-arms ammunition should be stored
under cover. When necessary to have small-arms ammunition in the
open, it should be raised at least six inches from the ground and covered
with a double thickness of tarpaulin. Suitable trenches should be dug
to prevent water from flowing under the pile.
b. If placed in a fire, small-arms ammunition does not explode vio-
lently. There are small individual explosions of each shell, the case
flying in one direction and the shot in another. In case of fire, keep per-
sonnel not engaged in fighting the fire at least 200 yards from the fire
and have them lie on the ground. It is unlikely that the shot and cases
will fly over 200 yards.
c. Small-arms ammunition in storage should be protected from ex-
treme heat in order to avoid decomposition of the propellent powder.
The combination of high temperature and damp atmosphere is particu-
larly detrimental to the stability of the powder.
d. When only a part of a box is used, the remaining ammunition in
the box should be protected against unauthorized handling and use by
firmly fastening the cover in place.

95. AUTHORIZED ROUNDS.


a. The following ammunition is authorized for use in authorized com-
mercial standard 12-gage shotguns. It should be noted that the nomen-
clature completely describes the shell as to type and gage size. Its use
for all purposes of record is mandatory.
SHELL, shotgun, 12-gage, brass, loaded with smokeless powder and
#00 buckshot'
SHELL, shotgun, 12-gage, paper, loaded with smokeless powder and
00 buckshot'
SHELL, shotgun, 12-gage, paper, loaded with smokeless powder and
# 71/2 chilled shot :
SHELL, shotgun, 12-gage, paper, loaded with smokeless powder and
#9 chilled shot'

96. DATA.
a. General. Although there are slight differences in shotgun shells of
245
818074 0 - 48 - 17
TM 9-285
96
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
different manufacture (powder charge, etc.), the following data in
Table III and Table IV are considered substantially correct.

Table Ill.
Type of Load
Guard or combat Trap Skeet
Weight of bulk powder charge (equiv.), 3 3 3
drams
Size of shot No. 00 buck No. 7 /2 No. 9
1
Weight of shot load, ounces l /s 11/4 1 /s
Number of shot in load 9 445±15 660±40
Length, inches 2.33 2.33 2.33
Weight of shotgun shell, grains 800 794 741
Maximum chamber pressure, pounds per 11,000' 11,000" 11,0007
square inch
Average velocity over a range of 40 yards, 1,070±30" 850-30" 940+40'
feet per second
Pattern in percentage of shot in a 30-inch 70% at 60% at 50% at
7
circle 40 yards" 40 yards" 25 yards
Maximum effective range, yards 60-75' 7 45-50" 25-307
30-35 _

1 Guard or combat load. This item is issued only for this use.
2Guard or combat load.
::Trap or skeet load.
4Skeet load.
.'For shotgun shell procured in accordance with specification 50-5-lA, February 17, 1939.
'Fired in 30-inch full choke barrel.
7Fired in 26-inch cylinder barrel.
' Fired in 26-inch cylinder or skeet bored barrel over a range of 25 yards. When fired in 30-inch
full choke barrel over a range of 40 yards, the average velocity is 1,050±40 feet per second.

Table IV.
Type of Load
Guard or combat Trap or skeet
Weight of bulk powder charge (equiv.), drams 3 3
Size of shot No. 00 buck No. 71/2
Weight of shot load, ounces 1/s 1'/s
Number of shot in load 9 435±15
Length, inches 2.33 2.33
Weight of shotgun shell, grains 800 750
Maximum chamber pressure, pounds per square inch 11,000 11,000
Average velocity over range of 40 yards fired in 1,070±30 870+30
30-inch full choke barrel, feet per second
Pattern in percentage of shot in a 30-inch circle at 33'/3%' 65%::
40 yards. 40%'
Maximum effective range, yards 60-75 a 45-50'
30-35'

'For shotgun shell procured in accordance with specification 50-5-1B, April 28, 1942.
'Fired in 20-inch cylinder bored, riot type barrel.
nFired in 30-inch full choke barrel.
4Fired in 26-inch cylinder bored barrel.
246
TM 9-285
96-97
AMMUNITION
b. Table of Fire. The following table indicates the pattern or dis-
persion as a percentage of the total number of shot falling within a circle
of 30-inch diameter at the range indicated. The approximate pattern
spread is also indicated. These values are only approximate since there
is considerable variation in shotgun ballistics. This variation may be due
not only to a particular loading but also to atmospheric conditions.

Table V.
Sporting trap or
sporting skeet
2
Guard or combat load' Sporting trap, load:
Fired in 26- Sporting skeet
Fired in 30- Fired in 26- Fired in 30- inch cylinder load,' fired in
Range, inch full inch cylinder inch full or skeet bore 26-inch cylinder
in yards choke barrel bore barrel choke barrel barrel bore barrel

5 100% 100% - - -
10 100% 100% - - -
15 100% 100% - - -
20 100% 100% 100% 75% 87%
25 100% 100% 100% 57% 66%
30 100% 100% 90% 45% 59%
35 90% 70% 80% 40% 43%
40 75% o 60% 70% 33% 33%
45 - - - - -
50 50% 38%
55 - -
60 35% 25% - - -
Maximum ef- 60-75 yd 60-75 yd 45-50 yd 30-35 yd 25-30 yd
fective range
Pattern spread 3/4 in. 1 in. 9/10 in. in. 1/sl in.
1'/8
per yd _

'Contains 9 ( 1/s oz) No. 00 buckshot.


2 Contains 445+15 (11/4 oz) No. 71/2 chilled shot.
:' Contains 435±+15 (ll/s
1
oz) No. 71/2 chilled shot.
'Contains 660+-40 ( /s oz) No. 9 chilled shot.

97. DEFECTS FOUND AFTER FIRING.

Name of defect How to recognize Common causes-precautions

Misfire No action on firing. Primer shows Primer is defective.


normal impression of firing
pin.
No action on firing. Primer shows Indicates mechanical defect in
light impression of firing pin. weapon as short or broken
firing pin, weak firing pin
spring, bolt of weapon not be-
ing completely locked, or
grease in firing pin hole
which cushions blow of firing
pin, or caused by defective
shell or primer.
No action on firing. Primer shows Defect in weapon.
normal impression of firing
I pin, but off center.

247
TM 9-285
97-98
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES

Name of defect How to recognize Common causes--Precautions

Hangfire Delayed ignition of powder in Small or decomposed primer


the shell. pellet, damp powder or light
blow of firing pin caused by
dirt or defect in weapon. This
is a serious defect if delay is
long enough to permit the bolt
to be opened before the pow-
der burns completely, in which
case, injury to firer or damage
to weapon, or both, may re-
sult. A hangfire in some shot-
guns may even force the
breech open. For precautions,
see paragraph 93.
Pierced primer Perforation of primer cup by the Imperfect firing pin or very thin
firing pin. Discoloration around metal in base of primer cup.
indent of very small perfora-
tion. Disk from large perfora-
tion blown into action of gun,
with such an escape of gas as
to lower velocity of the shot.
Primer leak Discoloration around the primer Too small a primer, too large a
and the metal head. Slight dis- primer hole, or excessive pres-
coloration when primer leak sure generated by propelling
is small, or heavy for a large charge.
primer leak.
Blown primer Primer is blown completely from Seldom encountered.
pocket of metal head or case.
Primer setback Primer protrudes above the Defective bolt or shell or exces-
metal head. sive pressure.
Leak back of Discoloration along the shell Escape of gas into the action of
case body or case. weapon.
Failure of case Failure of case to extract. Defective extractor or shell, a
to extract swollen case or dirty chamber.
Blowback Escape of gas to the rear. Pierced primer, primer leak,
blown primer, and ruptured
shell case.
Split body Longitudinal split in shell body Case of body made of defective
or case, thereby reducing ve- materiel.
locity of the shot.
Complete rup- Circumferential separation com- Bad bolt locking, excessive head-
ture pletely around shell body or space, or defective shell case.
case, causing it to separate into This is a serious defect, be-
two parts. cause if the forward portion
of the case remains in the
chamber, it will cause the next
round to jam.
Partial rupture Partial circumferential separa- See "Complete rupture."
tion around shell body or case.

98. FIELD REPORT OF ACCIDENTS.


a. Any serious malfunctions of ammunition must be reported
promptly to the ordnance officer under whose supervision the materiel
is maintained or issued (par. 7, AR 45-30).

248
TM 9-285
99-100

Section XIV

REFERENCES
Paragraph
Standard nomenclature lists ............................. 99
Explanatory publications ......................... 100

99. STANDARD NOMENCLATURE LISTS.


a. Cleaning, preserving and lubricating materials, re-
coil fluids, special oils, and similar items of issue. SNL K-1
h. Shotguns--parts, equipment and appendages ..... SNL B-9
c. Shells, shotgun ............................. SNL T-3
d. Soldering, brazing and welding material, gases and
related items ............................ SNL K-2
e. Tools, maintenance, for repair of small and hand
arms and pyrotechnic projectors .............. SNL B-20
I. Truck, small arms repair, M 1-parts, equipment
and load ................................ SNL G-72
Current Standard Nomenclature lists are as tabulated
here. An up-to-date list of SNL's is maintained as
the "Ordnance Publications for Supply Index".... OPSI

100. EXPLANATORY PUBLICATIONS.


a. Ammunition.
(1) Ammunition, general ....................... TM 9-1900
(2) Small-arms, ammunition .................... TM 9-1990
(3) Qualifications in arms and ammunition training
allowances ............................... AR 775-10
h. Gas Attack.
Defense against chemical attack ............... FM 21-40
Decontamination, 1941 ...................... TC No. 38
Military chemistry and chemical agents ......... TM 3-215
c. Maintenance.
Cleaning, preserving, lubricating and welding mate-
rials and similar items of issue by the Ordance
Department ............................. TM 9-850
. Ordnance Maintenance: shotguns, all types ...... TM 9-1285
Ordnance maintenance procedure: materiel inspec-
tion and repair ............................ TM 9-1100
249
TM 9-285
100
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
d. Ordnance Storage and Shipment.
Marking shipments of ordnance supplies ......... IOSSC-(b)
Ordnance storage and shipment chart-Group B-
Major items ............................. OSSC-B
e. Ordnance field service in time of peace .......... AR 45-30

f. Shooting and Targets.


Shotgun and skeet shooting ................... TM 1-1100
Targets, target materials, and rifle range con-
struction ................................ TM 9-855
g. Instruction guide: small arms data ............. TM 9-2200

250
TM 9-285
INDEX
A Page No. Page No.
Accidents, ammunition, field report Bayonet attachment, Winchester,
of .......................... 248 M97
Action bar lock description ................... 16
Remington, M10 .......... 117-119 functioning ................... 32
Remington, M31 ............... 142 Bolt, malfunction, effect of ........ 9
Action slide group (take-down gun), Bore, cleaning, Winchester, M97.. 34-35
functioning, Winchester, M97.. 31-32 Boring of the barrel .............. 4
Action slide lock Breech bolt
Winchester, M12 .............. 42 Remington, M11 and Sportsman.. 167
Winchester, M97 .............. 16 Savage ...................... 200
Ammunition Winchester, M12 .............. 39
authorized rounds .............. 245 Winchester, M97.............. 13
care, handling, and preser- "Breech" defined ................. 9
vation ................. 243-244 Breech mechanism, care of ......... 9
classification ................. 239 Breechblock
cleaning gas exposed ............ 236 Ithaca, M37 .................. 90
data ................... 245-247 Remington, M10 .............. 117
field report of accidents ......... 248 Remington, M31 ........... 140-142
firing
defects found after ....... 247-248 C
precautions inC.......... 244245 Care, handling, and preservation of
table . ....................... 247 ammunition ............... 243-244
general information on .......... 239 Carrier
grade ....................... 241 Remington,
Remington, M10
M10 .........
......... 114-117
114-117
identification .................. 240 Remington, M11 and Sportsman.. 166
lot number ................... 240 Savage.198
marking ................. 241-243 Winchester, M97 ............. 13
nomenclature, standard .......... 239 Carrier latch
packing and marking ........... 243 Remington, M11 and Sportsman. . 166
Assembled gun (See Testing assem- Savage .... 198
bled gun) "Cartridge," word "shell" substituted
Assembled parts, faulty for .......................... 3
Ithaca, M37 ............... 109 Chamber, removal of shell from .... 231
.-....
Remington, M10 ........... 134-135 Chemicals, liquid, removal of.. 236-238
Remington, M11 and Sports- "Choke" defined ................ 4
man ................... -*189-191 Choking, how accomplished ........ 4
Remington, M31............... 158 Classification
Savage, M720 ............ 220-221 general ...................... 5-7
Stevens, M620A, etc.......... 85-86 Ithaca, M37 ............ 88-90
Winchester, M12 ............ 56-57 Remington, M10 .......... 112-114
Winchester, M97 ............. 33-34 Remington, M11 and Sportsman.. 163
Authorized rounds ............... 245 Remington, M31.137-140
Autoloading gun .. 3195 Savage, M720...............
B Stevens, M620A, etc............ 62
Barrel Winchester, M12............ 38-39
boring ....................... 4 Winchester, M97 ............... 13
inspection .................... 7 Cleaning
Remington, M11 and Sportsman.. 163 bore of solid frame gu-s ........ 5
Savage ...................... 195 gas exposed materiel........... 236
Winchester Cleaning and lubrication
solid frame gun .............. 31 Ithaca, M37 ............. 110-111
take-down gun ............. 31-32 Remington, M10 ............... 136
251
TM 9-285
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
C-Cont'd Page No. Page No.
Cleaning and lubrication-( Cont'd) Field inspection
Remington, Mll and Sports- Ithaca, M37 ............... 108-110
man ................... 191-192 Remington, M10.......... 133-136
Remington, M31 ............... 160 Remington, Mll and Sports-
Savage, M720 ............. 222-223 man .................. 188-191
Stevens, M620A, etc .......... 86-87 Remington, M31 .......... 157-159
Winchester, M12 .............. 58 Savage, M720 ............. 219-222
Winchester, M97 ............. 34-37 Stevens, M620A, etc .......... 84-86
Climates, hot and cold, care and Winchester, M12 ............ 55-58
cleaning in ................ 232-233 Winchester, M97 ............ 32-34
"Clockwise" defined .............. 4 Field report of ammunition accidents 248
Cold climates, care and cleaning in. . 232 Firing ammunition
(See also Cleaning and lubrication) defects found after.247-248
Construction (See Description)
precautions in ............. 244-245
"Counterclockwise" defined 4247 ........

D Firing mechanism
Data "hammerless" defined ......... 4
ammunition .............. 245-247 Remington, M10 .............. 117
Ithaca, M37 ................... 94 Firing table ..................... 247
Remington, M10 ........... 119-120
Remington, Ml1 and Sportsman.. 170 Friction ring, use of
Remington, M31. ............ Remington, Mll and Sports-
Savage, M720 ............... 20 2 man ............... 186-188
Stevens, M620A, etc............ 69 Savage, M720.217-219
Winchester, M12 .............. 41 Functioning
Winchester, M97............ 16-17 bolt and/or slide locking mecha-
Decontamination of materiel exposed nisms, care of ............... 9
to gas ................... 236-238 Ithaca, M37................ 96-98
Description Remington, M10 .......... 122-126
Ithaca, M37 ................. 88-93 Remington, Mll11 and Sports-
Remington, M10 ........... 112-119 man .................. 175-178
Remington, Mll and Sports- Remington, M31 ......... 146-149
man ................... 161-167 Savage, M720 ............. 207-210
Remington, M31 ........... 137-140 Stevens, M620A, etc .......... 73-75
Savage, M720 ............. 193-200 Winchester, M12 ............ 46-47
Stevens, M620A, etc .......... 59-68 Winchester, M97 ........... 20-23
Winchester, M12 ............ 38-41
Winchester, M97............. 10-16 G
Design, variations in.............. 3 Gas, materiel affected by ...... 236-238
Disassembly and assembly, general cleaning.236
explanation of . ................5 decontamination.236-238
Diameters of bore of barrel ....... 4 protective measures ............ 236
E special points ................ 238
Ejector, Stevens, M620A, etc ....... 65 Grade
Extractor, Remington,M10
M ........ 119 ammunition.241
definition of ................... 6
F Group (s)
Failures, (See Malfunctions, possible definition of .................. 5
cause and correction) removal and replacement (See un-
"Featherlight" applied to Ithaca shot- der names of gun)
gun .......................... 88 Gun sling, Winchester, M97 ....... 16
252
TM 9-285
INDEX
H Page No. M Page No.
Hammer, Stevens, M620A, etc ...... 66 Magazine
"Hammerless" defined ............ 4 Ithaca, M37 ................... 92
Hot climates, care and cleaning Remington, M10 ........... 114
in ...................... 232-233 Remington, M31............... 142
removal of shell from ........... 231
Winchester, M12 ............... 39
Winchester, M97
Identification marks description ................. 16
Ithaca, M37 .................. 88 functioning ............... 31-32
Remington, M10............... 112 replacement ................ 31
Remington, Mll and Sportsman.. 161 Magazine tube
Remington, M31 ............... 137 Remington, Mll and Sports-
Savage, M720 ................. 193 man ................... 163-166
Stevens, M620A, etc ............ 59 Savage, M720 ................. 198
Winchester, M12 .............. 38 Stevens, M620A, etc............ 62
Winchester, M97 .............. 10 Maintenance ............... 232-235
Identification of ammunition ....... 240 care and cleaning in:
Immediate action (See Stoppages cold climates ............... 232
and immediate action) hot climates ............ 232-233
Inspection of barrel .............. 7 storage
(See also Field inspection) cleaning guns received
from ............... 234-235
Ithaca shotgun, M37
preparing guns for ....... 233-234
cleaning and lubrication ..... 110-111
data ......................... 94 Malfunction of bolt and/or slide lock,
description ............. of.................... 9
general .................. 90-93 Malfunctions, possible cause and cor-
field inspection ............ 108-110 rection ................ 226-231
assembled parts, faulty ........ 109 failure:
general ................ 109-110 action slide handle ........... 229
operation of gun ......... 108-109 breech bolt ............. 230-231
functioning ................. 96-98 safety ..................... 229
groups shell .............. 230, 247-248
barrel and bayonet attachment to feed ................ 228-229
removal .................. 102 to fire .................. 226-227
replacement .............. 107 trigger ................. 229-230
breechlock slide and carrier general discussion of ............ 226
removal .............. 102-106 Marking ammunition ......... 241-243
replacement .......... 106-107 .Materiel affected by gas (See Gas,
trigger plate materiel affected by)
removal .............. 102
repmoval
acem ........
t... -1072 .Measuring choke in the barrel ...... 4
replacement ............ 107
operation (See Operation) Migratory Game Act............ 7
standard nomenclature, use of .... 3 Model, definition of .............. 6
"Muzzle" defined ................ 8
L
Liquid chemicals, removal of... 236-238
Loading (See Operation)
Lot number of ammunition ........ 240 Nomenclature for slide handle ...... 4
Lubrication (See Cleaning and lu- Nomenclature, standard, use of..... 3
brication) ammunition .................. 239
253
TM 9-285
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
0 Page No. Page No.
Operation Winchester, M97 ............. 17-20
Ithaca ......... ............ 94-96 during field inspection ...... 32-34
during field inspection .... 108-109 loading and unloading:
loading and unloading: gun .................... 20
magazine and gun .......... 96 magazine ............ 17-20
Remington, M10 ........... 120-122
during field inspection .... 133-134 P
loading and unloading:
loading and unloading:
Packing and marking ammunition... 243
loading the chamber only. ... 122 Precautions, safety.8-9
magazine and gun .......... 122 .Primer, description and action of... 7
Remington, M11 and Sports-
man ................. 170-174
during field inspection .... 188-189 Receiver
explanation ............. 170-174 Ithaca, M37 .............. 90
loading: ............ Remington, M10............ 114
barrel only ............... 174 Remington, M11 and Sportsman.. 166
from magazine ...... 171-174 Remington,M31.140
magazine .................. .1171 Savage, M720 ................. 198
unloading: - Stevens,
................
M620A, etc......... 62-65
barrel without unloading Winchester, M12... 39
magazine .............. 174 ... Winchester, M97 ............... 13
gun. *............. 174 Recoil, Remington Mll and Sports-
.......
magazine.... . ma.
171
1
171
ma. man ................. ..... 161
Remington, M31 ........... 143-146 Remington shotgun, M10
during field inspection........ 157 cleaning and lubrication ......... 136
loading and unloading: data ..... 119-120
gun........... .. 145-146 description .................... 112-114
loading the chamber only .... 146 general............... 114-119
magazine ................ 145 field inspection ............ 133-136
Savage, M720 ............ 202-205 assembled parts, faulty.... 134-135
during field inspection .... 219-220 general ................ 135-136
explanation of ........... 202-203 operation of gun ......... 133-134
loading: functioning ............... 122-126
barrel ................... 205 groups
from the magazine... 203-205 barrel, magazine and action bar
magazine . ............ 203 group (take-down gun)
unloading removal . ............ 126
barrel without unloading replacement ............ 133
magazine ........... 205 breech bolt and link
gun .................... 2 05 removal ............ 183-184
magazine ......... .. 203 replacement ........... 184
Stevens, M620A, etc .......... 69-73 butt stock
during field inspection ...... 84-85 removal ............. 126
loading and unloading: replacement ........... 130
gun and magazine .......... 71 trigger guard
loading the chamber only .... 73 removal ............. 126-129
Winchester, M12 ............ 41-46 replacement ........... 130
during field inspection ........ 56 operation ................ 120-122
loading and unloading: Remington shotgun, M11 and Sports-
gun ................... 44-46 man
loading chamber only....... 46 cleaning and lubrication ........ 192
magazine ................ 44 data ................ 170
254
TM 9-285
INDEX
R-Cont'd Page No. Page No.
Remington shotgun, M11 and Rivot gun, classification of......... 6-7
Sportsman-(Cont'd) Rust and corrosion, removal, Win-
description ............... 161-163 chester, M97 .................. 36
general ................ 163-167
field inspection ...........
assembfield
ispection ... . . 188-191
188-191 Safety precautions ............... 8-9
assembled parts, faulty .... 189-191 Safety slide, Remington shotgun,
general ................... 191 M1 119
operation of gun ......... . .188-189
Safety, Stevens shotgun, M620A, etc. 68
friction ring, use of ......... 186-188 Savage shotgun M720
functioning ..................... 175-178 cleaning and lubrication..... 222-223
groups data ......................... 202
action spring description ............... 193-195
removal ................. 183 field inspection ............ 219-222
replacement .............. 185 assembled parts, faulty... 220-221
barrel and fore end .... general ................ 221-222
redioval ............. 178-183 operation of gun ......... 219-220
replacement .......... 185-186 friction ring, use of ......... 217-219
breech bolt and link . ......
functioning ............... 207-210
removal ............. 183-184 groups
replacement .............. 184 action spring
butt stock ........ removal ................. 214
removal ............. 178-183 replacement .............. 216
replacement .......... 185-186 barrel and fore end
carrier removal .............. 210-214
removal .................. 183 replacement .......... 216-217
replacement .......... 184-185 breech bolt and link
trigger plate . removal .............. 214-215
removal .................. 183 replacement ......... 215
replacement .............. 185 butt stock
operation (See Operation) removal . 214
Remington shotgun, M31 replacement .............. 216
cleaning and lubrication ......... 160 carrier
data ........................ 143 removal .................. 214
description ............... 137-140 replacement .......... 215-216
general ................ 140-143 trigger guard
field inspection removal ................. 214
assembled parts, faulty ........ 158 replacement .............. 216
general ................ 158-159 operation (See Operation)
operation of gun ............ 157 Sear, Stevens shotgun, M620A, etc.. 68
functioning ............... 146-149 Shell
groups description ................... 7
barrel Migratory Game Act, provision of
removal .................. 149 for. 7
replacement .............. 156 removal from magazine and cham-
slide, breechblock, and carrier bher ........................ 231
removal ............. 149-152 use of the word ................ 3
replacement .......... 152-156 Shell cut-off, Winchester, M12 ..... 39
trigger plate Shell stop(s)
removal .................. 149 Ithaca, M37................ 92
replacement .............. 156 Remington, Mll and Sportsman.. 166
operation (See Operation) Remington, M31 ............... 142
Report of ammunition accidents .... 248 Savage, M720 ................. 198
255
TM 9-285
SHOTGUNS, ALL TYPES
S-Cont'd Page No. Page No.

Shell stop (s)-(Cont'd) trigger plate


Stevens, M620, etc ............. 62 removal .............. 80-81
Winchester, M97............... 16 replacement ............ 81-82
Slide operation .................. 69-73
Ithaca, M37 ................... 90 loading and unloading:
Remington, M31 ............... 142 gun .71
Slide and sliding breech, Stevens, loading the chamber only 73
magazine ................ 71
M620, etc ................... 65-66 magaz
Stock
Slide handle Ithaca, M37 ................. 90
Ithaca, M37 ................... 90 Remington, M10 .............. 114
nomenclature and parts ......... 4 Remington, Mll and Sportsman.. 163
Slide lock Remington, M31 .............. 140
malfunction, effect of ........... 9 Savage, M720 ................. 195
Stevens, M620A, etc ............ 68 Stevens, M620A, etc............ 62
Slide stop, description, Ithaca, Winchester, M12 .............. 39
M37 ...................... 92-93 Winchester, M97 .............. 13
Sliding breech description, Stevens, Stoppages and immediate
M620A, etc. ................... 65 action .224-231
general discussion of ........... 224
"Solid frame" defined............. 5 general discussion of.224
malfunctions, cause and cor-
Sporting guns, use of .. rection................ 226-231
Sporting skeet and trap gun, classi- shell, removal from chamber and
cation of ...................... 6 magazine ...... .. 231

Sportsman model (See Remington stoppages and immediate


shotgun, Mll and Sportsman) action ................. 224-226
Standard nomenclature, use of..... 3 Storage of ammunition .......... 245
ammunition .................. 239 (See also under Maintenance)
Stevens shotgun, M,620A, etc. T
cleaning and lubrication ....... 86-87 "Take-down" defined ............. 4-5
data . ......... ........ 69 Trigger, description, Stevens,
description . ...... 59-62 M620A, etc.................... 68
general .................. 62-68 Trigger guard group
field inspection .............. 84-86 Savage, M720 ................. 200
assembled parts, faulty ..... 85-86 Winchester, M12 ............... 39
general .................. 86 Trigger plate
operation of gun ........... 84-85 Ithaca, M37 .................. 90
functioning ........ ...... 73-75 Remington, M31............... 142
groups Remington, Mll and Sportsman. . 167
bayonet attachment, barrel, Stevens, M620A, etc ............ 66
magazine, and operating Winchester, M97............... 13
handle Trigger pull, testing .............. 7-8
removal .................. 75 Testing assembled gun
replacement ........... 83-84 Ithaca, M37 ............... 108-109
lifter Remington, M10 ........... 133-134
removal and replacement.... 81 Remington, Mll and Sportsman.. 189
slide and sliding breech Remington, M31 ............... 157
removal ............... 75-80 Savage, M720 ............. 219-220
replacement .............. 83 Stevens, M620A, etc.......... 84-85
stock trigger pull ................... 7-8
removal ................... 80 Winchester, M12 ............. 55-56
replacement ............ 82-83 Winchester, M97 ............ 32-33
256
TM 9-285
INDEX
T-Cont'd Page No. Page No.
Trigger safety trigger guard
Ithaca, M37 ................... 93 removal .......... ....... 47
Remington, M31 ............... 143 replacement ............ 54-55
Trigger safety lock, Winchester, M12 41 Winchester shotgun, M97
Types of guns (See Classification) cleaning and lubrication...... 34-37
data ....................... 16-17
U description ....... .... 10-13
general ................. 13-16
Unloading (See under Operation) field inspection ............ 32-33
assembled parts, faulty ..... 33-34
W general ........... ..... 34
Winchester shotgun, M12 operation of gun ........... 32-34
cleaning and lubrication ......... 58 functioning ... 20-23
groups
data ......................... 41
barrel replacement ........ 30-32
description ................... 38-39 . ..
bayonet attachment (solid-
general .................. 39-41 frame gun)
field inspection .............. 55-58 removal ... 24-25
assembled parts, faulty ...... 56-57 replacement .... 32
general .............. 7-58 breech bolt
operation of gun ............. 56 removal ................. 28
functioning ................. 46-47 replacement .............. 30
groups carrier
barrel, magazine and action slide removal .............. 25-28
group (take-down gun) replacement .............. 30
removal .................. 47 magazine and action slide (solid-
replacement .............. 55 frame gun)
bayonet attachment, barrel, removal .................. 25
magazine, and action slide replacement ............ 30-32
groups (solid-frame gun) trigger guard bow
removal .................. 47 removal .................. 28
replacement .............. 55 replacement ............ 28-30
breech bolt hammer gun .................. 4
removal and replacement .... 54 operation (See Operation)

LA.G. 062.11 (10-7-42)


O.O. 461/18885 O.O. (10-22-42)
ITT GRA WAO 12 Dec. 071945Z J

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:


G. C. MARSHALL,
Chief of Staff.
OFFICIAL:
J. A. ULIO,
Major General,
The Adjutant General.
DISTRIBUTION: R 9(2); IBn 9(1); IC 9(4), 11(30), 19(8).
(For explanation of symbols, see FM 21-6)
257